Page 32 – Homesthetics

Learn How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Brilliantly

Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof

Acrylic Paint Thinner 101 | How to Thin Your Acrylic Paints Correctly

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands

8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

Best Canvas for Acrylic Painting | Student & Artist Grade

13 Best Acrylic Paints for Beginners & Professionals

10 Best Paper for Acrylic Paint

103 Best Acrylic Painting Ideas

Colored pencils are some of the easiest and most exciting mediums for putting those vibrant colors onto paper. It is not only satisfying to take up a neat little set and get right down to fill any blank space up with vivid shades and stunning textures, but it’s also a great way to let the day’s steam off and bust that stress well!

You do get a lot of versatility out of color pencils than most other color mediums which could take time to get used to.

However, the one thing that could be really tricky regarding color pencils is when you get that unwanted stray line out of the boundary, which just won’t erase. It can be pretty frustrating, especially for beginners to scrub out such marks and stains which can ruin the entire picture.

But the good news is you can easily avail erasable colored pencils that put the problem of color stains on paper right out of the equation! And if this is what you’re looking for right now, then we’re here to get you out of that situation!

'Cause in the following read, we’ll be reviewing some of the best erasable colored pencils for you to check out right now!

Best Erasable Colored Pencils

To help you find the best erasable colored pencils for your needs, we've put together a list of the top options available on the market today. So, without further ado, here’s the list of the 6 best erasable colored pencils.

Tombow Irojiten Colored Pencil - Best for Luxurious Colors

Tombow Irojiten Colorpencils with enamel finish - Pack of 3...

Elegant enamel finish
90 unique colors

The Japanese color brand Tombow is reputed globally, owing to its Irojiten range of colors that produces some of the most vivid and creamy textures ever! These pencils come in two dominant variant packs- “Vivid” which gives off the most luxuriantly dark tones and “Tranquil” which consists of lighter colors.

We did try out the “Vivid” range and now duly realize why it’s known as one of the best color pencils ever, and that too, in the erasable colors department!

Experience

The Irojiten Vivid comes in a set of 24 or 12 colors that also includes a color pencil eraser and a single-slot sharpener. The wooden casing is made using hard cedar wood which makes it considerably formidable and resistant to breakage or splintering.

But the best part about these was, unquestionably, the color pay-off. We were simply stunned by how beautifully the leads glided onto the paper and delivered rich shades of vibrant hues in the pitch-perfect color saturation it offered.

The coolest thing about this one is that it blends so satisfyingly smoothly when it comes to blending and layering upon colors. Unlike most other color pencil variants that get patchy especially while layering, these go on like a dream with even consistency in every way.

Now, to say about the “erasability” of these colors, there were a few pros and cons. The block of eraser that the set includes for you does a fine job of removing almost all of the stains for you. But, since the color is that rich, it might leave behind the faintest hint of the stain behind, which, however, won’t even be visible to the eyes if you didn’t look closely.

But, the problem with this is that it might not work the same way with a regular eraser for that matter.

But, apart from this, this is one color pencil set that in our opinion every art enthusiast should try out for once at least!

Pros

Lux colors and incredibly consistent pay-off
Doesn’t damage or harm the paper in any way, even while being erased
Could be used by both beginners and professionals

Cons

The lead could feel a tad bit hard to maneuver initially
Pretty expensive

Quantity: 90 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 90 Unique Colors

Prisma Col-Erase Erasable Colored Pencil - Best for Precision Work

Sale

Prismacolor Col-Erase Erasable Colored Pencils, Non-Photo...

Lighter than standard blue, non-photo blue is designed for...
Non-repro blue color eliminates the need to erase before...

Prism's Color has always been known to offer a range of some of the finest grade color mediums for the world to use and create spectacular art pieces.

The Col-Erase Erasable Colored Pencils from the brand work beautifully to deliver a stunning color payoff. The durable and robust medium point keeps the pencils from cracking at any point in time during usage even under constant pressure.

Experience

We did have high hopes for this Prismacolor product, and in all honesty, it performed really well for that. The color pay-off is decent gliding on evenly even during long stretches and strokes. The comfortable, easy grip and size of the pencils make it ideal for beginners and professionals alike.

When we tested out the color-saturation and layering capacity of the pencils, we were pleased to find that the medium to fine lead of these pencils worked with the ease of the standard graphite pencils, because the wax content was considerably less compared to other brands. This prevented the smattering of colors, making it excellent for precision detailing.

Each pencil comes with an eraser attached to the pencil head that helps you to erase any extra colored lines. It does the job well enough for fine lines and even the standard strokes. The only issue regarding this could be if you go really dark on the lines and over a large surface area, in which case it could leave a stain behind.

All in all, The Col-Erase from Prisma color is one of the most affordable and fine options in the erasable color department that you shouldn’t definitely miss out on!

Pros

Works like the standard graphite pencils making for easy and clean use
Brilliant color deliverance and layerability
The erasers work quite well in erasing stains and unwanted colored lines without damaging the paper
Ideal for precision work

Cons

Could get a tad bit patchy when it comes to filling larger blank spaces

Quantity: 12 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 1 color

Staedtler Erasable Colored Pencils - Best for All Ages

STAEDTLER Erasable Colored Pencils, 12 Colors (14450NC12)

12 colors-erasable pre-sharpened
Anti breaking coating covers entire length lead to prevent...

So when it’s Staedtler, you know that there isn’t really a chance of things going wrong in your art gig. Recognized as one of the top art supply brands around the globe, Staedtler does a marvelous job at coloring life for you!

And the Erasable Colored Pencils from the brand do just that and allow the scope for experimentation owing to their erasable colors! So now you can color to your heart’s content without worrying about making mistakes!

Experience

Well, we knew that we could expect nothing but the absolute best from this German-based brand that has been a favorite amongst every artist since it’s emergence into the field.

One of the hallmarks of Staedtler is the brilliantly designed hexagonal pencils that provide a pretty easy and comfortable grip and an incredibly durable, crack, or chip-resistant overall structure.

The lead itself is highly pigmented and pays off smoothly in a semi-waxy finish. This fine, soft lead works beautifully for detailing and filling up significant blank spaces. These features make the pencils an ideal coloring medium for literally all ages.

The pencils come with an eraser stump end that you could use to erase bits and portions of colored areas. The erasers are latex-free and work fine, and there isn’t much that’s left behind on the paper once you’ve used them, but these can be a tad bit hard in form. It’s better to use a thicker paper texture for these erasers.

But apart from this, the pencils are an appropriate coloring medium for school projects, or for more serious artworks such as illustration and detailing.

Pros

Perfect for all ages
Beautifully designed for easy maneuvering with a chip-resistant structure
Erasers on the pencils do a good job of removing color

Cons

Thinner sketching papers might get affected by the erasers

Quantity: 12 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 12 Unique Colors

Pilot Frixion Erasable Colored Pencils

No products found.

We’ve all had our favorite Pilot pens for a range of purposes that included everything from writing crisp letters to doodling at the back bench. The Frixion Erasable Colored Pencils from the brand is an exclusive range of uniquely designed coloring pencils with non-dusting erasers that works almost like a pen, making coloring the blank spaces an even more enjoyable task for all!

The erasers ensure that a mess-free coloring spree that helps keep the environment clean, especially for kids.

Experience

So although we have greatly loved our days with our favorite Pilots, we were a bit skeptical about the Frixion Colored Pencils, given the fact that we were aware of the mixed reviews that it had got.

But, it did really impress us with the kind of performance it put up even against all of these top brands that we’re reviewing today. These pencils come in a durable casing and deliver almost an inky yet texturized vibrant pay-off that looks absolutely amazing. This makes it a hot favorite amongst kids and an ideal choice for school projects.

This is made even more exciting by the fact that the erasers that you get with these leave no shaving and dirt behind. It cleans up the stains easily and quickly, keeping the worktop clean. The fine tips of the product make it perfect for detailing and intricate work or even writing (what Pilot does best)!

The only part we found to be a tad bit tricky is that you’d really have to add pressure in order to get bolder, more defined lines because the pay-off is kind of diluted and light otherwise, especially when you have to color larger spaces.

Also, we wish that these were a bit more affordable.

Pros

Fine lead makes it pretty easy to detail or write
Mess-free erasing thanks to the non-dusting rubber tips on the pencils
Quite expensive

Cons

Color payoff may become lighter while filling larger spaces
Quite expensive

Quantity: 12 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 12 Unique Colors

Crayola Erasable Colored Pencils

Crayola Erasable Colored Pencils for Kids (50ct), Bulk...

50 ERASABLE COLORED PENCILS: Includes 50 Erasable Crayola...
VIBRANT COLORS: Explore a palette of 50 rich, vibrant colors...

When you read “Crayola,” it’s almost always a trip down memory lane because just about each one of us has grown up using these special brand of colors. And what makes these special is the superior, consistent performance that has essentially woven Crayola into our childhood.

The Erasable colored pencils from the brand offer a decent range of removable colors that is ideal for every kid and for all kinds of school or home projects.

Experience

Apart from the fact that we went absolutely kiddish while testing these out, Crayola still didn’t cease to surprise us with its consistent performance even after all this while! As expected, the color deliverance is great on these that fill up the largest areas on paper without ugly patches or scratches.

However, the leads of these are pretty soft with a greater wax content than those from the other brands. So, although, this pays off in immensely vibrant and rich colors, they can smudge and stain the other portions of the paper.

This is another set that gives you a separate block of erasers, and this really does a fine job of cleaning up the color stains in a jiffy. But these do leave shavings quite a lot, and it might just be difficult to scrub off really dark areas with it. Also, regular erasers won’t quite work.

But, Crayola indeed provides a lot more than most other brands at a price that’s more reasonable and affordable than others.

Basically, the colored pencils from Crayola are ideal for kids but not so much for professionals.

Pros

Rich, vibrant color payoff with a smooth, glossy texture
Eraser cleans up stains well without harming the paper
Very easy to use, especially for kids
Pretty reasonably priced

Cons

Colors can stain and smudge
Erasers do leave a lot of shavings

Quantity: 50 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 50 Unique Colors

Crayola Twistable Erasable Colored Pencils

Crayola Erasable Colored Pencils (36ct), Colored Pencils for...

CRAYOLA ERASABLE COLORED PENCILS: Includes 36 Erasable...
VIBRANT COLORS: Explore a palette of 36 rich, vibrant colors...

The Crayola Twistable Erasable is a newer launch from the brand that boasts of an exclusive range of twistable tube pencils that has a durable plastic casing rather than the traditional wooden variant.

The colors are as pretty and vibrant as the original Crayola colored pencils. The Twistable pencils are entirely erasable and each pencil comes equipped with rubber tips at their ends, that can be used to scrub out any unwanted mark or stain.

Experience

The Twistables from Crayola are definitely a fantastic upgrade to what we reviewed for you earlier from the same brand. It delivers a decent color payoff in every stroke, gliding smoothly over the surface.

The leads will obviously need no sharpening as you can simply twist it up and use it to color whenever you want. This makes it so much more convenient and easier to use and is perfect for kids to use anywhere. The set contains 12 shades that come with the erasers at the end.

The eraser does a good job of removing colored lines or marks. However, we thought that compared to the classic Crayola erasable pencils that came with a separate block of eraser, this one might just be a bit too patchy touch to use, especially over larger surfaces.

Also, darker strokes could be a challenge and effort to remove even using these erasers.

Pros

Very convenient, non-toxic, and hence, very safe to use by kids
Delivers a decent color pay-off
Pretty affordable than the ones from most other brands
Erasers work well, but not as much for darker lines

Cons

Layering could be a bit difficult using these

Quantity: 36 | Type: Wax-Based | Erasable: Yes | Colors: 36 Unique Colors

Best Erasable Colored Pencils Comparison Table

Product	Quantity	Type	Erasable	Colors
Tombow Irojiten Colored Pencil	90	Wax-Based	Yes	90 Unique Colors
Prisma Col-Erase Erasable Colored Pencil	12	Wax-Based	Yes	1 color
Staedtler Erasable Colored Pencils	12	Wax-Based	Yes	12 Unique Colors
Pilot Frixion Erasable Colored Pencils	12	Wax-Based	Yes	12 Unique Colors
Crayola Erasable Colored Pencils	50	Wax-Based	Yes	50 Unique Colors
Crayola Twistable Erasable Colored Pencils	36	Wax-Based	Yes	36 Unique Colors

Buying Guide For The Best Erasable Colored Pencils

While purchasing a set of erasable colored pencils isn’t normally a big deal under any circumstance, knowing how to select just the right product will take more than just time and basic know-how regarding the product itself.

Art supplies don’t come in cheap and to land up with an inferior-grade product would be mean a loss of money and time. Also, things like colors or other art mediums should be bought with extra care and attention to ensure that they are absolutely easy to use, especially by children.

And, to simplify things further for you, we have decided to include this short buyers’ guide for you to know what to consider while buying erasable colored pencils!

Lead Quality: The quality of the lead is the main factor to consider when buying whatever kind of colored pencils you want to buy. Remember, softer leads will have more wax content while harder leads could be a tad bit difficult to work with initially.

How easy it might be to erase the lines created by either type will depend on the kind of pigment formulation the brand offers. This will also decide what brands would work best for children and beginners and what should you avoid if you’re a professional. So, you could test a few out individually before deciding on a complete set.

Crack and chip-resistance: the leads of the colored pencils, as well as the casing, should be durable enough to resist cracking or chipping which might lead to wastage of the product and hence, stacks heavily against the investment. Softer leads are more prone to breaking and should be handled with care during usage.
Eraser: This is the essential determinant for an erasable pencil. The erasers provided to remove the colored marks should work well enough to not leave any stain or mess behind. It’s always a good idea to go for those that come with non-dusting erasers.

These keep your worktop super-clean and mess-free for. You should also consider whether or not you could use a regular eraser for the kind of pigments your pencils offer by checking how well the one included in the set fares.

Safety: Always, and we mean, ALWAYS go for non-toxic products. Otherwise, the shavings from the erasers mixed with the pigments from the pencils can cause respiratory diseases if they aren’t certifiably safe. This is where you should, at all costs, consider investing in a good brand, especially if kids are gonna use it.
Price: Although colored pencils generally come at a really affordable and reasonable price tag, certain top-notch brands can be pretty expensive. However, if you’re looking to buy a set to experiment with or keep it casual and not-so-professional, then we would advise you to go for individual purchases from different brands rather than investing in a full set right away.

This way, you get to customize your own pallet and understand which brands and kinds of color will work best for you while cutting down on the overall significantly.

Erasable Colored Pencils FAQ's

While erasable colored pencils may not have the same color intensity and vibrancy as regular colored pencils, they are still a great option for beginners and for those who want to make fewer mistakes in their artwork.

Erasable colored pencils can be used on most types of paper, but it’s recommended to use them on paper with a smooth texture for the best results. Rough or textured paper can cause the eraser to smudge the colors and leave marks.

Erasable colored pencils are usually sold in sets, but individual colors can also be purchased separately. It’s best to purchase a set that includes a wide range of colors to allow for more creativity.

Erasable colored pencil marks can be blended like regular colored pencil marks, but it’s important to blend them before erasing, as the eraser can remove some of the color and affect the blending.

Conclusion

We appreciate you taking the time to read our article on the best erasable colored pencils. We're confident that this information has given you the insights you need to make an informed decision on which erasable colored pencils to purchase. The right set of erasable colored pencils can make all the difference in your artistic creations, allowing you to make adjustments and achieve the perfect results effortlessly.

Out of these 6 best erasable colored pencils, here are our top three recommendations:

Tombow Irojiten Colored Pencils - Best for Luxurious Colors: Packed with a range of vivid and creamy colors, the Tombow Irojiten Colored Pencils is an ideal option for those who seek top-notch color payoff and blendability.
Prismacolor Col-Erase Erasable Colored Pencils - Best for Precision Work: With its easy-to-use design and excellent erasability, Prismacolor Col-Erase is a good option for artists who need precision in their work without worrying about making mistakes.
Staedtler Erasable Colored Pencils - Best for All Ages: Thanks to its comfortable grip and high pigmentation, the Staedtler Erasable Colored Pencils is the right choice for artists of all ages and skill levels.

Armed with these recommendations, you're ready to embark on a creative journey filled with vibrant colors and endless possibilities. Don't be afraid to experiment with different techniques and color combinations, as the erasable nature of these colored pencils makes it easy to refine your skills and achieve your desired results. So, go ahead and unleash your imagination with these fantastic erasable colored pencils. Happy coloring!

Related Articles

15 Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners

11 Best Colored Pencils for Beginners & Professional Artists

9 Best Cheap Colored Pencils

13 Best Sharpener For Colored Pencils

11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

7 Best Electric Pencil Sharpener For Colored Pencils

10 Best Paper For Colored Pencils

Learn How to Shade With Colored Pencils Swiftly & Correctly

12 Colored Pencil Tips & Tricks to Enhance Your Skill

Learn How To Use Colored Pencils | 12 Brilliant Beginner Techniques

You Won’t Believe What Colored Pencils Are Made Of!

10 Colored Pencil Techniques to Enhance Your Drawings Swiftly

Learn How To Blend Colored Pencils Correctly Fast

10 Best Derwent Gift Sets

The first thing which comes to mind when we hear ‘pastels’ is that no preparation is needed.

Most mediums out there require some time for preparation before starting the painting process but pastels are ready for use anytime we feel like getting creative.

The second important feature of these colorful sticks is that they are portable. This is an outcome of them being ready to use anytime. Moreover, they are handy and most of the time will come in a tightly secured box.

However, being easily available does not necessarily mean they are easy to use as well.

In fact, pastels are slightly harder to work with as compared to other mediums due to the fact that we have to apply them directly onto the surface. But with practice, the process will eventually become easy for creating something beautiful.

In today’s article, we will review 7 of the best oil pastels used by artists worldwide. Apart from that, we will also share basic information that you will want to know about these mediums.

Best Oil Pastels

Take a moment and have a look at this list of the 7 best oil pastels we’ve carefully selected to meet any of your creative requirements.

Sakura Cray-Pas Oil Pastels - Best for Beginner-Friendly Experience

Sale

SAKURA Cray-Pas Expressionist Oil Pastel Set - Soft Oil...

The Original Oil Pastels: Sakura color pastels are the...
Expressionist Range for Painterly Effects: This oil pastels...

From an endless collection of Sakura Cray-Pas oil pastels, we chose to start off with this pack for a lot of reasons which you will see in a minute.

The pack contains 50 non-toxic sticks of different shades that are very rich in pigments. It also comes with a color chart which can be handy for beginners.

Experience

One of the features which make the Sakura Cray-Pas Oil Pastels very dear to users is that it is beginner-friendly.

Firstly, the fact that it comes with a color chart to guide learners makes it easy to use. We also like that the chart shows the pigments as they really are when applied.

We find that using this pack to guide younger artists does not raise any concerns because they are non-toxic.

If there are children, you will understand the worries that come with having colors lying either in the studio or around the house.

But that is not the case with these pastels because you can go anywhere and be worry-free, except for them ruining the precious sticks, of course.

However, we think the best aspect of these pastels is they can be sold individually as well. We tend to run out of blue or yellow every so often when doing landscape paintings and this is where the option to buy a single stick can be very helpful.

Besides, they are inexpensive as each pastel costs $0.67. For those starting out with a single art concept, it would be a waste to purchase the whole set at once.

But a collection of 50 colors is still too less to choose from. We have to rely on mixing/blending in order to get the desired shades for our paintings.

Nonetheless, we notice the pastels provide very tight texture which is what artists would look for to achieve full coverage. Along with that, they also deliver a smooth outlook with an opaque touch to it.

All in all, we would suggest getting this pack to those artists who are looking for quality over quantity.

Pros

The pastels are beginner-friendly and come with a color chart to see the actual results when used
They are non-toxic which is suitable for younger artists to use as well
Each pastel is available individually and costs $0.67, so it’s perfect for artists on a budget

Cons

The range of colors is too less, making blending the only option to achieve desired shades

Material: Soft | Quantity: 50 | Container: Box | Dimensions: 4.4 x 9.9 x 0.8 inches

Pentel Arts Oil Pastels - Best for Budget-Conscious Artists

Pentel PHN12CP Oil Pastel Set with Carrying Case,12-Color...

Brilliant colors
Easily blendable

Pentel has been around for about 70 years and above. To say that they produce great-quality art supplies throughout the years would be a correct statement.

Because the brand focuses on delivering art supplies for students, the products are also highly affordable - and the pastels are no exception. Their retail price is mostly under $10 for a number of 50 pastel sticks.

Experience

We can’t help but mention the price tag first. 50 sticks of pastels for under $10 is like a steal. Not only are we impressed by the quantity but we also loved how the results turn out.

No doubt, the pigments are as rich as those of high-end brands but they do produce perfect strokes on a surface. What is also not compromised is the blend and binder that these pastels are capable of delivering.

Because they are relatively cheaper, it makes them suitable for children to use as well. It would be heartbreaking to give expensive pastels to kids when they are liable to break them, especially if we are on a tight budget.

The only disadvantage we find with these pastels is that they are not available for buying individually.

If we run out of a couple of colors, we have to turn to other brands which provide individual purchases. And buying a whole new box of these would be a waste if we rarely use the other colors.

We would say that the pastels are great if you’re just starting out or perhaps to purchase for young artists.

Also, if you are on a restricted budget for purchasing high-end brands but want to buy quality sticks anyway, we will highly recommend this option that won’t leave you disappointed.

Pros

These pastels come at a much cheaper retail price compared to other brands because they are intended for students
The blend and stroke are exceptional as compared to its price
Children can also use these pastels for fun because of the cheap price

Cons

They are not available for purchasing individual sticks

Material: Soft | Quantity: 432 | Container: Box | Dimensions: 13.4 x 10.6 x 3.4 inches

Caran d’Ache Neopastels - Best for Smooth Blending

Caran D'ache Neopastel - Set of 96 - Assorted Colors...

Oil pastel. I use the pigment of high quality, purity of...
Supplies

Here are pastel sticks that fall between student and artist grades in terms of classification and ratings.

The Caran d’Ache Neopastels is great for artists who are on the journey of mastering oil pastels as a painting medium. Learners too can go for these pastels if they want to take on another level of pastels.

Experience

What we really admire about the Caran d’Ache Neopastels is its consistency. It delivers a soft and creamy texture while working.

We can understand why many artists would prefer this option if they’re looking for easy and smooth blending. And because the pastels are really soft, they are rich in pigments and that can produce vibrant results which anyone would want for their artwork.

The pack comes with a color chart which is very different from the one we get with the Sakura Cray-Pas pastels. In the chart, you’ll see a more detailed explanation to give artists a visual guide before mixing colors.

The chart specifies includes everything one needs to know about the pastels - from their unique names to pigments and lightfastness. So if you’re a self-taught beginner, this would be a good pick to get yourself familiar with mixing colors.

We took it from different artists who said that the pastels are a great investment and that there is a wide range of colors within the pack. Sure enough, we didn’t get disappointed since they do justice to our work.

If you’re wondering, the overall online rating of these pastels is 4.7 from 5.0. With an affordable price and brilliant quality, we feel these are indeed worth investing in.

One of their best features is they are available separately too. Imagine running out of a few shades and not having to spend money on a whole box of pastels over time and again - that is in itself a great deal.

But sometimes the quality of the pigments can differ with each stick. At times, we find some shades to be too dry to work with.

All in all, we would suggest going for this option if you want to shift the focus from your previous pastels to a pack of superior-quality ones.

Pros

Pastels are extraordinarily smooth and creamy which is perfect for blending
Pack comes with a color chart that provides basic and easy details
Available for purchasing individually so it saves a lot of money

Cons

Some shades can get too dry to work with at times

Material: Soft | Quantity: 96 | Container: Box | Dimensions: 13.5 x 9.8 x 0.8 inches

Holbein Artists’ Oil Pastels

Holbein Artist Oil Pastel Set of 40 Colors in Cardboard Box

One of the high-end brands is Holbein. It is likely you will know this if you have been around art supplies for a while.

These Japan-based pastels are decently hard and rectangular in shape, which makes them perfect when working on outlining and small details.

What makes this stand out from the rest of oil pastels is their chalky composition.

Experience

We really like how these pastels provide full coverage when working with backgrounds. Moreover, they are pretty easy and quick to blend because of the chalk and oil combination. They hardly spread over the painting nor are they messy.

Because their structure leans a bit to the hard side, we find them to be great for working with minor details in the artwork. This is also because they are not easily breakable as soft pastels are.

The rectangular shape of the pastels also has a part to play with the texture of the painting. it really gives a fine gradient touch when toning the surface.

But what surpasses every aspect of the pastels is that the pack contains up to 225 colors which makes our work pretty easy since there is no need to blend colors to get the desired shade.

This also saves us a lot of money which we could have spent trying to find a box with different other shades.

The pastels are available in a set as well as individually. In case we used up a shade, it will be pretty easy to order one right away.

If you’re wondering if the price is a major drawback, you’re right. Even though they are available to buy separately, each pastel costs $3.29 and that can be too much for artists with a tight budget.

But to be on the safe side, you can always try out a few shades before deciding if these pastels will meet your requirements.

Besides, you can always get only a few of these and mix them with other brands to get a completely unique piece.

Pros

Chalky composition helps make blending quick and easy
Perfect for creating outlines and sharp edges
Total number of 225 sticks are available in the set for the artist to explore a wider range of colors
These pastels are also available individually and as a set

Cons

One stick costs $3.29, which may not be ideal for every artist

Material: Soft | Quantity: 40 | Container: Cardboard Box | Dimensions: 9.2 x 7.2 x 0.8 inches

Mungyo Gallery Soft Oil Pastels

MUNGYO Gallery Artists' Soft Oil Pastels Professional, 48...

Mungyo Gallery Soft Oil Pastels Set of 48 - Assorted Colors

You probably have come across this brand while watching tutorials every now and then. Mungyo is very popular in the world of oil pastels currently.

While the quality is very much like that of Sennelier’s, these come at a more affordable price, however.

These oil pastels have a smooth and buttery touch to them which makes them highly preferable.

Experience

As we have stated before, they are high-quality pastels that come at a very affordable price of $25 per set. This is one of the reasons why we are drawn to these colorful sticks.

Although the number of pastels is limited to only 48 sticks in one set, we love the consistency it delivers to the paintings. More importantly, the coverage is compact and smooth.

The best feature when it comes to these pastels is that they offer extraordinary results while highlighting since they are very vibrant and rich in pigment.

If you’re looking for pastels that are easy to use, we highly recommend these for their amazing composition as a whole. Both texture and consistency make these a perfect choice for the complete beginner who just started out with the basics of oil pastels.

But unlike most of the good pastels we’ve reviewed, these do not come with a color chart. On top of this, we also found that they are not available for buying separately. It leaves us no choice but to look at other brands and find a similar shade to the one we used up from this set.

Overall, we can say these are ideal for learners who want to explore good-quality oil pastels without having to spend too much money on them. Also, they can compare to see the difference between average pastels and those that hold superior quality.

Pros

Easy and simple to use which makes them ideal for complete beginners
Lower price than high-end pastels, given their wonderful quality
Working with highlights is very easy with the pastels since they are soft and contain a high level of pigment

Cons

The set does not have a color chart which should include details about the pastels
They are not available for individual purchase

Material: Soft | Quantity: 48 | Container: Box | Dimensions: 9.3 x 6.5 x 0.7 inches

Crayola Oil Pastels

Crayola Oil Pastels Classpack (336ct), 12 Brilliant Opaque...

CRAYOLA OIL PASTELS: This oil pastel collection features 336...
OIL PASTEL COLORS: Red, Pink, Orange, Peach, Yellow, Yellow...

Whether you’re into paintings or not, it would be a lie if you have not heard of Crayola before.

At some point of time, you probably have come across this brand, especially as a kid when art class was necessary to enhance our creative minds.

There are many reasons why we included this on the list - one of them is they make cleaning up very easy.

Experience

We will first begin by stating the comfort of holding these large-size oil sticks.

Whenever we paint or sketch with most oil pastels, we have to keep in mind to always be extra careful not to break them. But working with the Crayola oil pastels reduces those worries since they are thick, which makes them less susceptible to breakage.

Of course, that is the reason why these are perfect for children and young artists because they can get quite reckless at times.

But that is not only ideal for youngsters since we also find this structure beneficial for certain uses. For instance, when having to work on filling the background or creating sharp outlines, we can do so with ease and there’s no tension behind it.

The sharpened tip is also one of the best features required for the painting process. With a sharp tip like this, creating precise lines is not an issue.

However, the quality of these pastels is nowhere near that of high-end brands. But that does not come as a surprise since these come at a pretty affordable price because they are meant for children.

Keeping that aside, if you are looking for oil pastels that can serve both you and the kids, we would suggest going for this option.

Pros

Really affordable and good for children to use
They are both rigid and big which makes holding them very comfortable
Great for working with backgrounds

Cons

Quality of these pastels is average compared to high-end brands

Material: Hard | Quantity: 12 | Container: Box | Dimensions: 4.4 x 1.4 x 3.4 inches (each)

Sennelier Oil Pastel Set

Sennelier Cardboard Oil Pastel Set, 48 Count (Pack of 1),...

Usable on wood, paper, canvas and metal
Extremely lightfast

Last on the list, we have a high-end brand that most artists would know.

The French-based brand Sennelier has been around for a long time and had served great artists such as Picasso.

You can just imagine the kind of quality Sennelier would provide when it comes to oil pastels. This particular set is undeniably great for delivering marvelous results.

Experience

We discussed some brands which offer oil pastels with high consistency and smoothness, but the same features that Sennelier pastels have are unbeatable.

We can tell the difference when comparing a similar test painting using Sennelier oil pastels and inexpensive sticks. The vibrancy which the former delivers is classic and rich. Also, working with these pastels allow us to have more control over the sticks.

The set contains 120 unique colors which can fulfill any artist’s desired shade, either directly or through blending.

This is a great aspect that we would look for in our oil pastels because we don’t have to go to other brands in search of a single intended shade. And unlike liquid paints, blending oil pastels is a bit harder, therefore, the wide range of colors reduces that tension as well.

Along with that, the price of this set is already high enough for artists with a limited budget. So, settling for this alone already solved most of our shade-hunting problem.

Artists who wonder what the color chart is like would be glad to know that it contains the list of colors and details on opacity and their lightfastness. Beginners would also find this feature beneficial while learning about oil pastels.

The pastels can also be bought individually as well as a set, which again prevents us from going through the shade-hunting process all over again.

But as we have mentioned, the price of these high-end pastels is very high and might not be reasonable for students and budget artists.

Pros

Pastels deliver outstanding consistency and vibrancy to the piece
120 different shades in the set which most artists prefer to reduce the process of blending
Set also comes with a handy color chart which is easy to understand

Cons

The cost of these pastels can be too much for many budget artists and students

Material: Soft | Quantity: 48 | Container: Cardboard Box | Dimensions: 10.8 x 6.9 x 0.9 inches

Best Oil Pastels Comparison Table

Product	Material	Quantity	Container	Dimensions
Sakura Cray-Pas Oil Pastels	Soft	50	Box	4.4 x 9.9 x 0.8 inches
Pentel Arts Oil Pastels	Soft	432	Box	13.4 x 10.6 x 3.4 inches
Caran d’Ache Neopastels	Soft	96	Box	13.5 x 9.8 x 0.8 inches
Holbein Artists’ Oil Pastels	Soft	40	Cardboard Box	9.2 x 7.2 x 0.8 inches
Mungyo Gallery Soft Oil Pastels	Soft	48	Box	9.3 x 6.5 x 0.7 inches
Crayola Oil Pastels	Hard	12	Box	4.4 x 1.4 x 3.4 inches (each)
Sennelier Oil Pastel Set	Soft	48	Cardboard Box	10.8 x 6.9 x 0.9 inches

Difference Between Oil Pastels

Before we move forward with the reviews, let’s take a quick look at how oil-based pastels are different from those pastels with different compositions.

If you are an advanced artist who is already familiar with the differences, we’d suggest skipping this part. But if you are new to pastels and want to purchase a set, you might want to go through this brief guide.

Soft pastels

From the name itself, you can tell that these sticks produce rich pigments. They are perfect for creating really bright and luminous paintings.

Because they are soft in form, it makes them pretty delicate and fragile to work with. However, this does not mean that one should refrain from using them since you get one of the best results by using them.

The advantage of using soft pastels is that they are great for blending, especially with fingers.

However, keep in mind there are certain types of soft pastels that are toxic like those with cadmium pigments. Therefore, we would recommend looking for non-toxic soft pastels if you have children around by going through the labels first.

Pencil pastels

Contrary to soft pastels, pencil pastels are usually hard-structured and slightly tough to blend. However, what they are perfect for is that they can create fine and accurate lines. They are also good for highlighting small details.

And unlike soft pastels, these are pointed and rigid, which makes them unbreakable when used.

They can actually be used as a separate medium for minor details to complement and complete your oil pastel painting.

Hard pastels

As the name suggests, these sticks are pretty hard and deliver lesser pigments to your paintings.

But like the pencil pastels, they do a good job when you need to create precise outlines and extra highlights. Besides that, many artists use them for creating backgrounds.

Also, if you are a traveling artist, these will come in very handy in your creative journeys because they are not fragile.

Oil pastels

Finally, let’s look at oil pastels and see why they are favored by most artists to create beautiful artwork.

Oil pastels have a different composition altogether. They are made of wax and contain mineral or linseed oil. This gives them a reason to produce vibrant colors. They are also soft which makes them pleasant to hold while painting.

But the only drawback of this pastel type is that it can get too tough to blend when working on rough textures due to their thickness. Keeping that in mind, the one thing that makes oil pastels stand out from the rest is they have no requirement for a preserving medium or a fixative. While other types of pastels depend on a spray to prevent discoloration, oil pastels only require to be stored away from direct heat.

The second striking difference is that oil pastels can be mixed with certain chemicals to thin them down creating various effects.

Note: Remember that oil sticks and oil pastels are not the same. The former can dry out after some time, while the latter does not.

Buying Guide For The Best Oil Pastel

Before purchasing a set of oil pastels, there are a few things you might want to first take into consideration.

Grade

Like other art supplies, oil pastels also come in two different grades: Artist and Student. Deciding which one is for you requires knowing where you and your skills stand. Take a quick look at the two options for a better understanding.

Artist

The reason why you see some oil pastels are termed as artist grade is that they have superior quality in performance and pigments. In fact, if we look at every aspect, artist-grade pastels surpass others.

Moreover, artist-quality oil pastels are resistant to oxidation. They contain more oil than wax in their composition.

Caran d’Ache Neopastels, Holbein Artist, Sennelier, and Sakura Cray-Pas are some examples of artist grade pastels.

Student

On the other hand, student-grade oil pastels have lesser pigments. They also contain more wax and less oil in the composition.

This is the reason why they are more affordable so that students or artists on a budget can have access to them financially.

But not all student grade pastels have compromised quality to a large extent. There are brands such as Mungyo Gallery and Van Gogh that offer the best kind of student-grade oil pastels.

Pigment

Lightfastness means the amount of light that can affect the pigments of these paints. We all have some idea about how different colors reflect and absorb light.

This information is available mostly on the color chart which comes with the set. Therefore, when buying oil pastels for serious paintings, we suggest looking for those with a color chart.

Consistency

The consistency of pastels entirely depends on your preferences. If you are going for a vibrant and luminous look, then those with a creamy recipe will work for you.

But if you’re looking for kid-friendly and good for outlines, you will want to look for options that lean more towards the hard side.

Individual or Set

By now, you would already know the importance of buying from a brand that offers both individual and sets, finding the best oil pastel set for you can greatly emphasize your efforts.

The reason this is very important is that it will save you a lot of money and time, especially when working on a larger artwork. The fact of having to replace the same color time and again will not be convenient if you can’t purchase it individually.

However, if you’re a beginner working on smaller projects, a set would be the ideal pick for you.

Tools and supplies for oil pastels

Tortillon

A tortillon is a tool useful for blending pastels. It is nothing fancy but a piece of paper that is tightly rolled up so that it forms a tip at the end which can assist the artist with blending the colors smoothly.

Palette knife

A palette knife is a versatile tool. It can be used to blend liquid paints but for pastels, it can help in the process of scraping off any excess paints to create sharp and clean edges.

Turpentine

Turpentine or other mineral spirits are used for blending colors as well. These solutions help make the colors creamy and soft to blend.

They also help remove any pastel stains which are left on the surface after scraping off the excess paint.

If you use them for blending, you can use a brush and dip them in the turpentine. Wipe off the excess liquid and apply it to the area where you need to blend. It will soften the wax in the oil pastels and make it better for the process of blending.

In case there is a need to clean the areas where the paints are spreading, use a small piece of cloth.

Color shaper

Another one of the blending tools is the color shaper. It is perfect for use with oil pastels because its shape is very similar to that of a brush.

However, the tip does not have any bristles but instead has either a silicone or a plastic end which is great to blend detailed areas in an oil pastel painting.

Primer

A primer is a necessity in the world of paintings as a whole. If you are an experienced artist, you will know the striking difference between paintings with and without a primer. The primer plays a role in the outcome of a painting.

Without it, your painting will be very hard to manage throughout the entire process. It will create issues when trying to blend colors or working with strokes for that matter.

But if you prime the surface before starting, the results will be completely different. You will see it is smoother to work on and the finished painting will be very alluring.

Fixative

While liquid paints dry out eventually, oil pastels are not the same whatsoever.

Made with oils that do not dry, oil pastels are vulnerable to heat and other elements. This leaves the artist with two options to preserve the painting: framing or using fixatives.

While framing sounds like a perfect idea, not everybody can afford to frame each and every piece of their collection. This is where fixatives come in.

If you want to preserve your oil pastel artwork, use a decent fixative that is made for oil pastels. That will prevent the painting from dust and discoloration in the long run, keeping it fresh.

Oil Pastels FAQ's

Oil pastels are different from other art materials, such as regular pastels or colored pencils, in that they are made with oil and wax, which makes them softer and easier to blend. They also have a more intense and vibrant color than other art materials.

Yes, oil pastels can be used with other art materials, such as acrylic paint, watercolor, or graphite. However, it’s important to use a surface that is suitable for the specific medium, as some surfaces may not be compatible with oil pastels.

Oil pastels are generally considered safe to use, but some brands may contain toxic materials, such as heavy metals or solvents. It’s important to read the labels and follow the safety instructions provided by the manufacturer.

Oil pastels should be stored in a cool, dry place to prevent them from melting or becoming too soft. They should also be kept in their original packaging or a separate container to prevent them from getting dirty or mixing with other colors.

Yes, oil pastel artwork can be preserved by fixing it with a fixative spray or framing it behind glass. It’s important to use a fixative that is suitable for oil pastels to prevent the colors from smudging or fading over time.

Yes, oil pastels can be used for professional artwork and are a popular choice for artists who want to create vibrant and expressive pieces. There are many artists who specialize in oil pastel artwork and have gained recognition for their unique and innovative styles.

Oil pastels can be messy, so it’s important to clean up properly after using them. You can use a soft cloth or tissue to wipe off any excess pastel from your hands or the surface. You should also avoid blowing on the pastels, as this can spread the dust and make the mess worse.

Conclusion

Thank you for taking the time to explore our in-depth article on the best oil pastels. We trust that you found the information valuable and are now equipped with the knowledge you need when deciding which oil pastels to purchase. As you embark on your artistic journey, these oil pastels will help elevate your artwork to a whole new level of vibrancy and depth.

Out of these 7 best oil pastels, here are our top three recommendations:

Sakura Cray-Pas Oil Pastels - Best for Beginner-Friendly Experience: This pack not only comes with a color chart but is also non-toxic and suitable for younger artists. A great option for those new to oil pastel painting.
Pentel Arts Oil Pastels - Best for Budget-Conscious Artists: With an impressive collection of 50 pastel sticks for an affordable price, Pentel Arts Oil Pastels are perfect for student artists or those on a tight budget.
Caran d'Ache Neopastels - Best for Smooth Blending: These pastels boast a soft, creamy texture ideal for smooth blending, making them well-suited for artists looking to level up their oil pastel skills.

With these recommendations, you are now ready to embark on a colorful adventure, creating breathtaking masterpieces with your chosen oil pastels. Trust your artistic instincts and let your creative spirit flourish with every stroke and blend of color. The world of oil pastels awaits you – go ahead and unleash your imagination! Happy painting!

Soft pastels are one of the most widely used art supplies. How do you select the best soft pastels for your artistic endeavors?

With many companies offering hundreds of soft pastels, both individually and in sets, choosing the perfect product can be a challenge. When it comes to soft pastels, there is a lot more than what meets the eye.

If you have not used soft pastels before, this is the perfect guide for you. Even if you are an art veteran and have used soft pastels before, we might have some information that could help you upgrade to a better set of pastels.

After going through hundreds of products and studying their reviews, we shortlisted about a dozen products and used them extensively on various projects.

After using the pastel sets, we handpicked the seven best options that you must consider.

Best Soft Pastels

Whether you are a student or a professional, one of these recommended products will surely fit the bill. Stick around till the end to read the buyers’ guide and FAQs that will help you choose the perfect soft pastel for your painting endeavors. Without further ado, let us delve into detailed reviews of 6 of the best soft pastels available in the market right now.

1. Schmincke Half-Stick Extra-Soft Artist Pastel Set - Best for Color Richness

Schmincke offers handmade pastels in three sets of 18 colors each. Each pastel in this set is made from fine ground artists’ pigments in high concentration. This set from Schmincke has made its way into our list of recommendations owing to its highest lightfastness and minimum binders.

Schmincke - Pastels, 30 colors, multi-purpose, 77 230 097,...

🎨 THE BRAND: Schmincke has been producing the best,...
🎨 Pastel: Large cardboard set "Multipurpose", with 30...

Experience

There is a reason for giving the numero uno spot to Schmincke’s Half-Stick Extra-Soft Artist Pastel set – optimal quality at an affordable price. We especially liked the smoothness and color of each pastel in this set. These extra-soft pastels are made in Germany in a precise and slow manufacturing process to ensure consistent quality.

One of the typical hassles of using a pastel set is that some of the colors are more frequently used than others and thereby tend to run out quickly. Replacing a specific color from a pastel set is often troublesome and time-consuming. Schmincke recognizes this common hindrance faced by artists and offers over 400 individual pastels, allowing for quick and hassle-free replacement of any shade.

If you have not used any of the Schmincke pastels already and are skeptical about their quality, you can purchase any of the individual pastels and then go for the set. The range of colors provided by Schmincke is second to none. To give you an idea, if you want to use Ultramarine Deep variants in a project, with Schmincke, you get Black, Pure Color, White, White +, and White ++.

It can get challenging to find the perfect colors when you have so many options – almost like finding a needle in a haystack. Schmincke offers a detailed color chart for a straightforward comparison of colors. You can use the color chart to know the lightfastness rating and pigment purity of each pastel stick. Schmincke’s Pastel Set is undoubtedly a top pick for artists and professionals everywhere.

Pros

Easy to blend, giving you unlimited creative color options
Wide range of colors provided by Schmincke enables the creation of the most intricate and meticulous art pieces
Made in Germany using a slow and accurate manufacturing process to maintain consistent quality
Each pastel stick in the set features optimal lightfastness and minimum binders
These pastel sticks are known for high pigment concentration

Cons

Some artists have observed that the texture of these pastels is not as soft as they prefer

Number of Colors: 30 | Stick Size: Full Stick | Softness: Extra soft | Lightfastness: Good | Packaging: Cardboard box

2. Rembrandt Soft Pastels Basic Half Sticks Set - Best for Affordability

The next soft pastel set in our list of recommendations comes from the reputed house of Royal Talens. The Rembrandt line of soft pastels comes after over 100 years of excellence in offering soft pastels. With these pastels, an artist gets what she wants – optimal quality and long-lasting performance.

Rembrandt Soft Pastels Basic Set 300C30.5

These professional-quality soft pastel sticks are...
English (Publication Language)

Experience

The Rembrandt Pastel kit from Royal Talens offers a unique feature. We loved the composition of these pastel sticks – the manufacturing process relies on kaolin clay to work as a binder, which adds a slightly firm finish to these pastels (not firm enough to be classified as hard pastels). Having a relatively solid finish for soft pastels, artists get a secure grip and control.

Added grip and control allows for smooth strokes on the paint surface. But these pastels are not just magnificent for stroke work. You will be pleased to know that the unique binder of these pastels can crumble with ease, enabling you to blend various colors with ease. Each pastel stick measures 1.375” in length.

With Rembrandt Pastels, you need not worry about quality. Two of the standout features of these pastels are the rich pigment concentration and high lightfastness. Rembrandt offers these pastels in 218 colors – 61 with a lightfastness rating ranging from 25 to 100 years and 157 with a lightfastness rating of more than 100 years. You can rest assured that these pastels will maintain their luster throughout your lifetime.

Like every top-notch pastel brand, Rembrandt pastels are available in affordable sets as well as individual sticks. You can conveniently restock any color from a collection. Royal Talens also provides an in-depth color chart for reference for professional artists who may want to review the swatches and pigments.

There are no gimmicks or false promotions when it comes to Rembrandt. These pastels are artist-grade and command a slight premium in price. If you have a few extra bucks to spare, these pastels are the best option.

Pros

Rembrandt pastel sticks contain zero sharp edges or hard bits, which can lead to scratches or bright spots during application
Each pastel stick is hand-checked multiple times throughout the production process to ensure optimal quality
It is a perfect kit for artists who are looking for top-notch quality
Rembrandt pastels come in a wide range of colors and are easy to blend

Cons

It can be a tad bit expensive for students and beginners

Number of Colors: 30 | Stick Size: Half Stick | Softness: Soft | Lightfastness: Good | Packaging: Cardboard box

3. Mungyo Soft Pastel Square Chalk Set - Best for Beginners

Next, on our list of recommendations is the Mungyo Soft Pastel set that has 64 colors. The unique feature of this set is that each pastel stick is designed as a square instead of a circle. The square design is ideal for optimal grip and effortless stroke work.

Sale

MUNGYO Soft Pastel 64 Color Set Square Chalk (US English...

Vivid and brilliant colors - available up to 64 colors (US...
All techniques of the pastel can be applied easily ;...

Experience

The first two soft pastel sets in our list cater to professional artists and experts. It is time to include a pastel set for students, beginners, and hobbyists. We recommend the Mungyo Soft Pastel Square Chalk set to anybody who is operating on a tight budget and wants reasonably priced pastels.

You will want to buy this set because of the sheer value for the money it provides. At a price less than $15, you get 64 pastels – that is less than 25 cents per pastel stick. It is natural to think that if a comprehensive pastel set is priced so low, it might be of inferior quality. We have used it extensively, and we can assure you that it is not the case with Mungyo’s set.

This set is not artist-grade and does not come with a color chart. There is no information on the pigment concentration and lightfastness rating. These pastels are made in Korea and are far from the best products available in the market. It serves as a perfect starter kit for students or hobbyists who want to learn.

There have been a few complaints about the poor packaging of this pastel set, which has led to some of the sticks breaking in transit. We got our set in perfect condition, and we found the packaging to be excellent – protected by a cover sheet and foam cushion in the box. The pastels are small in size and will run out soon after being put to use.

Pros

One of the cheapest pastel sets available in the market, costing less than 25 cents per pastel stick.
Comprehensive set, with 64 colors of soft pastels
Ideal starter set for art students, hobbyists, and beginners
Unique square design of the pastel sticks allows for better grip and more effective stroke work

Cons

Pastels are very small and will run out very soon after being put to use
There is no color chart in the set, so the lightfastness rating and pigment purity cannot be ascertained

Number of Colors: 64 | Stick Size: Mini Stick | Softness: Soft | Lightfastness: Fair | Packaging: Foam cushion

4. Sennelier Half Pastel Paris Collection

Halfway through our recommendations comes one of the most comprehensive pastel sets available in the market. Sennelier offers the half-stick Paris collection that consists of 120 colors. Sennelier is one of the most renowned brands in the pastels industry and has been providing art and craft supplies for over 100 years.

Sennelier Soft Pastels Half Stick Set 120/Pkg-Paris, Paris

Manufacturing process of the Sennelier cylindrical pastel...
Wide range of luxurious, brilliant colors

Experience

If you are looking for the most delicate soft pastels, you go for one of the most reputed brands in the pastel industry – Royal Talens, Holbein, or Sennelier. Based out of France, Sennelier has been the go-to brand for many famous artists since 1887. If you need proof, Picasso and Van Gogh used Sennelier products.

So why is Sennelier so good? We especially liked the full range of colors that Sennelier offers – 525 in total. Finding the right colors for your next art masterpiece will not be a hassle if you search the Sennelier color chart. We recommend the half-stick Paris collection because of its top-notch permanence, pigment purity, and lightfastness rating.

The set comes in a sturdy cardboard box, which allows secure storage. If you will be performing substantial overlapping work with these pastels, it is preferable that you fix between layers. Avoid heavily fixing the final layer to preserve the original tones. You will appreciate the extra soft finish of these pastels.

One of the downsides and a significant one at that is the price of Sennelier pastels. Soft pastels can cost up to nearly five dollars per piece and its most extensive set consisting of all 525 colors comes at a steep price exceeding $1,000. It is not your average pastel brand and commands a significant premium relative to other brands.

Due to its expensive price tag, the Sennelier half-stick Paris set is not well-suited for art students, beginners, and hobbyists. If you are still new to the world of soft pastels or are still experimenting and learning, this is not the set you want to buy.

Pros

Set contains artist-grade, extra soft pastels of premium quality that are made in France
It features best-in-industry pigment purity, permanence, and lightfastness rating
Sennelier offers 525 color options, providing a diverse range of color options for artists
It is made from a perfect mix of high-quality pure pigment and a natural transparent binder

Cons

It is one of the most expensive soft pastel brands, making it suitable only for professional artists, art teachers, and experts

Number of Colors: 120 | Stick Size: Half Stick | Softness: Soft | Lightfastness: Excellent | Packaging: Cardboard box

5. Blick Artists’ Soft Pastels

Any art or craft supply list will be incomplete without a Blick product. All artists in the USA have heard of or used Blick’s products. The Artists’ Soft Pastels are available in a wide array of vibrant, rich colors, ideal for all kinds of color sketching and pastel painting.

Experience

Over recent years, Blick has emerged as a go-to brand for all types of art and craft supplies. Do not label it as just an average store brand. While Blick’s NYC store has the most extensive and well-thought-out collection of supplies for artists, their products always pack a punch.

We especially liked the Blick Artists’ Soft Pastels because of their high pigment concentration and minimal binders. Like the premium brands of Royal Talens and Sennelier, the final color is bright and vibrant. These pastels are available individually as well as in sets. Each pastel stick measures 2.5 inches in length and 0.5 inches in diameter.

You will notice a soft, velvety texture in these pastels, which enables consistent coverage and easy laydown. These pastels from Blick are versatile and can be used for layering, blending, and softening edges. We ought to mention that, unlike most past pastels, they do not crumble easily. You get optimal lightfastness with these pastels.

What makes Blick click is the affordable price of its products. Most Blick products cost about 25% less than its premium alternatives, but the quality of these products has a negligible difference. If you can buy an artist-grade product from a non-premium brand at a moderate price, it is a win-win situation.

Blick’s Soft Pastels set is affordable for both professionals and students. Blick offers the most bang for your buck, and these soft pastels will not disappoint. If you are looking for an upgrade from a basic pastel set without spending a fortune, this is the brand for you.

Pros

Set has artist-grade pastels that have high pigment concentration and negligible binders
Pastels do not crumble easily and provide intense, bright color
Ideal for various techniques like layering, blending, and softening edges
Moderately priced, making it affordable for students and professionals alike
Each pastel has a velvety texture and optimal lightfastness

Cons

It is a store brand and does not command a super brand value like other premium brands

Number of Colors: 60 | Stick Size: Full Stick | Softness: Soft | Lightfastness: Good | Packaging: Foam cushion

6. Faber-Castell Creative Studio Soft Pastel Crayons

Faber-Castell is a name that a majority of artists are familiar with, both students and professionals. The FC128272 Creative Studio Soft Pastels set includes 72 colors. The vibrant color deposit in these pastels provides an exceptionally bright and intense finish. These pastels are ideal for drawing fine lines and details and for shading larger background areas.

Sale

Faber-Castel FC128272 Creative Studio Soft Pastel Crayons...

Soft colour deposit for extremely intense and vivid colours
Ideal for drawing fine details and shading larger areas

Experience

The last recommendation we have is a treat for art students and hobbyists. Take the Loew-Cornell set we just reviewed and make it more comprehensive and reasonable to get the Faber-Castell FC128272 set. It includes 72 vivid colors of half-stick pastels, making it an excellent addition to any student’s art supplies.

We especially liked the sturdy cardboard box this set comes in, making it ideal for traveling. These pastels are designed in the traditional square to offer better precision and control. Each pastel stick measures 1.125 inches in length. You will be pleased to know that these pastels conform to ASTM D4236 and are 100% safe to use.

The pastels feature a stable consistency and can adhere to various surfaces like card, paper, stone, and wood. We loved how easy it was to clean a wrong stroke – wipe with your finger, pastel brush or a paper wiper. These pastels are excellent for all kinds of blending projects, especially for subtle blends.

The primary reason for including this pastel set in our list is its cost-effectiveness. At a price of around $27, 72 colors of half-stick pastels is a great buy. As the Loew-Cornell set, this set suffers from similar drawbacks. There is no color chart so you cannot find the pigment purity and lightfastness rating of these pastels.

Faber-Castell does not sell these pastels individually. So if some of your pastels run out sooner than the rest, you have to either buy those colors from another brand or purchase the entire set again. Despite these shortcomings, it is an excellent set for art students, beginners, and hobbyists who do not want to spend a lot of money.

Pros

One of the most reasonable soft pastel sets for students
Comprehensive set consisting of 72 colors of half-stick pastels
Each pastel in this set conforms to ASTM D4236
These pastels work perfectly for creating subtle blends

Cons

The set does not include a color chart, so information about the pigment purity and lightfastness rating is not available
Pastels are not sold individually, making restocking troublesome and expensive

Number of Colors: 24, 48, 72 | Stick Size: Half Stick | Softness: Soft | Lightfastness: Good | Packaging: Metal case

Best Soft Pastels Comparison Table

Product	Number of Colors	Stick Size	Softness	Lightfastness	Packaging
Schmincke Half-Stick Extra-Soft Artist Pastel Set	30	Full Stick	Extra soft	Good	Cardboard box
Rembrandt Soft Pastels Basic Half Sticks Set	30	Half Stick	Soft	Good	Cardboard box
Mungyo Soft Pastel Square Chalk Set	64	Mini Stick	Soft	Fair	Foam cushion
Sennelier Half Pastel Paris Collection	120	Half Stick	Soft	Excellent	Cardboard box
Blick Artists’ Soft Pastels	60	Full Stick	Soft	Good	Foam cushion
Faber-Castell Creative Studio Soft Pastel Crayons	24, 48, 72	Half Stick	Soft	Good	Metal case

Buying Guide For The Best Soft Pastels

Now that we have shortlisted seven of the best soft pastels from hundreds, you might be wondering how to choose the ideal product for you out of these seven. We have covered all the factors you need to consider to select the best soft pastel for your needs.

Budget Constraints

One of the most basic and crucial factors that determine which pastel set you will be purchasing is your budget. The amount of money you are able and willing to spend on pastels will either limit or expand your options.

Professional artists and experts who make sufficient money from their work will go for artist-grade pastels. They want uncompromising quality and top-notch pastels with high pigment concentration, optimal lightfastness, and permanence.

Art students and hobbyists operate on a tight budget and will go for student-grade pastels. They are looking for affordable supplies to practice and learn and do not need high-end products.

Characteristics of Soft Pastel

Soft pastels can help you create some beautiful art, but the process is not always as glamorous. Some natural features of soft pastels make it chalk-like, meaning it will crumble and produce a lot of dust. Soft pastel does not adhere to the paint surface, thereby leading to a need to use fixative with layering.

Due to these characteristics of soft pastels, it is imperative that you use them in a well-ventilated area to avoid breathing in the pigments and binders, which may be toxic. If you are not game for the messy process that using soft pastels entails, you should probably go for oil pastels instead.

Individual or Set?

Most of the pastel sets we have recommended are available both individually and in sets. Buying individual pastels allows you to test them, especially if you are considering buying one of the premium sets. Before investing hundreds of dollars in a comprehensive collection, it makes sense to test specific colors.

Purchasing a set is advisable because it is more cost-effective in the long run. Students and hobbyists should buy sets. You should preferably buy a set from a company that also sells its pastels individually to ensure convenient restocking and replenishment of the set.

Color Charts and Selection

Color charts make an essential part of pastel sets, especially for premium and expensive products from reputed brands like Royal Talens and Sennelier. Color charts give you a vivid look at what the colors will look like on paper. They also contain some vital information that professionals want to know to assess the quality of pastels, like permanence, lightfastness rating, and pigment purity.

When it comes to soft pastels, having a wide range of colors in the studio is always a good idea. It is easy to blend soft pastels, but the more you mix, the lesser the vibrancy of each color. Having a comprehensive set that includes various colors will go a long way in your artistic journey.

Pastel Stick Size

Soft pastels are available in two stick sizes:

Full stick, measuring about two inches in length.
Half stick, measuring about one inch in length.

It is a personal choice whether you will buy half-stick or full-stick pastels. Depending on your comfort and hand size, you can choose to use either of the two. The pastel quality remains the same across both sizes.

Soft Pastels FAQ's

Soft pastels are pastels containing mostly pure pigment with a very low proportion of binders. Soft pastels are known for having brighter colors and being incredibly smooth. Soft pastels are notoriously famous for producing a lot of dust as well.

Soft pastels and oil pastels are like the flipsides of a coin – soft pastels can be brushed off the surface due to low adhesion whereas oil pastels adhere to the surface but do not dry completely. It is not common to use oil and soft pastels together due to the vastly different finish of each medium.

A hard pastel and a soft pastel mostly have the same ingredients, only in different quantities. Hard pastels contain less pure pigment and more binders, making them more durable and less bright.

Pastels are incredibly versatile art mediums. Soft pastels can be used with nearly all surfaces that have a decent amount of tooth and texture. Some artists prefer only pastel paper, while others use regular drawing paper. You can even use boards, sandpaper, and canvas.

Soft pastels do not adhere to most paint surfaces and can come off quickly if a fixative is not used. It is recommended to use fixative with soft pastels for the preservation of artworks. If you are going to use layering, using fixative is a must between layers.

Soft pastels are known to produce a lot of dust, significantly higher than hard pastels and oil pastels. Most soft pastels are safe to use though. As a general rule of thumb, buy pastels that are non-toxic, and ASTM certified.

Conclusion

We're absolutely thrilled that you've joined us in exploring the wonderful world of soft pastels! We hope you found this article to be an exciting and eye-opening journey into the colorful realm of this versatile artistic medium. It truly is an amazing way to express your creativity and create stunning masterpieces.

Out of these 6 best soft pastels, here are our top three recommendations:

Best for color richness: Sennelier Soft Pastels is an ideal option. Sennelier's luxurious and buttery texture delivers intensely pigmented and vibrant colors, making it a standout choice for artists who seek true-to-life color representation in their work. With a vast array of hues and shades, this select set ensures that your creative vision is never compromised.

Best for affordability: Faber-Castell Creative Studio Soft Pastels is a good option. Catering to the budget-conscious artist without compromising on quality, these pastels offer an excellent balance between price and performance. The pastels' strong pigments, smooth blending, and durability make it a popular choice for novice and experienced artists alike.

Best for beginners: Prismacolor NuPastel Artists' Pastels is the right choice. These hard pastels provide great control and precision for those who might be new to the art form. They're less prone to breakage than softer alternatives, making them more forgiving and user-friendly for beginners getting a feel for the medium.

We are confident that, armed with the knowledge we've provided in this article, you'll be well-equipped to make an informed decision on the best soft pastels to suit your personal artistic needs. Go on, unleash your creativity and enjoy the spectacular colors and texture that soft pastels can bring to your artwork. Remember, the only boundaries in art are the ones we create ourselves, so dream big and make your mark! Happy coloring!

Fixative is a liquid solution similar to varnishes, which is made from either casein or resin and is used for drying paints.

It is also used as a coating medium to protect the painting from various elements. Besides that, it delivers great results while allowing your paintings to age successfully without the risk of facing discoloration.

And since it speeds up the drying process, almost every good fixative in the market is alcohol-based as well as acid-free.

Normally, high-quality fixatives for pastels are available in either of these types: final or workable, which we will discuss in a couple of minutes.

In today’s guide, we will review 6 of the best fixatives for pastels that we are sure you’ll love. We will also provide a basic guide that can be useful if you’re a beginner setting off to get yourself a can of fixative.

So without further ado, let’s proceed!

Best Fixatives for Pastels

Give the following a quick look to see the differences between the 6 best fixatives for pastels so you can choose one that best suits your requirements.

Winsor & Newton Artists’ Aerosols Workable Fixative - Best for Budget-Friendly Versatility

What’s a better way than to start off this list with a fixative that can be used for all purposes?

The Winsor & Newton Workable Fixative is highly versatile, in that it can be used not only with given specific paints but with other media such as oil pastels, chalk, and even charcoal.

Winsor & Newton Professional Artists' Aerosols, Workable...

Colorless Fixative For Use On Charcoal, Pastel, Pencil &...
To Protect From Smudging & Dust

Experience

Before we get to our review, the first thing you should know (in case you’re not aware of it yet) is that this brand is well known for its great-quality art supplies such as acrylic paints and watercolors. And now, we have the fixative, one of the best products yet.

First of all, for its amazing effects, we think the fixative comes at a very reasonable price of about $12 per can.

However, we find that, unlike other fixatives which are meant to enhance the paints, this one can somewhat make the paints seem a bit shadier than how they actually appear.

But the best feature about the Winsor & Newton fixative is that it protects the painting with a very light coat. With a thin coating, artists have more control over the texture and the tooth of the surface. This is one important feature to look for in a fixative if you want your paintings to dry quicker.

We would recommend getting this fixative if you are looking for a more budget-friendly option that produces excellent results.

Pros

This spray covers paintings with a very thin coat, in which case allows the artist to manipulate the tooth surface
The price of the fixative is very reasonable and budget-friendly
It dries off pretty quickly after application

Cons

It might darken the painting a little and that can create a slight difference in the outcome from the original idea

Blick Matte Fixative - Best for Quick-Drying Coverage

If you’re searching for a brand that produces a wide range of art products, you’ll be glad to know it’s Blick.

What you would love to know, however, is that Blick performs pretty well when it comes to delivering both quantity and quality.

Apart from its many art supplies, the Blick Matte Fixative is one of the best products this brand offers and we will see why.

Experience

What we really like about this fixative is the cost. For the quality of coverage and protection that it offers, we think it comes at a very affordable price of around $6 per can. However, if we buy it in large quantities, we can get higher discounts.

This is another fixative that can be used on different mediums and not just one. For instance, when used with media such as charcoal and pencils, we see that it produces the most terrific results.

Don’t let the name fool you because this fixative comes in both glossy and matte sprays. And since it comes at a very low price, a lot of artists can afford both of these options to create different types of artwork.

We will also suggest this fixative for beginners and students since they are likely to make multiple mistakes in the process. Moreover, they still need to explore the effects of different sprays and will probably need cheaper options.

Unlike most fixatives, it dries out very quickly - about 15 minutes approximately. When it comes to this aspect, we find that the fixative lives up to our expectations.

Although it enhances the artwork, the original pigments, however, remain the same with only a slight visible change that one can hardly tell the difference. But the best feature of this fixative is that it provides more teeth to the surface once it dries out.

One flaw which we found with this fixative is that it releases a very unpleasant smell once sprayed. We suggest working in a place that has proper ventilation while using a half mask to protect yourself from its fumes.

Pros

Comes at a pretty affordable price which is great for those on a budget
The fixative dries out quickly within 15 minutes
It provides excellent tooth surface after drying

Cons

While spraying, it produces a very strong, unpleasant smell

Krylon Workable Fixatif Spray - Best for Acid-Free Protection

If you have been around this line of work for a while now, you’ll know that Krylon is one of the most famous names when it comes to sprays for artwork.

Among other sprays, this workable fixative is known for providing the best results when it comes to oil or soft pastels. It also can be used with multiple other mediums as well.

Sale

Krylon K01306 Workable Fixatif Spray Clear, 11-Ounce...

Workable fixatif spray protects computer prints, pencil,...
Prevents smudging, wrinkling and allows for easy reworking...

Experience

We like that this workable fixative is acid-free, therefore, it safeguards our artworks and prevents them from discoloring as they age.

Another reason we love this spray so much is that it is affordable. Although the price is a bit higher than that of the Blick fixative, we think that this is still wallet-friendly for a lot of artists out there with a restricted budget.

The price is very reasonable compared to the benefits we get from this fixative.

First of all, it is suitable for artists who are getting themselves familiar with fixatives. And apart from being acid-free, it also provides a smooth matte finish that is perfect for display with enough tooth on the surface.

If we look at the aspect of enhancing colors, we find that the fixative does not quite meet our expectations since it produces normal results. However, it does provide a barrier of protection against dust and discoloration. This is why we feel that the fixative is a great pick for beginners.

Finally, the drying time of each layer takes around half an hour. Although it is a slow process, we think the final result which includes a matte finish and good tooth is worth the wait.

Pros

The Krylon fixative is acid-free which is good for preventing discoloration and patches development
It comes at a very affordable price to meet the need of artists with budgets
It provides enough tooth and a matte surface after the process is done

Cons

It does not provide enough color enhancement

Sennelier Latour and D’Artigny Spray Fixatives for Pastels

Have you ever wondered which brands of pastels the great masters used to depend upon to create their amazing masterpieces?

Well, you’ll be glad to know that the French brand, Sennelier, is one of the most favorable options. Artists such as Picasso, Van Gogh, and Cezanne used art supplies from here. It has been around since the year 1887.

SENNELIER D'Artigny Oil Pastel Fixative, 1 Count (Pack of...

Made from a vinyl resin and alcohol base
Protect your artwork from dust and smearing

Experience

We can’t help but recommend the fixative by one of the most trusted companies when it comes to art supplies.

If you feel you’re ready to explore some expert levels in the world of art, give this big name a try and you’ll see a huge difference between using average sprays and the ones from Sennelier.

There are two kinds of fixatives that Sennelier offers for pastels: Latour and D’Artigny, the former being for soft pastels, while the latter is for oil pastels.

You are probably thinking why one should go to such an extent to differentiate pastels.

But then again, that is the reason which makes Sennelier such a high-quality brand. According to their Materials Safety Data Sheet, the two fixatives are made to specifically serve an intended purpose following the elements present in soft and oil pastels.

They focus on producing memorable and lasting professional artwork while being efficient in the approach of making quality fixative sprays.

We personally love these sprays for the light touch they have on the surface, making it smooth to run through with your hand.

Both of them are also very fast to dry, therefore, working multiple layers is not an exhausting task and we don’t have to wait for a very long time.

Another important feature these sprays hold is that they do not affect the original pigments in any way. All they do is leave our work with a glossy appealing look.

What the Sennelier sprays do is give our piece the type of preservation that does not affect the original look. While some fixatives can change the actual form of our work, we find that these offer what we or any other artist are looking for.

However, it would be impossible for the sprays to be without flaws because, with high quality and a respectable name, they will also come at a higher cost than normal options.

But overall, these are perfect for artists who look for transparent resin-based fixatives to shield their work with.

Pros

Made to focus on specific purposes according to the pastels composition in order to ensure the best final results
They have a quick drying time which is perfect for the layering process
They do not meddle with the original pigments which the artist used

Cons

A bit expensive

SpectraFix Spray Fixative

If you are looking for a spray that contains no chemicals and is safe for children, you will be happy to know there is the SpectraFix Pastel Fixative.

Going through its Materials Safety Data Sheet information, it states that the spray contains only water, casein, and denatured alcohol.

But do not let this simple composition fool you into thinking it compromises the performance because it does not, and that is why it falls under this top 6 list.

SpectraFix SFX-31270 12 oz Spectrafixative Fixative Spray

PLEASE NOTE: This product is available in multiple sizes and...
The version you will receive by ordering from this page is...

Experience

If you have kids in the house, you’ll understand the need of getting a spray (or any other material for that matter) that prevents the chance of harmful incidents.

This is the reason why we love the non-toxic SpectraFix so much. It also reduces our worries about misplacing them, especially during busy days.

Apart from the safety features, the spray can be used with any medium such as watercolor, gouache, and even charcoal. This saves a lot of money rather than buying different fixatives at higher prices for each of them.

Although it costs around $14, we are satisfied with the fixative since there is a lot of quantity in one big container. It will probably serve for a very long period and we don’t have to shed some extra bucks for the time being.

There is one thing we don’t find help with the fixative, and that is the spray feature.

Being a non-toxic fixative comes with some disadvantages on its own. While other fixatives depend on propellants like propane to achieve consistent sprays, this one does not have such chemicals, making it watery while spraying.

The runny spray can be the cause for uneven distribution of the solution throughout the painting, which can get messy. Beginners may not have any problem regarding this, but experts just might.

Pros

Non-toxic and family-friendly
Can be used for a lot of mediums besides pastels
Very affordable price for a large quantity

Cons

The watery spray can produce uneven coverage

Grumbacher Workable Fixative Spray

We will complete the list with a brand name that is known for its efficiency with the products they offer. Grumbacher delivers carefully formulated art supplies, and one of them is the workable fixative spray.

The quality you get with this spray is very much the same as you get when using renowned high-end fixatives.

Grumbacher 546 11-3/4-Ounce Workable Fixative Spray,...

Used in surface preparation
Not a final fixative

Experience

The feature of this fixative which is worth mentioning first is its drying time.

Among the other sprays we’ve mentioned on this list, this one is the quickest to dry. It only takes about 7 minutes maximum for a light spray to completely dry out until we can touch it or work another layer on top of it.

This makes it way easier for us to work on a piece at a much faster pace. We would recommend this option if you are an artist who regularly works on commission. It will save a lot of time and you will finish more artwork faster.

Another desirable feature is versatility, which this fixative happens to embrace. We love how easily it can go with any given medium and still be able to deliver great teeth that we can work on pretty smoothly.

A few examples of the kind of mediums this goes along pretty well with our oil or soft pastels, charcoal, as well as pencils.

Last but not least, the spray does not hold back the original pigments to pop up as they are. If we are going to talk about the resemblance, we find that this is the feature that truly makes it similar to high-end products. It only provides transparent protection with a glossy effect.

However, the only drawback of this fixative spray is its price. It might not be suitable for artists with a tight budget or students for that matter.

But overall, the fixative spray is a great pick especially if you want your paintings to age properly since it is acid-free and prevents discoloration.

Pros

Dries out in about 7 minutes; quicker than most sprays out there
A great level of versatility which makes it suitable for use with different other mediums
Acid-free and it does not affect the original colors of your painting

Cons

Can be too expensive for some artists

Best Fixatives For Pastels Comparison Table

Product	Volume/Weight	Type	Finish	Spray Type	Acid-Free	Archival Quality	UV Protection
Winsor & Newton Artists’ Aerosols Workable Fixative	400ml	Aerosol	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	Yes
Blick Matte Fixative	12 oz	Aerosol	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	No
Krylon Workable Fixatif Spray	11oz	Aerosol	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	No
Sennelier Latour and D’Artigny Spray Fixatives for Pastels	400ml	Aerosol	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	Yes
SpectraFix Spray Fixative	12oz	Pump spray	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	No
Grumbacher Workable Fixative Spray	11.75 oz	Aerosol	Matte	Fine mist	Yes	Yes	No

Choosing the Best Fixative Right Now

To help make your search easier, take a look at the brief suggestions below for finding the right fixative that best suits your needs:

The Winsor & Newton fixative is perfect if you are looking for a perfect workable spray. In case you want a safer workable option, we would suggest going for the SpectraFix spray. You can opt for the Blick fixative if you’re looking for a wallet-friendly workable fixative.

Lastly, we found that the Sennelier fixative is the most reliable option for the final spray.

Buying Guide For The Best Fixatives for Pastels

If you are new to fixatives or you’re not sure what to look for while buying one, we have prepared a guide below.

There are a few considerations that you might want to look at before purchasing a fixative so that you won’t get disappointed later on.

Type of pastel

From what we have reviewed, you see that almost all of the fixatives can be used for multiple mediums including soft and oil pastels.

Unless your intention is to purchase different fixatives for different pastels, we suggest going for a versatile option if you are on a budget.

We also recommend students and beginners not stress much about getting the perfect fixative for their desired pastels since that can be done as you become more experienced.

Cost

As it is with any product, the price of fixatives will depend on the brand name or quality. Similar to what we mentioned above, high-end brands tend to have more varieties and more specifications.

But we found the main reason that makes high-end fixatives costly is that they are composed of superior quality materials which means they will have greater performance.

Because they are specifically made for an intended composition of pastels, they will also produce better results.

Most importantly, most higher-end fixatives aim to be safer and acid-free.

On the other hand, fixatives that are less expensive save more money and have more versatility.

While they are affordable, there is also a chance that the cans will come with a warning label that they are dangerous to health because of their inexpensive ingredients.

However, with extra care, inexpensive fixatives can produce great results when it comes to finishing.

Grade

You are probably aware of the fact that most art products have grades such as student and professional.

Popular reputed brands such as Winsor & Newton, Sennelier, or Grumbacher offer fixatives that are professional grade. While many experienced artists lean towards these brands, it does not mean beginners shouldn’t give them a try either. The whole idea is to find a fixative that your artwork truly deserves.

It is always good to explore the workings of the two grades so you can see the different effects both of them deliver.

Type of fixative

Before choosing a fixative, keep in mind that there are two types - one is ‘workable’ and the other is ‘final’. If you are wondering what the difference is between the two, the answer lies in the application process.

Workable fixatives are used when you have to spray one layer after another while working on the painting.

And as the name suggests, the final fixative is meant for the finishing in order to protect your artwork from elements.

Keep in mind these will work with any pastels and that there are no specifications as to finding the right workable/final fixative.

How To Use Fixatives

We have seen some questions on the usage of fixatives and today we will try to answer a few of them.

How do I use fixatives?

The first piece of advice we would give is to read the instructions before using them because one can’s directions will always be different from the other.

However, the normal application includes spraying a light mist while holding the can about 1 ft away from the artwork.

Keep in mind never to bring the can closer than 1 ft to the painting because it will ruin the original form.

While spraying, make sure to go through the surface gently and uniformly so that it provides maximum even coverage throughout.

In case you are using a workable spray, remember to wait until the last layer is dry before touching or applying another layer on top of it.

The amount of layers to add depends on the type of spray you’re using or the ingredients within it.

Can I use a hair spray as a fixative?

Just because the two of them are both sprays, it does not necessarily make them substitutes for each other.

Although at first glance a hair spray looks as if it produces the same results a fixative does, it is actually deceiving. The contents used for protecting hair are not the same as those for protecting pastels.

No doubt, it can be tempting to use hair spray as it is relatively cheaper but we advise never to use it as an alternative to a fixative spray. In the long run, either the paints will flake or the painting will be damaged.

Which online sites should I go to for fixatives?

The best sites you can get fixatives are either Amazon or Blick Art materials. Both of these sites offer international shipping and they also come with a good return policy in case you are not satisfied with the product.

Fixatives For Pastels FAQ's

A fixative for pastels is a spray that is applied to a pastel drawing or painting to prevent the colors from smudging or rubbing off. It creates a protective layer over the pastel that helps preserve the artwork and make it more durable.

The number of coats of fixative you should use on your pastel artwork depends on the level of protection you want to achieve. In general, 2-3 light coats of fixative are recommended, allowing each coat to dry completely before applying the next.

Some fixatives for pastels contain toxic ingredients, such as VOCs (volatile organic compounds), which can be harmful if inhaled or absorbed through the skin. It is important to read the label and follow the safety instructions carefully when using any fixative spray.

While hairspray can be used as a substitute for a fixative spray, it is not recommended. Hairspray contains different ingredients than fixative sprays, and may not provide the same level of protection or preservation for your artwork.

A workable fixative for pastels is designed to be used during the creation of a pastel artwork and allows the artist to continue working on the surface of the artwork after it has been sprayed. A final fixative is used after the artwork is completed and is designed to provide a more permanent protective layer over the pastel.

Conclusion

Thank you for joining us on this exploration of the best fixatives for pastels! We hope this article has provided you with valuable insights and useful information. We've tested each of the six fixatives extensively, and we're confident that these excellent products will do wonders for your artwork preservation and enhancement needs.

Out of these 6 best fixatives for pastels, here are our top three recommendations:

Winsor & Newton Artists' Aerosols Workable Fixative is an ideal option for artists seeking a versatile and budget-friendly fixative. It provides a light coat while maintaining the texture of the painting, despite sometimes making the colors appear a bit shadier.
Blick Matte Fixative is a good option for both beginners and seasoned artists. This affordable fixative dries quickly (within 15 minutes) and provides excellent tooth surface after drying. Just make sure you work in a well-ventilated area due to its strong smell.
Krylon Workable Fixatif Spray is the right choice for artists looking for an acid-free and affordable fixative. It protects against dust and discoloration while providing a smooth matte finish and good teeth.

As you can see, each of these top three recommendations has its own unique qualities and advantages. Whichever you choose, remember that the right fixative can make all the difference in preserving your pastel artwork's beauty and longevity. With a quality fixative on your side, you'll have peace of mind knowing your masterpiece is protected, allowing you to fully focus on your creative journey. Happy painting, and may your artwork continue to inspire and delight!

Hands down, acrylic paints are one of the most versatile painting mediums available on the market.

They are excellent for beginners who want to jump into art and are a popular art supply for students or professional artists because of their ease of use. On top of that, most art brands carry a variety of acrylic paints, including student and professional lines.

This creates an opportunity for amateur art enthusiasts or students to pick up basic paints to begin their journey as an artist. However, a common problem with student-grade paints is the inferior quality. These paints usually make the artwork look terrible and may demoralize a person from further projects.

Therefore, we thought of coming up with a list of excellent yet cheap acrylic paints easily accessible to budding artists. Without further ado, let's get started!

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints

To help you find the best affordable acrylic paints, we have compiled a list of 23 options with their most important features and attributes. So, whether you're a beginner or a professional artist, here's the list of the 23 best cheap acrylic paints for you to consider.

1. Liquitex BASICS - Best for Blending and Pouring

By far, one of the most talked-about lines of cheap acrylic paints is the BASICS line from Liquitex. As you can understand, it's a student-grade acrylic paint, but it's equally popular among professional artists.

The best thing about these paints is the consistency that's neither too thick nor thin. You can easily spread the paint with a palette knife, and there's no streaking due to the presence of the highest-quality fine art pigments in the formula. Moreover, the paints seem to work pretty great with blending and pouring mediums, giving you more versatility while working with them.

Coming to the color range, Liquitex BASICS are available in 72 options, with the small tubes containing 4 oz of paint, while the biggest pot contains paint worth 32 oz.

Quantity: 32 oz tube | Color Selection: 72 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: Yes

2. Apple Barrel Acrylic Paint - Best for Versatile Surfaces

Apple Barrel, Pastel Dreams & Vivid Wonders Collection...

CONVENIENT SIZE & FUN BRIGHT COLORS - This versatile acrylic...
MATTE FINISH - Each of these bold and bright colors dries to...

Another widely available but cheap option is the Apple Barrel acrylic paints, mostly known for their versatility. Indeed, you can apply them on different surfaces, including wood, ceramic, plastic, terra cotta, and even plaster.

This acrylic dries fast, so you won't need to worry about messing up your project. As this is a water-based formula, the paint glides on any surface without giving you any trouble. And, it doesn't dry streaky, giving your paintings and DIY projects a nice finish.

Moreover, the Apple Barrel acrylic paint can be found in almost a hundred colors, while the company has recently launched the popular acrylic paint in a gloss finish. This paint line contains kid-friendly products with a non-toxic formula, so you won't have to worry even if your kids get this paint all over them.

Quantity: 2 oz bottle | Color Selection: 224 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: No

3. Arteza Acrylic Paint - Best for Glossy Finish

ARTEZA Acrylic Paint Set of 60 Colors, 0.74 ounces Tubes, 5...

Exciting Selection of Artist-Quality Acrylic Paint Colors:...
Rich, Vivid Pigments: Your premium bulk acrylic paint kit...

A cheap acrylic paint lineup that has been the talk of the town is from the art supplies brand, Arteza. To be honest, the company has a vast range of acrylic paints, including excellent pouring paints.

It's easy to blend and layer these Arteza acrylic paints either with a brush or a palette knife. What’s more, you can use them on paper or canvas, and the best part is that the paints don't crack or chip even if there's any unevenness on the surface. The acrylic paint dries to a glossy finish, leaving your paintings even more appealing.

These acrylic colors are also lightfast, so your paintings would remain vivid and bright years after you have created them. Additionally, the best way to start using the Arteza acrylic paints is through the 60 colors set, whereby you get 0.74 oz. tubes of individual colors in a box.

Quantity: 4 oz bottle | Color Selection: 60 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: Yes

4. Golden Fluid Acrylic Paint - Best for Fluid Techniques

Fluid Acrylics by GOLDEN, Principal Professional Fluid Set,...

Experience the even, flowing consistency of richly pigmented...
Includes - Benzimidazolone Yellow Medium, Pyrrole Red,...

Golden has been a leading name in the art industry for a long time. And even though the company has different lines of acrylic paints, we were drawn to the fluid acrylic paint. As you can understand, these paints are supposed to have low viscosity compared to their heavy-bodied counterparts.

Moreover, Golden recommends the use of this color for a variety of projects such as dry brush techniques, adding fine details, acrylic pouring, spraying, and even staining. The fluid acrylic paint line also contains some of the best metallic and iridescent colors. Hence, there's no need to add any fillers or extenders, as the color payoff of these paints is pretty consistent.

Compared to the other student-grade acrylics we mentioned, this will cost you a bit more money, but it still falls under the affordable category. However, what makes the paint truly worthy has to be its lightfastness which is comparable to any artist-grade paint.

Quantity: 1 oz bottle | Color Selection: 43 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: Yes

5. Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint - Best for Transitioning Artists

Sale

Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint, 10 x 60ml (2--oz)...

PROFESSIONAL PIGMENTS, SMARTLY BALANCED: Bright, stable...
EFFORTLESS CONSISTENCY, VIBRANT RESULTS: Smooth, satin...

Hearing the name of the brand, Winsor & Newton, may make you think that we are going to mention some expensive acrylic paints, but that's not true. Known mainly for watercolors, Winsor & Newton has released other art supplies like acrylic paints.

As such, the Galeria acrylic paint line from Winsor & Newton is dedicated to vibrant and fluid paints for a smooth painting experience. This high-quality acrylic paint is available in 57 colors, including metallic and transparent shades.

Even though it's a beginner-friendly range, the Galeria acrylic paints have premium-quality pigments with a high pigment load comparable to the professional range. Additionally, using it is an excellent way to ease yourself into the techniques of using artist-grade paints.

Quantity: 2 oz tube | Color Selection: 57 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

6. Blick Studio Acrylic Paint

Originally, Blick was a platform for ordering art supplies, and then the company went ahead and launched its own supplies. You’ll find that the student-grade acrylics are packaged under the label Blickrylic and have got some great customer reviews.

Blick describes the product as a true acrylic paint that has been priced affordably to make it available for most people. Moreover, the paints come in 30 rich and vivid, carefully chosen shades, and you can easily mix them to make new colors. They are even compatible with acrylic paints or mediums from other brands, making them highly versatile.

What's more, these acrylics can be used on various surfaces like wood, canvas, cardboard, and paper. You can even use it on fabrics and heat-set the paint using an iron to make it waterproof. Naturally, this acrylic paint dries to a permanent semi-gloss finish which looks quite good irrespective of the painting surface.

Quantity: 2 oz tube | Color Selection: 59 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: Yes

7. Daler Rowney Graduate Acrylic Paint

Daler-Rowney Graduate Acrylic Paint Set, 10-Tube Assorted...

No more dull acrylic paint sets! Each tube of water-based,...
This colorful and vibrant set comes with 38ml tubes of...

Next up, we have the Daler Rowney Graduate acrylic paints that are pretty popular in the art supplies market. Along with being available worldwide, the brand is known for its good quality products available at an affordable price point.

The Graduate line contains medium-bodied acrylic paints with good pigment strength and high lightfastness. So, even if you're making the paintings in college, you can expect them to look just as attractive after some years. Also, as the formula is water-based and solvent-free, the paint can be easily mixed with art mediums from other brands.

Moving on, these acrylic paints from Daler Rowney dry with a flexible finish, preventing your paintings from developing cracks. In a nutshell, it's a smooth, fast-drying, easy-to-use paint, so students and amateurs can learn to paint with it.

Plus, this affordable acrylic can be used on several surfaces, including paper, canvas, wood, and ceramic.

Quantity: 120 ml tube | Color Selection: 40 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: No

8. Sennelier Abstract Acrylic Paint

Sale

Sennelier Abstract Pouch Set, 2 Fl Oz (Pack of 5), Matt...

Housed in an extra-sturdy, easy-to-transport squeezable...
Package features a transparent window that shows the exact...

Moving on, we have the Sennelier Abstract acrylic paints that the brand defines as innovative. Unlike many other cheap acrylic options available on the market, it's a heavy-bodied multimedia paint with a high pigment concentration.

Coming to the colors, the brand offers you a brilliant range of 60 shades, comprising satin, high-gloss, iridescent, and fluorescent. We especially appreciate the transparent pouch as it lets you see the true color to make the right choice.

Moreover, apart from the original heavy body range, Sennelier has launched a soft body matte range of 35 vibrant colors in 2 fl oz pouches. The brand describes this paint as creamy-to-thick, making it great for elaborate acrylic paintings on canvases. At the same time, the consistency is perfect for covering a surface like clay or wood.

Long story short, the potent formula truly brings forth the idea of having an all-purpose acrylic paint for a variety of art projects.

Quantity: 2 fl oz | Color Selection: 60 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

9. Mont Marte Acrylic Paints

Sale

Mont Marte Acrylic Paint Set 24 Colours 36ml, Perfect for...

Good coverage and a creamy texture
Fast drying time allows you to layer paint quickly without...

Are you trying to find acrylic paints available in bulk? If so, you may really like the bigger acrylic color pump bottles from Mont Marte. Even though the paint ends up being exceptionally cheap, we were pretty impressed by their color payoff and quality.

You will find that the bottles are usually labeled as "school studio acrylic" or as just acrylic color, but both are similar and have the same color options. The pump bottles contain 67.6 fl oz. or half a gallon of paint which is an excellent amount for classrooms or art studios.

This water-based, fast-drying, and non-toxic acrylic paint is also suitable for kids, teens, and amateur artists. Rather than having a very thin or thick consistency, the paint has an in-between creamy viscosity to make it suitable for various art projects.

Currently, the full Mont Marte acrylic paint range has 100 colors available in various finishes.

Quantity: 67.6 fl oz tube | Color Selection: 100 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

10. Pébéo Studio Acrylics

Sale

Pébéo 832-353 - Studio Acrylics Fine Acrylic - Acrylic...

ACRYLIC PAINTING FOR ALL: This classic acrylic is ideal for...
SATIN MATTE FINISHES: Thick and satin, Studio Fine Acrylic...

Pébéo is one of the oldest art supply brands that's still dominating the market with great products. We especially picked the Pébéo Studio Acrylics for this list as it's a suitable student-grade heavy body paint. Currently, it is available in 62 attractive colors and offers a beautiful satin finish.

The brand has crafted the paint for use by professionals and students on canvases, wood, cardboard, and even metal. And despite being a heavy body variant, this acrylic paint is quite pliable, delivering a smooth finish. At the same time, you can use it for textured work as the paint can retain brush or spatula marks.

Nevertheless, what stood out the most were the colors in the Pébéo Studio Acrylics range. Apart from being richly pigmented, the colors are pretty bright and a dream to work with when mixed with other paints.

Quantity: 100 ml tube | Color Selection: 48 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

11. Caliart Acrylic Paint

Caliart 24 Colors Acrylic Paint Set with 12 Brushes, Art...

Acrylic Paint Set With 12 Brushes: Premium paints glide on...
Rich Pigments, Certified Safe & Non-Toxic: No need to worry...

Are you looking to use acrylics for a one-time project? If so, you shouldn't bother about spending a lot of money on them. However, as we don't want you to sacrifice quality, our suggestion would be to opt for the Caliart acrylic paint.

These paints are priced affordably, but we really like how they glide onto any surface to provide a consistent color payoff. The company even uses premium-quality pigments in these paints to make them appear vibrant.

Besides, the best feature of this acrylic paint is its formulation that's certified safe and non-toxic. Therefore, you can get the Caliart acrylic paint set (available in a handy set of 24 shades in 2 oz bottles) for your kids as it's safe for all ages.

Quantity: 2 oz bottle | Color Selection: 24 colors | Finish: Matte | Lightfastness: Yes

12. Chroma Atelier Interactive Acrylic Paint

Chroma Atelier Interactive Acryl 20ml 12-Tube

Most versatile and easy to use acrylic
Unique interactive formula gives you more creative freedom

Most acrylic paints tend to be quick-drying to make the painting process simpler. That said, some people really enjoy the malleability of paints as it helps in seamless blending.

Atelier Interactive tries to solve the problem by mixing tradition with innovation to create one of the best artist-grade acrylic paints. These acrylics can be easily used for controlled wet blending to get the desired effect.

On top of that, the Atelier range has a lot of mediums that can change the texture of the paints. The company even has a special "Unlocking Formula" to keep your paintings wet for a longer time.

Additionally, the Atelier Interactive acrylic paints are available in 75 colors with seven new pastel shades.

Quantity: 2 oz tube | Color Selection: 75 colors | Finish: Satin | Lightfastness: Yes

13. Holbein Heavy-Body Acrylic Paint

Holbein Heavy Body Artist Acrylic Luminous Set of 6, 60ml...

Holbein is known for producing one of the best heavy-body acrylic paints available on the market. Yes, it might cost you a bit more money, but the paints provide a professional finish to your projects.

However, what makes Holbein heavy body acrylics unique is the vast color range of 113 shades. The company states that these colors have been created from Western and Eastern influences to provide a special palette to artists. Added to that, mixing these acrylics is seamless and effortless.

Besides the heavy body range, acrylic paints are available in fluid and matte versions. For instance, we even like the acrylic-colored gesso as it's perfect for working on canvases.

Quantity: 60 ml tube | Color Selection: 113 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

14. Matisse Acrylic Paints

Matisse Structure Sampler Set of 12 12 ml Tubes

Matisse is best known for the Structure Formula paints that are available in 95 vibrant colors on the market. The company describes it as an impasto paint meant to be used with palette knives and brushes to get textured effects.

Moreover, most of the shades have a lightfastness rating of ASTM I or II, which helps preserve the archival quality of your paintings. And you can even mix these paints with various Matisse mediums to make them more versatile.

Otherwise, try out the Flow Formula or Fluid Formula if you're looking for low-viscosity paints. But irrespective of the viscosity, the color payoff is consistent, and the paint is easy-to-use.

Quantity: 75 ml tube | Color Selection: 95 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

15. Reeves Acrylic Paint

Reeves Acrylic Paint Paint-75 ml, Assorted, 75 ml (Pack of...

ACRYLIC PAINT SET - Our premium acrylic set features highly...
VIBRANT COLOURS - This acrylic set includes five vibrant...

Reeves has been the way to go for many years when it comes to purchasing affordable art supplies. The acrylic paint from Reeves is vibrant with a high pigment load and is available in 50 beautiful colors.

Rather than being too flowy or thick, this paint has a buttery consistency that lets you apply it on various surfaces. And, because of the high-quality pigment, there's no streaking.

We would especially recommend the Reeves acrylic paint to students and amateur artists. You can purchase sets of 24 or 10 colors to get an idea of the shade range and color payoff.

Quantity: 75 ml tube | Color Selection: 50 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: No

16. Amsterdam Acrylic Paints

Amsterdam Standard Series Acrylic Tube 120ml Titanium White...

A very high level of lightfastness thanks to the use of pure...
An exceptionally durable paint film (the binding agent...

Amsterdam creates its acrylic paints with high-grade pigments through a total acrylic emulsion process. The most popular product range from Amsterdam is the standard series having 90 colors available in different quantities. We were especially impressed by the pearl and metallic colors.

These are medium-viscosity paints, so you can easily spread them on any surface, canvas, or wall. And according to regular artists, this product works well for techniques like multi-layering, wet-on-wet, and glazing.

Moreover, Amsterdam has 18 cheap acrylic paint sets. Some are even based on themes like urban landscapes and portraits. The largest acrylic paint set we found had all 90 shades in handy 20 ml tubes.

Quantity: 120 ml tube | Color Selection: 70 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

17. Castle Art Supplies Acrylic Paint

Castle Art Supplies 48 x 22ml Acrylic Paint Set |...

MADE TO MAKE IT EASY Squeeze paint direct for bold impact or...
UPGRADE YOUR ACRYLICS ARMOURY Wide ranging set of large...

An acrylic paint set is often the best place to start for a beginner to get introduced to a new painting medium. However, it can be a challenging task to find the right set with proper colors and quality. Castle Art Supplies have made it easier to pick premium quality acrylic paint sets at an affordable price.

Currently, the company has options of 12, 24, and 48-piece acrylic paint sets. Along with that, there's an exclusive metallic set with 24 shades.

The paints are suitable for painters of all skill levels and are convenient to use in the paint. On top of that, these paints are non-toxic and water-based, so you can give the sets to kids.

Quantity: 22 ml tube | Color Selection: 48 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

18. Tri-Art Acrylics

Among all the art supplies companies we check out for this list, Tri-Art has one of the most diverse product lists. Like other brands, it separates the products according to levels of quality but also introduces special items.

The best-selling item from Tri-Art is the high-viscosity acrylic paints, and a close second would be the liquid acrylics that have a creamy consistency. Moreover, Tri-Art makes acrylic gouache, full-body acrylic, and even acrylic printing ink.

For absolute beginners, Tri-Art has introduced Primary Paint, a liquid acrylic with rich pigments, and this paint is available in ten colors. It has a beautiful matte finish with resistance to cracking and chipping.

Quantity: 120 ml tube | Color Selection: 88 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

19. M. Graham & Co. Acrylic Paint

M. Graham & Co. 5 Color Acrylic Set Art - Paints, Plus 6th...

5 Color Acrylic Set, Plus Bonus 6th Color
M. Graham paint set

Are you fond of using watercolors? If so, you'll surely like using the acrylic paints made by M. Graham & Co. The company believes in designing the finest paints for artists, so it skips on using inferior fillers and bulking agents. Furthermore, the paints are created in small batches with premium pigments in the highest concentration.

These artist-grade paints are excellent for adding details to your paintings or even for creating entire washes with a consistent color payoff. As this paint has a gouache-like consistency, it's best for intermediate-level artists.

Quantity: 2 oz tube | Color Selection: 70 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

20.Grumbacher Academy Acrylic Paint

GRUMBACHER Academy Acrylic Paint, Gloss, 90ml/3 oz Metal...

6-COLOR STARTER SET: This set is ideal for starting your...
MIX, TINT, AND SHADE: Primary paints can mix a wide range of...

Another best cheap acrylic paint option available on the market is the Grumbacher Academy Acrylics. The range contains 48 brilliant colors with an ASTM lightfast rating of 1. These acrylics are AP certified, so they can be used for your schoolwork.

However, the best thing about these paints has to be their spectacular tinting quality due to the high concentration of pigment used for every shade. If your acrylics seem to dry quickly, go for the Grumbacher metal 90 ml tubes for getting longer usage.

We think both professional artists and students would like these acrylic paints because of their thick consistency and excellent color payoff.

Quantity: 75 ml tube | Color Selection: 48 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

21. Lascaux Acrylic Paints

The Art of Throwing [Paperback] by McErlain, Alex

Lascaux Artist Acrylics - Cadmium Green Light, 45 ml tube
157 Cadmium Green Light

Lascaux, the name comes from a prehistoric cave in France that was discovered to have paintings made by ancient human beings. Similarly, the tagline of this brand is "the spirit of colors," which has helped it create excellent high-quality paints. Artists worldwide enjoy using Lascaux acrylic paints because of the variety of colors and textures.

The Lascaux Artist Metallics are especially popular as the thick body paint has a consistency similar to that of oil paints. At the same time, the Lascaux Artist range contains 54 vibrant colors with outstanding lightfastness, weather resistance, and a beautiful semi-matte finish.

Quantity: 85 ml tube | Color Selection: 54 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

22. Old Holland New Masters Classic Acrylic Paint

Old Holland New Masters Classic Acrylic 60 ml Tube - French...

Let's start by saying that after you have gained some experience working with acrylics, it's a great idea to invest in quality paints. One such brand preferred by professional artists is Old Holland. The company is primarily known for making excellent oil paints, and the New Masters Classic acrylic paint line is based on them.

There are 168 lightfast opaque, and transparent colors available in this range that dry to a satin gloss finish. Moreover, the paints are made with 100% pure acrylic binder, making your painting last for a long time.

Quantity: 60 ml tube | Color Selection: 168 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

23. Utrecht Acrylic Paints

Last but not least, we have the Utrecht Artists' Acrylic, a heavy body paint with a smooth buttery texture. Utrecht uses the finest pure pigments and a 100% pure acrylic polymer to give the paints a premium quality with the highest possible concentration.

However, if you aren't ready to pay the high price, the Utrecht Studio Series acrylics are just as good and have similar pigments. As it's AP-certified and non-toxic, kids can use the paints for schoolwork.

Both variants are available in several vibrant colors with different opacities. But, only the colors of the Artists' Acrylic come in acrylic paint set options.

Quantity: 2 oz tube | Color Selection: 96 colors | Finish: Glossy or matte | Lightfastness: Yes

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints Comparison Table

Product	Quantity	Color Selection	Finish	Lightfastness
Liquitex BASICS	4 oz tube	48 colors	Matte	Yes
Apple Barrel Acrylic Paint	2 oz bottle	224 colors	Matte	No
Arteza Acrylic Paint	4 oz bottle	60 colors	Matte	Yes
Golden Fluid Acrylic Paint	1 oz bottle	43 colors	Matte	Yes
Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint	2 oz tube	60 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Blick Studio Acrylic Paint	2 oz tube	59 colors	Matte	Yes
Daler Rowney Graduate Acrylic Paint	120 ml tube	40 colors	Glossy or matte	No
Sennelier Abstract Acrylic Paint	120 ml pouch	60 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Mont Marte Acrylic Paints	2 oz tube	24 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Pébéo Studio Acrylics	100 ml tube	48 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Caliart Acrylic Paint	2 oz bottle	32 colors	Matte	Yes
Chroma Atelier Interactive Acrylic Paint	2 oz tube	75 colors	Satin	Yes
Holbein Heavy-Body Acrylic Paint	60 ml tube	107 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Matisse Acrylic Paints	75 ml tube	95 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Reeves Acrylic Paint	75 ml tube	45 colors	Glossy or matte	No
Amsterdam Acrylic Paints	120 ml tube	70 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Castle Art Supplies Acrylic Paint	22 ml tube	48 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Tri-Art Acrylics	120 ml tube	88 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
M. Graham & Co. Acrylic Paint	2 oz tube	70 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Grumbacher Academy Acrylic Paint	75 ml tube	48 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Lascaux Acrylic Paints	85 ml tube	60 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Old Holland New Masters Classic Acrylic Paint	60 ml tube	168 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes
Utrecht Acrylic Paints	2 oz tube	96 colors	Glossy or matte	Yes

Buying Guide For The Best Cheap Acrylic Paints

Are you still a bit confused about picking the best cheap acrylic paint? Don't worry, as we will help you out by providing some of the essential features to look for in any paint. Usually, when thinking about using cheap paint, we expect it to be bad.

But, keeping a note of these points while picking the paint may lead you to cheap acrylics that perform way better than what's expected from them. We did use these points to shortlist the products mentioned in this article. So, we can give the assurance that none of the acrylics would let you down while painting.

Now, let's have a look at how to choose great acrylics for yourself at a cheap price.

A. Color Range

To be honest, you can possibly make various shades using primary colors along with black and white paints. However, it can quickly get inconvenient if you're working on a large project or want the paints for kids. And we even think that having access to various color options can make you more productive while painting.

On top of that, acrylic painting calls for vibrant colors, and the brightness might be affected while mixing paints. But, the problem with cheap acrylics is that they typically come with a limited color range.

Moreover, we found that the options typically lack the right in-between shades. This makes creating color transitions and blending exceptionally challenging while painting. Therefore, if you're someone who uses a lot of colors, always go for brands with a proper color range.

Furthermore, other factors like transparency and finish matter when it comes to colors. This is especially true for people working with different painting mediums and surfaces. So, whenever you're thinking of getting cheap acrylic paint, check for details like finish, hue, transparency, brightness, and radiance, among other things.

We highly recommend looking for a proper shade card to check the actual colors. If possible, visit a drawing supply store near you to get ahold of the swatches and color charts or order them online.

B. Overall Quality

It might be too much to expect the best cheap acrylic paint to have a quality similar to artist-grade paints. But, we would definitely want the paint to have an overall good quality. This includes the use of decent pigments to make vibrant colors and proper binders that keep the paint from cracking or separating.

A typical problem seen in cheap acrylics is the texture being glue-like or too gloopy. This is due to the use of an improper binder or any other additives that ruins the formula of the paint. Moreover, these paints tend to remain tacky even when the painting has been left to dry for days.

Therefore, even while looking for affordable or student-grade acrylics, go for products that have proven quality. That's why we trust paints produced by known brands like Golden or Liquitex as there's some assurance of quality.

Having said that, we know that it can be hard for a beginner to assess the quality of a product. In that case, you can either purchase a small tube of the paint or check if a sample is available at the nearest store. If you like how the paint feels, go ahead and order more.

C. Viscosity

One of the things to understand while using acrylics is the viscosity of paints. Don't worry; it's not a difficult concept, as viscosity stands for how the paint flows. Typically, acrylics are divided into two categories, heavy body, and soft body.

When you look at artist-grade paints, most of them tend to have a heavy body. As the viscosity is high, the colors tend to be thick, making it perfect for textured work. So, if you're transitioning from oil paints to acrylics, heavy body paints might suit you better. And they can be used with a palette knife.

On the other hand, thin-body acrylics are creamy and flowy due to their low viscosity. Along with painting, thin body paints are perfect for pouring, glazing, and DIY crafts and can be used on various surfaces.

Nonetheless, acrylics such as Liquitex BASICS are getting more popular that come with a medium viscosity. Therefore, you can use these paints for DIY crafts as well as for elaborate paintings.

Another thing to note is that thick body paints can be easily thinned by adding mediums to decrease viscosity. Similarly, pouring mediums can be added to thin-body acrylics to give them a more consistent flow.

D. Lightfastness And Permanence

Have you ever wondered how paintings look great even after decades? It's due to the paints having excellent lightfastness and permanence ratings.

Lightfastness determines the probability of paint fading over time when it's exposed to light, especially sunlight. Now, it isn't realistic to forever trap your painting in a dark, flightless room. But, you can always try to use paints that don't fade drastically over time.

Therefore, while making the purchase, always look for the lightfastness rating of a paint. However, do note that the lightfastness may vary based on colors. So, at times you may need to pick alternatives to increase the archival quality of an acrylic painting.

Similar to lightfastness is the concept of permanence. This helps you understand how the paint will act over time. Needless to say, cheap acrylics that are loaded with low-quality binders and additives don't last for a long time. If you're looking for acrylics to do commission work, it's best to rely on paints with either AA or A permanence rating.

Having said that, you should also invest in a high-quality varnish to increase the life of your paintings. Furthermore, the varnish seals the painting to protect it from dust, mites, harmful UV rays, and other harmful forces.

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints

Yes, you can add water to any acrylic paint. For some reason, adding water to acrylics is a controversial topic, and it’s considered out of bounds among professional painters. But, we would like to let you know that using water is absolutely okay if you’re able to figure out the correct proportions.

Moreover, adding water in a 1:1 ratio to a heavy body acrylic wouldn’t make such a difference. In turn, it does make the paint have a better flow.

Having said that, adding water to low body paint, especially in huge quantities, may lead to over-dilution. Also, some people use the over-dilution method to create beautiful washes.

To be on the safer side, try using the smallest amount of water at the beginning until you figure out the perfect ratio. And, if your goal is to increase the drying time of the paint, try using a retarder for better results.

Not, an acrylic paint being cheap doesn’t necessarily mean that it’s going to be of bad quality. Contrary to it, most popular art supplies brands actually use the same pigments or formulations while creating the cheaper versions. This helps the brand to make the product lines more consistent, and you get to have an excellent product at a better price.

Having said that, there are some acrylics on the market that look a bit off. That’s why we recommend using a small sample of any paint before splurging on getting the large sets or a big bottle of paint. Many professional painters, in fact, use cheaper versions instead of artist-grade paints as they believe in using their skills to make good art.

Final Words On Best Cheap Acrylic Paints

Conclusion

That's everything we had to tell you about purchasing the best cheap acrylic paints available on the market. As you may understand, we have tried to limit your choices by narrowing down only the best products.

We are absolutely sure that you would have a blast painting with any of our suggested acrylic paints. Having said that, it's crucial to note that every painter has distinct preferences while working with acrylics. In other words, you may need to try a couple of paints before finding the one that suits your style.

Also, remember to refer to the buying guide when you're unsure about getting any cheap acrylic paint. With that, we have come to the end of this informative piece.

Until next time, goodbye, and take care!

Best Acrylic Paints and Paint Colors

Whether you're a beginner or a professional artist, there's something on this list for everyone. So without further ado, here's the list of the 13 best acrylic paints to inspire your next masterpiece.

Utrecht Artists' Acrylic Paint Colors - Best Overall Performance

Utrecht is a famous company in the art community as the maker of some of the best gear for professional artists. They have been serving for the past 50 years or more and now are part of another globally renowned company, Blick. This product, in particular, is one of the best acrylic paints and professionals’ favorite.

Experience

The colors are of top-notch quality. They are amazingly vibrant and the paint has a very high pigment count. And the saturation of individual colors is as expected.

Of course, the lightfastness and permeance of each color vary from each other but the quality is uber with no doubt.

They also mix evenly and accurately. The colors, truly, are artists’ grade colors.

The colors can be bought individually or as a set of 65, and are available in 3 sizes of tubes - 2, 5, and 16 oz.

They are quite expensive but the performance and quality make it totally worth the price.

Pros

Amazing color performance in terms of vibrancy, accuracy, lightfastness, and permeance
Available in various options of size and are sold individually and as a set of 65
Truly artist grade quality and from a brand that has been established for over 50 years

Cons

It is expensive but totally worth the price for a professional

Size/Volume: 2 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Thick & Creamy

Blick Artists' Acrylic Paints - Widest Color Selection

Blick is a world-famous company when it comes to professional-grade art products. We have already talked once about it in the previous section.

Blick Artists’ Acrylics are available in 70 different colors and all of them are absolutely the best quality. Although a bit expensive these colors are totally worth the price.

Experience

The colors have a very high pigment count, are astoundingly lightfast, and have great saturation and accuracy.

It’s not news, though, because Blick is one of the world’s most renowned art companies for a good reason.

The colors are available in 4 sizes - 2, 8, 16, and 65 oz. You’ll have to be decisive about the quantity of each color you get with Blick because they are super expensive.

There are 70 different colors in total. Out of the 70, 38 are made from a single pigment source and they perform the same in terms of lightfastness and permanence. The other 32 are made from a combination of pigments.

Pros

Colors are amazingly vibrant, lightfast, and accurate, and A-grade performance
Available in many sizes and each color can be bought individually
This lineup has one of the widest color selections

Cons

It is expensive but totally worth the price for professionals

Size/Volume: 2 oz, 4 oz, 8 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Satin, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Thick & Buttery

M. Graham Acrylic Paint - Best for Oil Paint Transitioning

M. Graham & Co. 5 Color Acrylic Set Art - Paints, Plus 6th...

5 Color Acrylic Set, Plus Bonus 6th Color
M. Graham paint set

Graham is a US-based company that makes good quality paint - oil, watercolors, acrylic, etc. - for artists all around the world. This line-up comes in a set of 6 colors that can also be bought individually. The colors are Azo Yellow, Naphthol Red, Ultramarine Blue, Phthalo Green, Mars Black, and Titanium White.

Experience

The colors have a high pigment count, which makes the color vibrant no matter what surface you are using. The performance is also great in terms of lightfastness and permanence. These truly are professional-grade colors.

Although the colors mix accurately and you get the primary colors, the inclusion of only 6 colors makes creating other colors a manual process, which is cumbersome.

The feel of the paint is great if you are switching to acrylic from oil paint. The application and the performance are pretty similar between the two.

Since the colors are meant for professional artists, they don’t come for cheap and there are two sizes available for the paint - 2 oz (59ml) and 6 oz (150ml).

Pros

Vibrant and saturated colors with high pigment count
Each color can be bought separately or you can buy a set of 6
Great for artists who are switching to acrylic from oil paint

Cons

Although all the primary colors are present, with only 6 total colors, it is cumbersome to produce other colors

Size/Volume: 2 oz, 5 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Heavy Body

Arteza Acrylic Paint Set - Best for Casual Painters & Kids

ARTEZA Acrylic Paint Set of 60 Colors, 0.74 ounces Tubes, 5...

Exciting Selection of Artist-Quality Acrylic Paint Colors:...
Rich, Vivid Pigments: Your premium bulk acrylic paint kit...

Till now, we have only discussed professional-grade expensive acrylic paint. In this entry, Arteza brings an option for casual painters, kids, and decorative artists. The paint has decent performance at an affordable price along with a wide variety of colors to choose from - 60 different colors in a given set.

Experience

The colors perform pretty well for the price. They are plenty vibrant and they mix reasonably accurately. The pigment count and permanence may not be that impressive but for the price, it is to be expected.

One thing that did impress us in terms of performance was the colors’ lightfastness which is more than just sufficient given the price.

There’s a wide variety of colors in the set but unfortunately, the colors can’t be purchased individually.

The colors are completely safe and non-toxic, so don’t be scared to give these to your child. Also, the caps can be resealed without any hassle making it a perfect buy for the occasional creator.

Pros

Very affordable price
Colors perform really well for hobbyists, beginners, and kids
Huge variety of colors
Tube caps can be resealed for long-term storage

Cons

Colors can’t be bought individually

Size/Volume: 22 ml | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Student & Professional Grade | Consistency: Consistent & Smooth

Chroma Atelier Interactive Acrylics - Best for Watercolor Transitioning

Sale

Chroma Atelier Interactive Acryl 80ml 7-Tubes

Atelier Interactive Acrylics allow the artist control over...
Drying time can be extended and dry colors can be...

Chroma Atelier Interactive Acrylics don’t give exactly the experience of painting with acrylics. It is best suited for artists who are switching to acrylics from watercolors. The paint has been engineered in such a way that it behaves more like watercolors than acrylics while still giving similar results.

Experience

This paint doesn’t form a skin over the canvas or paper as conventional acrylic does when it dries. That means you can use water to rehydrate the paint again with water and control the spread again, somewhat, like watercolors.

All acrylic painters know that correctly blending is one of the hardest things to do with acrylic paint because it dries up so fast. This paint doesn’t have that issue. There’s no sense of urgency with this paint when it comes to blending.

That’s why watercolor artists would feel at home with this paint, and we recommend you also try this if you do a lot of blending and not glazing.

Pros

Good performance in terms of vibrancy and accuracy
Blending with it is super easy – like watercolors
It comes at a pretty reasonable price

Cons

It’s not very lightfast and is less permanent than conventional acrylic paint

Size/Volume: 80 ml | Finish/Texture: Satin, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Smooth & Creamy

Golden Heavy Body Acrylic

Golden Heavy Body Acrylic Introductory Set (0000074-0)

This set of 6 Professional Golden Heavy Body Acrylics...
Heavy Body acrylics are known for their smooth, thick,...

Golden’s Heavy Body Acrylic is our top pick for artists who are more comfortable with heavy-body acrylic paint. For the uninitiated, heavy body paint is more viscous, or in other words, heavy. They form thicker skin and usually dry up faster.

There are 6 colors in this set (which can also be bought individually) - Phthalo Blue, Hansa Yellow Medium, Quinacridone Magenta, Titanium White, Carbon Black, and Phthalo Green.

Experience

Painting with heavy-body acrylic is a thing of preference and if it’s your preference then Golden Heavy Body is our top recommendation for you.

The colors perform amazingly. The colors are obviously very saturated and vibrant. They are also incredibly lightfast and permanent.

One thing to keep in mind if you are new to heavy-body acrylic is that blending is difficult with it. You'll have to resort to glazing and use a knife for mixing colors. Even special acrylic brushes will not be able to handle the harshness of heavy-body acrylic paint.

And the fact that there are only 6 different colors makes getting specific colors and blends a totally manual process, which is quite cumbersome.

Pros

It has amazing saturation and vibrancy due to a high pigment count
The quality and performance are professional grades
Smooth experience and amazing permanence

Cons

It is expensive

Size/Volume: 2 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Thick & Heavy

Daler-Rowney Acrylic Paint

Daler-Rowney - FW Acrylic Artists Ink Set - Primary Colors...

Intensely Colored Ink - Daler-Rowney acrylic ink is made...
High Lightfastness - Our acrylic ink is fully intermixable,...

Daler-Rowney provides good acrylics at a cheaper price than other brands like Golden, Liquitex, Winsor, and Newton. We included this option because of the quality you get for the price, and more importantly, because we know that artists need cheap acrylics for background filling.

Experience

Every painter has to use a large portion of colors to fill up the background and other large areas of the painting. For that purpose, we recommend using this cheap acrylic for Daler-Rowney.

Don’t let the cheap price tag fool you because the colors are actually pretty decent, and in the box, you get a total of 10 different colors. The variety is sufficient for base filling.

Do keep in mind that the colors are not of professional grade, so we don’t recommend using this color set for anything more than background filling for serious work.

Other than that, also keep in mind that the colors are a little on the thicker side.

Pros

It is inexpensive
Good color variety right out of the box
Thick and buttery consistency
Great for casual use

Cons

It is not meant for professional use

Size/Volume: 1 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Satin, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Viscous & Moist

Matisse Structure Formula Acrylics

Matisse Structure Formula Acrylics is a great option for kids because of its modularity in terms of consistency and its affordable price. We also recommend it to casual artists and hobbyists. In the set we reviewed, you get 12 different shades of 12ml each.

Experience

Controlling the paint is one of the toughest jobs when it comes to painting with acrylic paint. So, if you are new to painting, in general, then it can scare you away.

That’s where this paint impressed us the most. You can dilute this color with water or medium to give a thinner and more fluid experience.

You can also make it thicker using impasto or texture medium if you prefer that experience.

Otherwise, the colors perform decently enough for the price. The vibrancy is great for the price and the permanency is above average.

If you are new to the art or have kids who want to discover their artistic side, then go with this as it’ll be really helpful for learning the basics.

Pros

Very affordable
Color performance is pretty decent
Paint permanency is great for the price
Paint is extremely modular in terms of consistency

Cons

It is only meant for casual use

Size/Volume: 2 oz, 4.2 oz, 8.4 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss, Satin | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Heavy Body

Castle Art Supplies Acrylic Paint Set

Castle Art Supplies 48 x 22ml Acrylic Paint Set |...

MADE TO MAKE IT EASY Squeeze paint direct for bold impact or...
UPGRADE YOUR ACRYLICS ARMOURY Wide ranging set of large...

Castle Art Supplies Acrylic Paint Set is our top budget pick that is meant for beginner and casual artists. These colors come at almost half the price of the Arteza color set we talked about. The set has 48 different colors, and the quality and the performance of the paint are well beyond the expectations one could have given the price.

Experience

The colors have a decent pigment count, and they are pretty vibrant. The permanence and the lightfastness are also well above average.

The experience of painting with this color set is also very satisfactory, especially, given the price point.

The set has 48 different colors, which is more than enough in terms of variety. The variety of the color set becomes even more important if you consider that this paint set will mostly be used by beginners and casual artists.

The only gripe that we have with this color set is the fact that the tubes are not big - 22ml each - and the colors can’t be purchased individually. Because of this, the basic colors, which are used the most, run out pretty soon.

Pros

It is the best value for money in the budget category
Colors perform decently in terms of permanency, vibrancy, and experience
There are 48 different colors in the set

Cons

Colors can’t be purchased individually

Size/Volume: 22 ml | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Student Grade | Consistency: Consistent & Smooth

Grumbacher Acrylic Paint Set

Sale

Grumbacher Academy Acrylic Paint, Gloss, 24ml/0.8 oz Metal...

Set includes one tube each: Burnt Sienna, Burnt Umber,...
ASTM lightfast rating of 1- Excellent

Grumbacher Acrylic Paint Set is the best student-grade acrylic set according to us. At the student grade bracket, this acrylic set gives the closest performance to professional-grade acrylic paint. These colors can be bought individually as well as in sets. There are four sizes available as well - 2.5, 3, 5.07, and 6.76 oz.

Experience

The experience of painting with these colors is amazing. The consistency is extremely smooth and the feel of the paint is spectacular for the price. It’s a little surprising to see such a good performance in a student grade color set.

The colors excel in vibrancy as well. It seems like the paint has a high pigment count and the colors are, very poopy and bright. The results look very close to what we’d have gotten with professional-grade paint.

The paint is decently permanent and lightfast as well. But the colors vary from each other in terms of durability, so, we recommend you to check their website for the specifics.

Pros

Well into the affordable range for most artists
48 different colors in the set, and it offers plenty of variety
Consistency and vibrancy are almost at par with professional-grade paint
Color is extremely durable as well with great lightfastness and permanency

Cons

However good this acrylic paint may be, these are not professional-grade colors

Size/Volume: 75 ml | Finish/Texture: Matte, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Student & Professional Grade | Consistency: Thick & Viscous

Liquitex Professional Acrylic Set

Liquitex BASICS Acrylic Paint Set, 48 x 22ml (0.74-oz) Tube...

WHY BASICS; Liquitex invented artists' acrylics back in 1955...
HIGHEST QUALITY PIGMENTS Basics uses the the same high...

Liquitex is a brand of art supplies that was founded in 1955, and since then, Liquitex has made some of the best art products, including paint. This heavy-body acrylic set performs outstandingly in every regard, and we can recommend this paint enough to professionals who use heavy-body acrylics.

Experience

This heavy-body acrylic has outstanding performance in every area. The consistency is marvelous, with a buttery flow and a gorgeous satin finish.

The colors are pretty bright and vibrant, even though the pigment count is not very high. It’s good in a way because many professionals like more somber colors.

The durability of the paint is incredible. The paint is extremely lightfast and permanent, no matter the color. The paint is water-resistant and UV resistant.

It is our top recommendation for professionals who prefer heavy-body acrylics.

The set we reviewed had 12 different colors, and the colors can also be individually purchased through various online and offline retailers. The color variety is a bit underwhelming, but we figure it’s enough to satisfy most artists’ needs.

There are four sizes to choose from - 2, 4.65, and 32 oz.

Pros

The colors have an amazing performance in terms of vibrancy and consistency
It has a gorgeous satin finish
The colors are incredibly durable as well; they are water-resistant and UV resistant

Cons

It is expensive

Size/Volume: 4 oz | Finish/Texture: Matte, Satin, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Fluid & Satin

Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint

Sale

Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint, 10 x 60ml (2--oz)...

PROFESSIONAL PIGMENTS, SMARTLY BALANCED: Bright, stable...
EFFORTLESS CONSISTENCY, VIBRANT RESULTS: Smooth, satin...

Winsor & Newton's Galeria is a series of paint that bridges the gap between the student-grade and the professional-grade paints. With a modest price tag, this paint set provides more than most student-grade paint sets. It’s sort of a middle ground of acrylic paint and hence, it makes it on our list.

Experience

The colors are reasonable, vibrant, and sort of mimic the look of professional-grade paint while being a lot cheaper. We think professional artists who are new to acrylics will find this paint the most useful.

The colors are fairly lightfast and permanent but you’ll have to look up online for details about the durability of individual colors.

Although the colors we are discussing here come in a set of 10, you can buy 57 different colors individually as well.

There are in total 4 different sizes for the paint - 60, 200, 250, and 500 ml. Although you do keep in mind that some colors don’t have all the sizes available.

Pros

Perfect paint set for intermediates or professionals who are new to acrylics
Colors perform reasonably well and are extremely durable
There’s a wide selection of colors available – 57 in total – that can be bought individually
Moderate price tag and good performance, providing a middle ground of acrylic paints

Cons

The size options and their availability is a bit problematic

Size/Volume: 60 ml | Finish/Texture: Matte, Satin, Gloss | Pigment Quality: Student & Professional Grade | Consistency: Smooth & Soft

Sennelier Acrylics

Sale

Sennelier Artists Acrylic Set, 0.7 Fl Oz (Pack of 10), Multi

Paint has very little odor and dries rapidly to create a...
Made with high quality pigments, from the most demanding...

This acrylic set makes it here because of the incredible handiness of blending and glazing with these. The colors perform reasonably well and at an affordable price. The smoothness of the flow and color vibrancy is a delightful experience.

Experience

The colors are on the more saturated and strong side. The colors pop out after drying and overall, it’s a good look.

The consistency is on the softer side - kind of thin. The paint seems to glide on the canvas and the experience, hence, is very smooth and pleasing.

For that very reason, we think that this acrylic set is perfect for blending, glazing, and mixing colors.

On the other side, the colors are also very durable. They are decently lightfast and retain their saturation very well. Overall, it’s a good pick.

Pros

Colors are well-saturated and vibrant
Paint has a buttery experience when put onto the canvas
Colors are plenty durable – light-fast and don’t lose their saturation

Cons

Not recommended for professionals, fall short in performance when compared to artist-grade paints

Size/Volume: 21 ml | Finish/Texture: Matte, Satin, Gloss, Iridescent | Pigment Quality: Professional Grade | Consistency: Creamy & Rich

Best Acrylic Paint Sets Comparison Table

Product	Size/Volume	Finish/Texture	Pigment Quality	Consistency
Utrecht Artists’ Acrylic Paint Colors	2 oz, 5 oz, 8 oz	Matte, Gloss, Satin	Professional Grade	Thick & Creamy
Blick Artists’ Acrylic Paints	2 oz, 4 oz, 8 oz	Matte, Satin, Gloss	Professional Grade	Thick & Buttery
M. Graham Acrylic Paint	2 oz, 5 oz	Matte, Gloss	Professional Grade	Heavy Body
Arteza Acrylic Paint Set	22 ml	Matte, Gloss	Student & Professional Grade	Consistent & Smooth
Chroma Atelier Interactive Acrylics	80 ml	Satin, Gloss	Professional Grade	Smooth & Creamy
Golden Heavy Body Acrylic	2 oz	Matte, Gloss	Professional Grade	Thick & Heavy
Daler-Rowney Acrylic Paint	1 oz	Matte, Satin, Gloss	Professional Grade	Viscous & Moist
Matisse Structure Formula Acrylics	2 oz, 4.2 oz, 8.4 oz	Matte, Gloss, Satin	Professional Grade	Heavy Body
Castle Art Supplies Acrylic Paint Set	22 ml	Matte, Gloss	Student Grade	Consistent & Smooth
Grumbacher Acrylic Paint Set	75 ml	Matte, Gloss	Student & Professional Grade	Thick & Viscous
Liquitex Professional Acrylic Set	4 oz	Matte, Satin, Gloss	Professional Grade	Fluid & Satin
Winsor & Newton Galeria Acrylic Paint	60 ml	Matte, Satin, Gloss	Student & Professional Grade	Smooth & Soft
Sennelier Acrylics	21 ml	Matte, Satin, Gloss, Iridescent	Professional Grade	Creamy & Rich

Buying Guide For The Best Acrylic Paint Set

FUN FACT | Did you know acrylic paints dry way faster than other paints?

If we are able to curb your interest, here is our article on how long acrylic paints take to dry. Many take this as a blessing whereas others feel this is not suitable for painting.

Go on and give it a read!

Here are some parameters that are used to judge the quality of acrylic paint.

Vibrancy

The vibrancy of the paint depends on the pigments that are used to make the paint. The source of the pigment, its purity, and its concentration decides the brightness of the paint.

The paint that has ‘Hue’ in its name is made from a combination of pigments to produce that specific color. These are, hence, not naturally sourced.

Typically, artist-grade paints are more vibrant and have better pigments than student-grade paints.

Consistency

Acrylic paint can be of various kinds in terms of consistency. And in acrylic paints, consistency matters a lot because the experience is significantly different, and different consistencies are used to achieve different results.

Heavy body paint is, especially, a different breed of its own. Because it has an almost putty-like consistency and the artists use it to achieve very different results from other acrylic paints.

Lightfastness

Lightfastness is the ability of the paint to resist the depreciation that is caused by light and radiation. Lightfast paint retains its saturation even after long exposure to light.

ASTM categorizes colors using 5 buckets of lightfastness: Very Poor, Poor, Fair, Very Good, and Excellent.

Often lightfastness varies from color to color even if they come from the same line-up. This is because different kinds of pigments are used for different colors.

If you are concerned about the lightfastness of the paint you use, be sure to check the ratings of individual colors from the website of the manufacturer.

Permanence

The permanence of a paint tries to quantify or categorize the permanency of that paint. Of course, this also includes how lightfast the paint is, but it also includes other aging factors of the paint.

Often, casual artists can ignore the permanency of the paint but professional artists are very serious about this.

Our recommendation for them will be to carefully note the permanency of individual colors from the manufacturer’s website as permanency also varies with the colors.

Acrylic Paints FAQs

Till now, we have only discussed professional grade expensive acrylic paint. In this entry, Arteza brings an option for casual painters, kids, and decorative artists. The paint has decent performance at an affordable price along with a wide variety of colors to choose from – 60 different colors in a given set.

Conclusion

So, that’ll be all for this article.

We listed our top picks for acrylic paints and also included our review about them.. Keep in mind that these entries are listed to cater to unique and different needs, so there’s not any sort of ranking.

We hope that you enjoyed reading this piece and found it helpful. We hope you the very best in your endeavors, and thank you for reading!

Read More on Acrylic Painting

10 Best Paper for Acrylic Paint

Best Canvas for Acrylic Painting

8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof

Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

10 Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students

Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

Learn How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Brilliantly

Painting on Paper with Acrylics & 5 Paper-Like Surfaces

Painting Surfaces For Acrylics | Acrylic Prepping 101

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands Compared

22+ Delicate Beautiful Acrylic Painting Ideas To Try

Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects

20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

The canvas is the cornerstone of any painter’s journey with their art.

Being such a critical part of your progression as an artist, it’s crucial to know which canvas is the best suited for your particular usage. The adage “different strokes for different folks” also holds well for choosing canvases.

To make your job of scouring through hundreds or even thousands of canvases on the market today easier, we’ll walk you through the top ten canvases for acrylic paints. We then follow our reviews up with a small guide on how to choose the best canvases for your art style and work.

Without wasting much time, we’ll now move toward reviewing the first canvas on our list!

Best Canvas for Acrylic Reviewed

So, whether you're a professional artist or a beginner, here's the list of the 10 best canvases for acrylic that you can consider for your next masterpiece.

Blick Premiere Cotton Canvas - Best for Versatility and Quality

While most of us know Blick from their popular online art and craft supplies store, it might be a surprise to note that they manufacture their own supplies as well. And in fact, they do it very well. This particular canvas is completely woven by hand, and the surface is perfect for painting with acrylic paints. It’s a 12x12 woven canvas with cotton derived from India.

Experience

Blick has left no stone unturned in making sure this canvas has nothing to lose when compared to the best in the business, and that too with a more affordable price. The canvas is gallery-wrapped and back-stapled with uncut corners and a large amount of selvage, allowing you to re-stretch the canvas in the future. For tension adjustments, keys come as standard.

It comes in three different profiles: .875", 1.5", and 2.375", thus giving you a huge boost when it comes to displays. These are useful when you want to display your works in studios, museums, or galleries. The canvas weighs around 10 oz when it’s pre-primed, and once primed it weighs around 15 oz. It’s triple-primed with a high-quality, acid-free gesso.

The priming process includes being sanded between primer layers, which makes for a fairly smooth surface with a good enough tooth for most art uses. What’s more, the entire range of All large Blick canvases come with supports as standard. The wood quality and woodwork are also wonderful - all in all, it’s a brilliant and value-for-money canvas for all your painting needs.

Pros

Comes with a high-quality triple-primed canvas, with a great tooth quality
Three different profiles available as per intended usage
Canvas material is super smooth to work with

Cons

Raw corners may not be suited to everyone’s tastes

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 31 sizes | Depth: 1 1/2" | Acid-free: Yes

Arteza Stretched White Canvas - Best for Students and Hobbyists

A little bit farther from the fully professional Blick reviewed above, Arteza is a name renowned in the student and hobby artist community - instead of delivering the best of the best, it gives you a relatively very affordable yet decent quality canvas. They become even more affordable when it comes to bulk ordering - and if you’re not satisfied, they offer full refunds.

Sale

ARTEZA Stretched Canvas 11x14 Inches Pack of 8 – Blank...

Cotton Canvas for Various Painting Styles. Made with cotton,...
Eight Medium-Sized Canvases in One Set. Includes eight 11x14...

Experience

Well, looks like you won’t be needing a refund any time soon - the Arteza Stretched Canvas in White is a solid performer, any way you look at it. First off, there’s the material - it’s 100 percent cotton and comes with a good quality acid-free acrylic gesso. The canvas comes pre-stretched, and hence you have a nice, light spring for your brush.

It’s an 11” x 14” size canvas, which is perfect for almost any student or hobby artist. It always comes in packs and is extremely well-priced when it comes to per-unit cost. The wood used is pinewood and is back-stapled to ensure the canvas sticks well. The gesso layering is about 8 oz. It also comes in a number of other sizes as well, and the smaller sizes are cheaper still.

Your paints will glide on the surface, and thus the canvas responds to each stroke of the brush. This gives you a great surface to paint on - except if you’re a professional artist. Then the surface is much rougher and comes with a harder tooth than you’re used to. Other than that, the Arteza is a universally usable, decent-quality product that comes with great value for money.

Pros

Best value and quality combination for students and intermediate hobbyists
100% cotton surface that responds well to your strokes
Decent-sized canvas for all your painting needs

Cons

Might be too rough for professional painters

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 19 sizes | Depth: 7/8" | Acid-free: Yes

Darice Stretched Canvas - Best for Mid-Level Artists

If you’re looking for a canvas that comes with a bit more panache than the Arteza, yet do not want to wander into the full professional territory, the Darice Stretched Canvas presents a great compromise, and that too at a wonderful price. It comes in a huge variety of sizes and packs, from the smallest 8” x 10” in a single pack to a 30” x 40” pack of 40.

Darice Studio 71, 7 Piece, 11 by 14 inch, Stretched Canvas...

BLANK CANVAS–Every masterpiece begins on a blank slate,...
VERSATILE –This medium weight canvas on a wood frame is...

Experience

Darice presents a slightly different take on the canvas. Instead of having just one size in packs, they have a whole range of sizes to suit each and every artist. These are acid-free, medium-weight canvases that are double-primed (you might notice that the Arteza was single-primed, while the Blick was triple-primed and sanded). It’s much lighter than the Blick, however.

The material choice is also great - it’s 100 percent decent quality cotton, again slotting in somewhere between the Blick and the Arteza in terms of smoothness and the tooth of the canvas. The best part is, it’s lighter than either and also comes with wood stretcher keys to help you tighten the canvas. The thickness is approximately an inch, give or take.

Darice has been around starting off with a single store in 1954 and then expanding all over. Now, it’s an internationally renowned brand - and its products are definitely of a good standard. A number of people have reviewed this as being solid enough and toothy enough for their artwork, and in all but the most professional uses the canvas finds work.

Pros

Double-primed canvas which is also lightweight yet high quality
The cotton is smooth enough for most uses
Good value for money when you buy larger packs

Cons

Some users complain of issues with stapling and some tightness problems at times

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 13 sizes | Depth: 5/8" | Acid-free: Yes

Masterpiece Artist Canvas - Monet Pro

Once you go full professional, you wouldn’t be willing to make compromises which you did as a hobbyist or as a student. Hence, we present to you the Monet Pro, named after the Impressionist pioneer. Coming in with a double primed surface, a cross brace, and no finger joints to avoid chances of breakage over time, the Monet Pro is a wonderful canvas.

Masterpiece Artist Canvas 43062 Monet PRO 1-1/2" Deep, 30" x...

This 30 x 30" is of equal proportion.
Canvas Depth: 1-1/2", Canvas relief: 1/2" (Space between...

Experience

Masterpiece has been around in the market for years now, and the one thing that sums up their art supplies is the phrase “no compromises”. Whether it’s the quality of the raw materials or the design and finishing of their products - they do not look the other way for even the smallest of details. This holds true for this product as well - it’s easily one of the best canvases reviewed.

First, we come to the canvas surface. It is double primed and has just the right amount of tooth and undulation for acrylic paints to flow when being painted, but at the same time, stick to the surface when dried. There is another proprietary smoothing process for the surface, making sure you get the best possible painting experience on the canvas.

Other important features include an adjustable tension and a best-in-class stretching process. The cross brace at the back for sizes over 16 inches helps ensure stability. For those who are environmentally conscious, the canvas is made from sustainably sourced wood. This is a lightweight, classy canvas that guarantees one of the best possible painting experiences.

Pros

Comes with a cross brace instead of finger joints to hold the canvas, tightest corners of all canvases tested
Environmentally conscious manufacturing
Double primed, extra processing to ensure super smooth painting

Cons

Priced on the higher end

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 23 sizes | Depth: 1 1/2" | Acid-free: Yes

Daveliou Stretched Canvas

Coming back to the humble hobbyist and student - if you’re looking for the best possible compromise between value and quality, the Daveliou is one of our top picks. The edges are staple-free, and Daveliou uses its own gesso for priming the canvas - making sure that your painting experience is a joyous one. These frames also stay clean until used!

Daveliou 12”x12” Stretched Canvas for Painting, Triple...

Premium Stretched Canvas — Create unique art with Daveliou...
Durable Non Toxic Materials — The individually wrapped...

Experience

The canvas is a perfect mix of value and performance - coming in at a highly reasonable price point, given that it does not have regular staples holding the canvas together. The frame itself is around ⅝” thick and comes as standard with a triple priming process already complete. You do not have to spend a single moment in preparation or setting up - this one comes ready as it is.

The canvas comes prepared with a non-yellowing agent, which allows it to stay clean for as long as you wish for it to - it does not get yellowed with time. It is lightweight enough to be carried around from place to place, even though it comes triple-primed. Their gesso is also cruelty-free and vegan. The canvas comes in three different sizes - 8" x 10”, 11" x 14", and 16" x 20".

A number of media including oil, acrylic, casein, tempera, and collage media are at home with this canvas, so you can easily create mixed media artwork if you wish to.

Pros

Perfect value/performance ratio
Lightweight
Come Standard with a triple priming process already done

Cons

None

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 16 sizes | Depth: 3/4" | Acid-free: Yes

US Art Supply Black Stretched Canvas

This canvas is specifically for those who intend to work with a pitch-black backdrop and yet need a wonderful painting experience. A little bit off-center, this canvas delivers a solid painting experience with acrylic paints as well as other media. Though it’s made out of black fabric, make no mistake - it can easily stand its own among the hordes of canvases out there.

U.S. Art Supply 18 x 24 inch Black Stretched Canvas 12-Ounce...

Pack of 4 - Professional Artist Quality: 3/4" thickness...
100% Cotton Canvases: Pure cotton canvases with medium...

Experience

This canvas is incredibly good for painting those night skies, planets, or galactic scenes from outer space. However, the world is your oyster - since this canvas delivers a wonderful overall performance, with a triple-primed satin-smooth surface and comes with sustainably derived wood. The canvas also does not cost all that much relative to other canvases on the market.

Even though this is triple-primed, we suggest students also consider this because of its affordability and the great performance it delivers. It comes with a profile of around ¾” and the gesso used to prime the surface is acid-free high-quality gesso. It weighs around 7 ounces unprimed and 12 ounces once triple-primed.

The stapling is done on the back of the canvas, with the edges having no staples on it. The canvas isn’t dyed black but instead comes pre-painted since there are no paints on the back side of the canvas. Overall, barring a few issues with the tightness of the canvas, this is a perfectly good canvas to paint on with acrylic paints.

Pros

Comes pre-painted black, which spares you the effort of having to paint the canvas yourself
Triple-primed for a smooth painting experience
High-quality gesso being used

Cons

A few artists report that the canvas loosened over time

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 8 sizes | Depth: 3/4" | Acid-free: Yes

Art Alternatives Stretched Canvas

If you’re looking for a compact enough canvas to hang on the wall once you’re done painting, the best bet you have is the Stretched Canvas by Alt Alternatives. It comes primed, but there’s no bleaching to speak of. Though it requires some prep unlike many others reviewed, it presents a great value for money proposition, especially for those just beginning with acrylic paint.

Art Alternatives stretched White Canvas Super Value Pack-8 x...

Art Alternatives Unbleached 4 oz cotton canvas for all media
Primed with acid-free gesso-ready to paint, collage, draw,...

Experience

While this comes unprimed, you can easily use this to learn how to prime a canvas or prime it to your particular convenience if you’re experienced with painting on canvas. It comes in a number of size options, but the usual recommended size is 11” x 14”. The canvas is just half an inch wide, so you can easily hang them up once you’re finished. The cotton comes unbleached.

The canvas has a natural and untarnished look and feel. For beginners who want to understand how to prime their own surface, they can easily learn on these canvases since they’re pretty affordable. Unlike other surfaces, you’re in charge here - so how toothy or harsh the surface is depends entirely on how well you prime the surface. The corners are completely square.

The canvas is gallery wrapped, so you can easily paint on the sides as well. The canvas comes plastic wrapped individually, as well as the entire shipment of the pack. The weave of the canvas is somewhat visible with the original gesso - easily fixable with a couple of extra layers of paint. Overall, it’s a wonderful canvas that gives you the power to customize your canvas.

Pros

Can be primed as many times as you desire with the gesso of your choice
Thin enough to be hung on walls or other display surfaces
Squared corners are useful

Cons

Some of the weaves are visible when the canvas is shipped

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 50 sizes | Depth: 3/4" | Acid-free: Yes

Conda Artist Stretched Canvas

The Conda stretched canvas is the canvas to go for if you want the best bang for your buck, and you don’t mind switching surfaces for it. The Conda canvas comes in very close to the cheapest canvases on the market, and yet somehow - it comes triple-primed! The tooth to price ratio of the Conda is nigh on the best on the market. You can also add your own gesso on top.

CONDA Stretched Canvas for Painting, 5x7 inch 10 Pack of...

100% COTTON CANVAS: Cotton Makes the Ideal Art Surface. It...
PINEWOOD STRETCHED BARS: These stretched canvases are...

Experience

If you’re someone who’s just starting out with painting with acrylic paints, you’re best off getting a multi-pack of Conda’s canvases since they’re incredibly low-cost. However, do not take it as a sign of cheapness - it delivers a solid painting experience, and acrylic paints respond very well to it. To adjust the tension, the canvas comes with wooden wedges on the back.

It comes in packs of 10, which may cost less than one single canvas from other options in certain cases. It’s a medium-grained canvas that finds use here. The wooden frame is pure fir or pine and the canvas comes pre-stretched for a great painting experience. The sizes range from 8” x 10” to 16” x 20”, so you have enough flexibility in choosing sizes.

There are more than a few imperfections on the canvas surface, but that’s acceptable given the beginner-friendly nature of the canvas. This canvas is perfect, especially for toddlers and children who are just getting their bearings - it’s smooth enough to work on right out of the pack and is affordable enough to let the kids freely paint to their heart’s content.

Pros

Very affordable compared to other canvases on the market
Relatively thin, can be hung on walls easily
Perfect for children and beginners

Cons

A few inconsistencies and a general looseness of the canvas

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 16 sizes | Depth: 3/4" | Acid-free: Yes

Masterpiece Artist Canvas – Elite

This is the best of the best. At prices for a single canvas which are four times as much as for a pack of ten for most canvases, this canvas comes with no compromises at all. You only get the best painting experience possible. Instead of cotton, you get luxurious Belgian linen. The stretcher bars have no seams, and the corners are astoundingly well-made.

Masterpiece Artist Canvas 35317 Elite 1-1/2" Deep, 16" x...

State-of-the-art construction from kiln dried solid wood
Patented keyable bracing system

Experience

The Elite represents the pinnacle of Masterpiece’s canvases. If you want the best canvas for your work, this is, without a doubt, the canvas you should go in for. There are two variants on offer, suitable for two different kinds of users - one is the Oil-primed canvas and the other is the Acrylic-primed canvas. The Acrylic primed canvas is the one that we considered.

The Acrylic-primed canvas comes with two coatings of size as well as four coatings of gesso primer, which comes in at around 14.4 oz per square inch. Unlike most other canvases, this has a hefty width of around 1.5”, so you can stay assured of the support your canvas will have while painting. The stretcher bar is quite heavy, so make sure your studio has enough space.

The texture of the canvas is wonderful for acrylics, and the linen itself sits just perfectly on top of the wooden structure. It comes off perfectly, and you can easily transfer the painting to another location. It comes in a huge variety of sizes, many of which are similar - so make sure you know the perfect size for your painting before going ahead and getting this canvas.

Pros

Represents the absolute best among canvases on offer today
Corners, linen, gesso, and stretching are all done just right
The best tooth among all canvases considered

Cons

Very pricey and heavy

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 21 sizes | Depth: 1 1/2" | Acid-free: Yes

Creative Mark - Stretched Canvas

Last but not least by any means, the Creative Mark represents the golden mean of the canvases on offer today - it’s a perfect intermediate-level canvas, with just the right mix of features and cost-effectiveness to make it wonderful for painting regularly. The Creative Mark comes with perfectly finished corners and a triple-primed linen surface to boot.

Creative Mark The Edge Deluxe Cotton 2-1/2" Deep Stretched...

Beefy 14oz. Primed Weight: With a raw weight of 8 oz., this...
Hand Stretched and Triple-Acrylic Primed: Our canvas for...

Experience

This particular stretched canvas comes with perfectly folded corners to ensure that you can display this frameless as well as with a frame depending on your choice. These canvases are perfect for oils, water mixable oils, alkyds, acrylics, mixed media works, and frameless artwork presentations. Further, you can have it in either a 1.5” or a 2.5” width.

Without priming, the Creative Mark canvas comes in at around 8 oz, but it goes up to a solid 14 oz once they’re finished priming. It comes triple-primed, but you should probably go in for another layer or two of gesso before having a go at the canvas. The perfectly finished corners make it much easier to paint until the very edge of the canvas, should you want to do so.

The primer itself is something you can talk home about because it’s pretty good compared to what else is available on the market - bar the very best canvases which ship for more than $50 per unit. Thus, you should have no problems painting on this canvas - it makes for a solid value proposition and ticks all the right boxes too. It comes in a variety of size options too.

Pros

Perfectly finished corners, usually only found in the best canvases
Options for choosing the width of the canvas
The primer coating developed by Creative Mark gives more expensive canvases a run for their money

Cons

Some users report inconsistent corners due to shipping problems

Material: Cotton | Primed: Yes | Size Options: 70 sizes | Depth: 3/4" | Acid-free: Yes

Best Canvases For Acrylic Comparison Table

Product	Material	Primed	Size Options	Depth	Acid-free
Blick Premiere Cotton Canvas	Cotton	Yes	31 sizes	1 1/2"	Yes
Arteza Stretched White Canvas	Cotton	Yes	19 sizes	7/8"	Yes
Darice Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	13 sizes	5/8"	Yes
Masterpiece Artist Canvas – Monet Pro	Cotton	Yes	23 sizes	1 1/2"	Yes
Daveliou Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	16 sizes	3/4"	Yes
US Art Supply Black Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	8 sizes	3/4"	Yes
Art Alternatives Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	50 sizes	3/4"	Yes
Conda Artist Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	16 sizes	3/4"	Yes
Masterpiece Artist Canvas – Elite	Cotton	Yes	21 sizes	1 1/2"	Yes
Creative Mark – Stretched Canvas	Cotton	Yes	70 sizes	3/4"	Yes

With this, we wrap up reviews of the top 10 canvases on the market today, for both students and artists alike. They cover a variety of materials, and canvas types, as well as surfaces suitable for a variety of media. However, should you not find these products readily, we have a buyer’s guide incoming which will help you take the call on which canvas is best for you.

Go through it thoroughly in order to sort through the best canvases on the market, and to find out which one suits your particular usage. Without further ado, let’s begin with the buyer’s guide!

Buying Guide For The Best Canvases for Acrylic Painting

If you’re on the lookout for a canvas for your particular needs, you should know which factors come into the picture whilst getting one. Since your canvas goes a long way in making sure your art stands out, you should take care of each and every one of these factors listed below before going in for your next supplies run.

Kind and quality of the fabric

The kind of quality of the fabric used for the canvas should be a top priority when buying an acrylic paint canvas. It should not be hard enough for the paint to stick immediately, but it should eventually dry well enough to last long.

Layers of priming

Following the point above, the layers of priming play a huge role in the kind of canvas you end up getting. As s student or a hobbyist, you probably don’t require more than say a single layer or at maximum, a double layer of primer. If you’re a professional, do look for three or possibly more layers of primer to get the perfect canvas finish.

Quality and type of wood used in the canvas

The woodwork of your canvas has long-term implications for its stability. You should stick to Oakwood for the best results. Make sure the canvas you purchase has some kind of indication or verification as to the quality of the wood with the packaging it comes with.

Presence of finger joints

Finger joints are not at all recommended for any case but are the cheapest of the canvases. Finger joints have a tendency to come off with time. If you’re planning to preserve your canvas over long periods of time, this can potentially mean bad news for the canvas.

The material of the gesso

The gesso is the substance with which the priming process is done. Gesso gives the canvas a shimmery, shiny, satin-like smoothness - but bear in mind that it costs a lot of money as well. As such, you’re better off getting a canvas that has already been primed. Look for acid-free gessos, since they allow your paint to hold much better and for a longer time span.

Even if the canvases come double or triple-primed, make sure to add your own layer of gesso if you can. That way, you can adjust the level of smoothness and tooth the canvas gives while painting.

Price

The price of the canvas shouldn’t be overly cheap (it takes an effort to build a good quality canvas), but make sure you aren’t being duped. Even the higher-quality canvases which come with three primer layers and high-quality wood, with good teeth don’t cost too much per canvas.

Canvas For Acrylic FAQ's

Cotton canvas is a popular choice for acrylic painting due to its affordability and versatility. It is available in a range of weights and textures, and it can be stretched or mounted easily. Linen canvas, on the other hand, is more expensive but considered a higher quality option due to its strength, durability, and resistance to decay. It is also known for its unique surface texture that some artists prefer.

Yes, acrylic paint can be used on a primed canvas. In fact, priming a canvas is recommended for best results. A primer helps to create a smooth surface and improves the adhesion of the paint to the canvas. It also prevents the paint from seeping through the canvas fibers and yellowing over time.

A stretched canvas refers to a canvas that has been stretched and secured onto a wooden frame. This is typically done by stretching the canvas tightly over the frame and then stapling it to the back. Stretched canvases are ready to use and can be painted on directly without the need for additional preparation.

The best size canvas for acrylic painting depends on the artist’s preference and the intended use of the artwork. Small canvases are ideal for detailed work and studies, while larger canvases are better suited for larger compositions and expressive brushwork. Common sizes include 8×10 inches, 11×14 inches, and 16×20 inches.

Yes, it is possible to reuse a painted canvas for a new acrylic painting. However, the old painting must be completely dry and the surface should be lightly sanded or primed to create a fresh surface for the new paint. Some artists prefer to gesso the entire canvas again to create an even base for the new painting.

Conclusion

Thank you for reading our article on the best canvases for acrylic painting! We hope you enjoyed it and found it helpful in selecting the perfect canvas for your painting needs. A quality canvas is crucial for bringing your vision to life, so it's important to invest in one that suits your style and level of expertise.

Out of these 10 best canvases for acrylic, here are the top three expert recommendations:

Blick Premiere Cotton Canvas is an ideal option for those who are looking for a versatile and high-quality canvas at an affordable price. Its triple-primed, smooth surface makes it easy to work with, and the different profile options provide a great display advantage for your artwork.
Arteza Stretched White Canvas is a good option, particularly for students and intermediate hobbyists. Its combination of quality and value makes it a perfect choice for those who are still exploring the world of acrylic painting, as well as those who need to purchase canvases in bulk.
Darice Stretched Canvas is the right choice for artists who want high-quality material and double-primed canvases without venturing into the professional range. It is a great compromise in terms of quality, size, and price, offering a wide variety of options to suit each artist's needs.

As you continue to hone your skills and perfect your craft, remember that the canvas you choose can have a significant impact on your final results. Keep experimenting and discovering what works best for you, and don't be afraid to invest in a new canvas that fits your evolving needs as an artist. Happy painting!

Read More on Acrylic Painting

5 of The Best Paint for Canvas

Painting Surfaces For Acrylics | Acrylic Prepping 101

Painting on Paper with Acrylics & 5 Paper-Like Surfaces

Acrylic Pour Painting [All You Need To Know]

20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

22+ Delicate Beautiful Acrylic Painting Ideas To Try

Learn How to Use Acrylic Paint as Fabric Paint

Learn How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Brilliantly

Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof

Acrylic Paint Thinner 101 | How to Thin Your Acrylic Paints Correctly

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands Compared

8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

13 Best Acrylic Paints for Beginners & Professionals

10 Best Paper for Acrylic Paint

103 Best Acrylic Painting Ideas

Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students

How does the paper make a difference in any painting? Is there a specific type of paper you should be using for the best results with acrylic paint?

When it comes to acrylic artwork, the canvas is the go-to option. There are many options available in the market, each with varying features. Picking the right canvas is the first step in creating a masterpiece.

Without further ado, let’s get to the product reviews.

Best Paper for Acrylic Paint

With so many options available, it can be overwhelming to decide which paper to choose. To make your decision easier, we have compiled a list of the best paper for acrylic paint. From texture to thickness, we have considered all the essential factors to ensure that you get the best results for your artwork. So, without further ado, here’s the list of the 8 best papers for acrylic paint.

1. Art Alternatives Stretched White Canvas - Best for Affordable Multipack

Art Alternatives stretched White Canvas Super Value Pack-11...

Unbleached 4 oz cotton
Primed with acid-free gesso

Taking the second spot on our list is the Art Alternatives Stretched White Canvas. It comes in a multi-pack consisting of seven unbleached 4 oz. cotton canvases. It is ideal for use with oil, acrylic, and alkyd paints. We have reviewed the 11 inches x 14 inches canvas that has a depth of 0.5 inches.

Experience

First of all, we have to mention how affordable this canvas is. If you are a beginner and do not want to spend a lot in your initial painting ventures, this is a perfect choice. We especially liked the careful individual plastic packing of each of the seven canvases in this pack.

The lightweight canvas almost mimics linen, and at a thickness of 0.5 inches, you get the option of displaying it with or without a frame. We like the gallery wrapping of the canvas that allows you to apply paint to the sides. The corners are a perfect square.

We recommend that you do not use very heavy layers of paint on this canvas as it is not hand-stretched and may sag. If you find the canvas to be a little loose, you can spray the back and corners with water and let it dry to make it tight as a drum.

Pros

Suitable for professionals as well as beginners
Multi-pack of seven canvases makes it highly affordable
Unbleached cotton gives the canvas a natural look
Each canvas is individually wrapped to prevent contamination until you need it

Cons

Not as tightly stretched as other hand-stretched canvases

2. US Art Supply Stretched Canvas 4-Pack - Best for Nighttime Landscape Paintings

U.S. Art Supply 18 x 24 inch Black Stretched Canvas 12-Ounce...

Pack of 4 - Professional Artist Quality: 3/4" thickness...
100% Cotton Canvases: Pure cotton canvases with medium...

US Art Supply Stretched Canvas is available in two variants – Black 4-pack and White 6-pack. We have chosen the Black 4-pack and used it extensively to give you a comprehensive and accurate review. US Art Supply offers this canvas in various sizes. In the Black 4-pack, we have reviewed, each canvas measures 8 x 10 inches with ¾ inch depth.

Experience

The US Art Supply Stretched Canvas pack is ideal for use with all kinds of oil and acrylic paints. We liked the hand-stretched canvas that is tight enough for multiple layers of paint. The 0.75-inch profile of these canvases coupled with staple-free edges allows for a convenient frameless display on walls.

We liked the smooth finish of the canvas, thanks to three layers of environment-friendly, acid-free acrylic gesso. The triple-primed canvas ensures that none of your acrylic paint is soaked up. You will appreciate the fact that these canvases are hand-stretched over stretcher bars obtained from environmentally managed forests.

The black finish of these canvases is well-suited for creating night-time landscapes or deep-space scenes. Each canvas weighs about 12 oz after priming and is 100% cotton.

Pros

Black color makes it perfect for painting night-time sceneries
Multi-pack of four canvases provides optimal value for money
It is triple-primed with acid-free acrylic gesso
Each canvas is hand-stretched over kiln-dried stretcher bars

Cons

Canvases are not individually packed and may stick together at times

3. Darice Cotton Stretched Canvas, Pack of 2 - Best for Budget Artists

Darice, Mediu Cotton Stretched, Pack of 2 – 16” x 20”...

STRETCHED CANVAS – Every masterpiece begins on a blank...
VERSATILE – This medium-weight, wood frame canvas is...

Darice offers the Cotton Stretched Canvas in eleven different sizes and ten-pack variants. We have selected the pack of two 18” x 24” canvases and reviewed it. Darice has been providing affordable art and craft supplies for over 60 years and is a renowned brand trusted by artists worldwide.

Experience

We believe that a list of the best canvases for acrylic paints cannot be complete without the Darice Cotton Stretched Canvas. The brand is known for its art and craft supplies, and we were not disappointed. Each medium-weight, acid-free canvas is ideal for use with acrylic paints.

The canvas is double primed so you do not have to worry about high absorption and can start painting as soon as you unpack it. We liked the affordable price tag on this top-notch canvas pack, and we recommend it to artists operating on a tight budget.

The canvas has an ergonomic design and is back-stapled to allow you to paint on the sides as well. In case you find the canvas to be a bit loose for your liking, it comes with stretcher keys that can be used to tighten it.

Pros

Thoughtful inclusion of stretcher keys allows you to re-stretch the canvas
Canvas is available in a wide array of sizes, making it suitable for all kinds of paintings
Double-primed canvas provides a smooth surface with reduced absorbency

Cons

Packaging can be improved to protect the canvases better

4. Masterpiece Artist Canvas 43018 Monet PRO

Masterpiece Artist Canvas 43018 Monet PRO 1-1/2" Deep, 8" x...

This 8 x 10" size is in the 5:4 Aspect Ratio.
Canvas Depth: 1-1/2", Canvas relief: 1/2" (Space between...

Masterpiece Artist Canvas from the Monet Pro Line is available in various size options and styles. We have reviewed the 8” x 10” Cotton 10.5 oz. – 3X – Carmel Portrait Smooth variant. It is made from 100% cotton and has a depth of 1.5 inches.

Experience

We loved the Masterpiece Carmel Portrait Smooth Canvas. It is based on 100% cotton, medium-weight canvas and is sized and double primed with archival quality, acid-free acrylic gesso. You will not have to worry about the paint being absorbed too quickly by the canvas surface.

You will appreciate the versatile use of this canvas – it goes with oils, acrylics, and alkyds. A significant reason for including this canvas in our list was the additional procedure undertaken to make the canvas texture incredibly smooth.

In addition to the usual features that are common in most high-quality canvases, what sets this specific canvas apart is its “Canvas Relief” feature. There is ½ inch space between the stretcher bar and the canvas surface to prevent the possibility of pressing the fabric and touching the bar underneath.

You get the option to re-stretch the canvas, if needed, with the help of pre-installed corner and brace keys.

Pros

Stretcher bar of this canvas is made from sustainably obtained wood
Double primed with archival quality, acid-free acrylic gesso
Stretched up to 50% tighter than other canvases
Comes with pre-installed corner keys and brace keys

Cons

It is relatively expensive, especially for beginners

5. Arteza Stretched White Blank Canvas

ARTEZA Stretched Canvas, 16 x 20 Inches, Pack of 6, Blank...

100% Cotton Art Canvases for Painting: Our canvas boards for...
Painting Canvas in Bulk: This canvas set includes 6...

From the house of Arteza, we bring to you the 11” x 14” Stretched White 100% Cotton Canvas. It can be used by all types of artists – beginners, hobbyists, and professionals – and is ideal for use with oil, acrylic, water, tempera, and gouache paints. It comes in a super value pack of eight canvases, each having a 5/8” profile.

Experience

There are a few features of this canvas pack from Arteza that are worth highlighting. First of all, each canvas has a highly sturdy construction with the fabric being stretched over and stapled onto pinewood stretcher bars.

Secondly, each canvas comes coated with 8 oz of acrylic, acid-free titanium gesso primer. You can start painting your favorite art as soon as you unpack this canvas. We especially liked the thoughtful individual packaging of each canvas in this set. We recommend this canvas pack from Arteza for gifting purposes, owing to its win-win features.

The Arteza Stretched White Canvas comes in a wide array of dimensions, making it convenient for anybody to find the perfect size they need. You will appreciate the 100% money-back guarantee that Arteza offers with this canvas set, which goes to show how much the company values customer satisfaction.

Pros

Each canvas is primed with acid-free, acrylic titanium gesso
Each canvas is individually wrapped to ensure safe storage
Comes with a 100% money-back guarantee, providing consumer satisfaction
Highly affordable; thanks to the super value pack containing eight canvases

Cons

Having only one coat of acrylic gesso primer, this canvas can be improved by adding another layer

6. CONDA Artist Stretched Canvas

CONDA Stretched Canvas for Painting, 5x7 inch 10 Pack of...

100% COTTON CANVAS: Cotton Makes the Ideal Art Surface. It...
PINEWOOD STRETCHED BARS: These stretched canvases are...

CONDA offers the Artist Stretched Canvas in three size variants. We used the 5” x 7” canvas pack that includes six pieces. It is made from 100% unbleached cotton and is acid and oil-free. It is ideal for oil as well as acrylic painting.

Experience

We had an enriching experience using the CONDA Artist Stretched Canvas pack. Each canvas is triple-primed with acrylic gesso to ensure that the color holds on the surface and there is no chance of the paint seeping through to the back of the fabric.

We especially liked the traditional handmade design of the canvas, which is tacked and has wooden wedges to adjust tension. A significant positive of the pack is that each canvas is packed individually so you can safely store canvases not being immediately used.

You will want to buy the CONDA Canvas pack as it offers top-notch quality at an affordable price. The wooden frame of each canvas is made from pure fir wood with the utmost care and craftsmanship to guarantee a sturdy and stretched canvas.

We recommend this canvas pack to anybody who is just starting on their artistic journey, only because of how inexpensive it is.

Pros

Pack of 10 canvases, making it reasonable for beginners
FSC certified
Each canvas is made from 100% unbleached cotton and is acid-free
Includes wooden wedges that allow you to adjust the tension if needed

Cons

The texture on the canvas fabric is a bit rough, and some professionals may not like it

7. The Edge All Media Cotton Canvas

Creative Mark The Edge Deluxe Cotton 1-1/2" Deep Stretched...

Beefy 14oz. Primed Weight: With a raw weight of 8 oz., this...
Hand Stretched and Triple-Acrylic Primed: Our canvas for...

The Edge All Media Cotton Canvas is available in dozens of sizes and two depth variants – 1.5” and 2.5”. We have reviewed the pack of three 24 inches x 36 inches, 1.5-inch deep canvases. Each canvas is perfect for alkyds, oils, acrylics, frameless artwork presentations, and mixed media works.

Experience

This list would be incomplete without the Edge All Media Cotton Canvas offered by Creative Mark. We especially liked the “tuck-n-roll” style of its construction, which leaves the edges staple-free and clean for painting and frameless display.

A particular highlight of this canvas is the unique primer developed and used by Creative Mark which is significantly better than other primers and allows your paintings to preserve their vibrant colors with maximum adhesion.

You will be pleased to know that each of the three canvases in this pack is hand-stretched by skilled craftsmen to ensure that the fabric is not loose. The material is stapled in each corner at the back. The raw canvas weighs 8 oz., and the primed canvas weighs about 14 oz.

We also liked the durable construction of the wooden stretcher bars in this canvas. If you take our word for it, buying this canvas is a no-brainer.

Pros

Better than average durability and texture
Top-notch triple priming of this canvas ensures optimum results with oil and acrylic paints
It is back-splined, stretched, and stapled at each corner for a tight and sturdy finish
Ideal for painting on the edges and displaying without a frame

Cons

It is not one of the most pocket-friendly options

8. Daveliou Stretched Canvas

Daveliou 12”x12” Stretched Canvas for Painting, Triple...

Premium Stretched Canvas — Create unique art with Daveliou...
Durable Non Toxic Materials — The individually wrapped...

The Daveliou Stretched Canvas is available in a pack of five pieces in three sizes – 8 x 10 inches, 11 x 14 inches, and 16 x 20 inches. It is made from 100% pure three-ply/280-gsm cotton. It has a 5/8” profile and is suitable for use with oil and acrylic paints.

Experience

At the final spot on our list of recommendations is the Daveliou Stretched Canvas. We extensively used the 11 inches x 14 inches canvas pack and were convinced to include it in our list. The canvas features staple-free edges and a perfectly firm surface.

We especially liked the top-notch build of this canvas. It is made from pure cotton, which is meticulously stretched and wrapped on a kiln-dried, beveled stretcher bar frame. You will not face any problems with this canvas regarding its tightness.

A significant highlight of this canvas from Florida-based Daveliou is the use of their proprietary gesso primer, which adds just the perfect absorption and tooth to the canvas surface.

You will be pleased to know that this canvas comes with a one-year money-back guarantee, making it a definite customer favorite.

Pros

Relatively reasonable, especially being a five-canvas pack
Each canvas in the package is individually wrapped
Ideal for all types of media
It comes with a one-year money-back guarantee

Cons

Some discrepancies have been reported about products having loose corners

Best Paper For Acrylic Paint Comparison Table

Product	Size	Pack Quantity	Pre-Primed	Suitable for	Acid-Free	Backing Material
Art Alternatives Stretched White Canvas	11 x 14"	7	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood
US Art Supply Stretched Canvas 4-Pack	18 x 24", 12 x 12", 16 x 16", 16 x 20"	4	Yes	Oil, acrylic	Yes	Wood
Darice Cotton Stretched Canvas, Pack of 2	16 x 20", 11 x 14", 12 x 16", 18 x 24"	2	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood
Masterpiece Artist Canvas 43018 Monet PRO	8 x 10"	3	Yes	Oil, acrylic	Yes	Wood
Arteza Stretched White Blank Canvas	16 x 20"	6	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood
CONDA Artist Stretched Canvas	5 x 7", 4 x 4", 6 x 6", 8 x 8", 8 x 10", 11 x 14", 16 x 20", 18 x 24"	6	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood
The Edge All Media Cotton Canvas	4 x 4" - 36 x 36"	3	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood
Daveliou Stretched Canvas	12 x 12"	6	Yes	Acrylic	Yes	Wood

Buying Guide For The Best Paper For Acrylic Paint

We have shortlisted ten of the best canvases from the hundreds available in the market. When it comes to picking one of these ten products that will perfectly meet your requirements, you should consider the following factors:

Primed for Perfection?

When it comes to canvases, it is not rocket science to add a coat of primer. Most of the products we shortlisted come with two or three coatings of acrylic gesso primer, which ought to be sufficient in most cases. To be on the safer side, you should consider applying an additional coat of primer before you paint.

A perfectly primed canvas prevents the absorption of paint and allows you to create your art without unnecessary hassles.

Opt for Bulk Buying

Whether you are a beginner or a professional, it makes sense to buy your canvases in bulk. Having a decent stock of painting materials and canvases is cost-effective in the long run.

Like everything, there is a learning curve when it comes to using canvases. Bulk buying ensures you get used to painting on a specific surface. When buying in bulk, we advise you to go for individually packed canvases to avoid damage and wastage over time.

Absorption and Tooth

Absorption and Tooth are the bread and butter of canvases. Gesso primer coatings help to build up the tooth on the surface of a canvas, which makes it smoother and provides a good texture.

Another essential factor to consider is absorption. You do not want to buy a canvas that soaks up your paint as soon as you apply it, as that can make detailed art nearly impossible to create.

Papers For Acrylic Paints FAQ's

Acrylic paint can be used on a variety of surfaces, but paper with a weight of 300 gsm or more is ideal for acrylic painting. Look for papers that are specifically labeled as suitable for acrylic paint.

Regular paper is not recommended for acrylic painting, as it is not sturdy enough to hold the weight of the paint. The paint may bleed through or the paper may wrinkle and warp.

Watercolor paper can be used for acrylic painting, but it may require more paint and layering to achieve a solid color. Look for watercolor papers with a weight of 300 gsm or more, and avoid papers with a strong texture.

Canvas paper is a good option for acrylic painting, as it mimics the texture of canvas without the added cost. Look for papers with a weight of 300 gsm or more and a surface that is specifically designed for acrylic paint.

Some papers may require priming before painting with acrylics to prevent the paint from soaking into the paper fibers. Check the manufacturer’s instructions for the specific paper you are using.

Conclusion

Thank you for taking the time to read our article on the best papers for acrylic paint, and we hope you found it insightful and helpful. We understand how essential it is to choose the right surface to work on for your masterpiece, and after thoroughly testing various products, we are excited to share our top expert recommendations. Acrylic paintings are vibrant and bring life to any canvas, so finding the perfect match is crucial.

Out of these 8 best papers for acrylic paint, here are the top three expert recommendations:

Art Alternatives Stretched White Canvas is an ideal option for those looking for affordability, especially beginners. The seven canvases included in this pack are perfect for practicing without needing to worry about the cost. The lightweight construction and individually wrapped canvases also add value to the overall experience.
US Art Supply Stretched Canvas 4-Pack is a good option for artists wanting to create nighttime landscapes or deep-space scenes due to their black finish. The hand-stretched canvases provide a tight surface to work on, and the triple-primed acid-free acrylic gesso delivers a smooth finish perfect for acrylic paints.
Darice Cotton Stretched Canvas, Pack of 2 is the right choice for artists on a tight budget who still desire a high-quality canvas. Double-primed and designed to minimize paint absorption, these medium-weight canvases are suitable for a variety of acrylic painting projects.

In revealing our top three recommendations, we factored in the availability of multiple sizes, the ability to re-stretch the canvas, and whether the canvas is pre-primed. Our choices cater to a range of artist preferences, whether you are just beginning your artistic journey or an experienced professional. It's our pleasure to help you find the best product for your needs so you can continue creating beautiful acrylic masterpieces. Happy painting!

Read More on Acrylic Painting

5 of The Best Paint for Canvas

Painting Surfaces For Acrylics | Acrylic Prepping 101

Painting on Paper with Acrylics & 5 Paper-Like Surfaces

Acrylic Pour Painting [All You Need To Know]

20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

22+ Delicate Beautiful Acrylic Painting Ideas To Try

Learn How to Use Acrylic Paint as Fabric Paint

Learn How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Brilliantly

Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof

Acrylic Paint Thinner 101 | How to Thin Your Acrylic Paints Correctly

Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands Compared

8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

Best Canvas for Acrylic Painting | Student & Artist Grade

13 Best Acrylic Paints for Beginners & Professionals

103 Best Acrylic Painting Ideas

Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students

A headband magnifier can be the difference between perfect vision and, as Yossarian would say, seeing two of everything!

Headband magnifiers have a multitude of uses ranging from medical purposes, creating art, machining jewelry, repairing watches, etc.

At its core, it’s a fairly simple apparatus comprising a band to be worn around the head with magnifying lenses attached to the front.

Headband magnifiers may be simple but the fiercely-competitive market is saturated with several great items. Moreover, key industry players have stepped their game up considerably.

With that in mind, we make choosing the best headband magnifiers easier for you by reviewing the best ones of 2023.

Best Headband Magnifiers

From magnification power to lens size, we've considered all the important attributes to give you a comprehensive overview of each product. So, without further ado, here's the list of the 5 best headband magnifiers!

Carson CP-60 MagniVisor Deluxe - Best for Nighttime Work

The latest offering by American company Carson, the CP-60 MagniVisor Deluxe is part of their PRO series and currently retails for 23 dollars on Amazon. Four levels of magnification (1.5x, 2x, 2.5x and 3x) allow you to work on the minutest details with pinpoint precision and the LED light means you don’t need to burn any oil to work through the night.

Carson Pro Series MagniVisor Deluxe Head-Worn LED Lighted...

Ergonomically designed head mounted LED lighted adjustable...
Includes 4 precision cut interchangeable acrylic lenses with...

Experience

The well-made CP-60 makes light work of tasks demanding precision and finesse.

Starting with ergonomics, the CP-60 is comfortable to wear around the head and the presence of an adjustable strap means it can be adjusted to suit the contours of your head. It is slightly front-heavy as the batteries are mounted there but once you get used to it, it’s no bother.

Swapping the lenses is reasonably easy, but the procedure described in the instructions needs to be followed as the lenses are prone to breaking. They provide good magnification with minimal blurring.

The CP-60’s party piece, its LED light with three bulbs, is the icing on the cake. The light is bright but not excessively so, the spread is well-balanced and the light is focused. It makes working in the dark quite easy.

Pros

Well-sorted ergonomics make wearing it easy
Lenses offer good magnification and are well-judged
Bright, focused light makes working at night a breeze

Cons

Lenses are fairly delicate and swapping them is a delicate process
Slightly rough headpiece
Takes some getting used to

Magnification Power: 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x, 3x | Lens Size (inches): 4 | Number of Lenses: 4 | LED Light: Yes | Adjustable Headband: Yes

MagnifyLabs Headband Magnifier - Best for Clarity & Comfort

The simply-named Headband Magnifier by MagnifyLabs is a slightly cheaper option for those looking for a no-frills magnifier. Its party piece is its glass lens plate (compared to the plastic ones of its competitors). It retails for 20 dollars on Amazon.

Headband Magnifier Headset - Magnifying Visor with 4 Real...

Real glass lenses: Visor glasses are shaped, ground, and...
Adjustable head mount: Comfortable and form fitting to all...

Experience

The MagnifyLabs Headband Magnifier is an effective no-frills magnifier, but enhanced abilities come at a price.

The Magnifier has a soft forehead piece which makes wearing it nobody’s business. Weighing in at 6.9 ounces, it is a relatively light piece and is best suited for bright environments. The adjustable visor and headband are a revelation in magnifier convenience.

The presence of a glass lens piece scores a lot of points for the Magnifier. The quality and clarity of a glass piece are unparalleled by any plastic piece. The increase in resolution will undoubtedly be appreciated when reading fine print or working on semiconductors.

While the brilliant ergonomics and crisp graphics tip the scales in its favor, the lack of lighting or adjustable magnification (you get just one 2.5x piece) balances them. Competitors like the CP-60 are providing them at a shade over the price.

Moreover, to get adjustable magnification for the Magnifier, you’ll have to buy lenses separately, driving price up to a whopping 40 dollars!

Pros

Well-sorted ergonomics make working long hours a breeze
No-frills package minimizes complexity and enhances durability
Glass lens piece works wonders for resolution and clarity
Adjustable visor and headband a great feature

Cons

Fixed magnification might be a deal-breaker
Lack of a light means you’ll have to make hay while the sun shines
Competitors offer more features at the same price

Magnification Power: 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x | Lens Size (inches): 1.9 | Number of Lenses: 5 | LED Light: Yes | Adjustable Headband: Yes

MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier - Best for Ergonomics & Flexibility

The MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier is a top-of-the-line product by the American company MagniPros.

It comes with four interchangeable lenses (of 1.8x, 2x, 2.5x, and 3.5x magnification), and an adjustable headband [no adjustable visor, though].

MagniPros LED Illuminated Headband Magnifier Visor | 2...

✔ 5 DISTORTION FREE INTERCHANGEABLE MAGNIFYING LENSES -...
✔ COMFORTABLE AND STYLISH: You can put this head-mount...

Experience

In our experience, the MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier is a strong contender, even in the company of such heavy hitters.

The ergonomics are some of the best we’ve experienced.

The headband portion has a comfort band which makes wearing it infinitely more comfortable compared to the rest of the field. Even though the visor is not really adjustable, the headband is, ensuring that it fits perfectly on your head.

Unlike the MagnifyLabs model, this one comes with four adjustable lenses and their magnification is very well-judged. The lenses are, disappointingly, acrylic, but their quality, clarity, crispness, and resolution are anything but disappointing and on par with glass lenses.

Pros

Brilliant ergonomics and a comfort band make it very easy to wear
Adjustable lenses included for variable magnification
Lenses are very clear despite being acrylic

Cons

Glass lens isn’t missed but would’ve been nice

Magnification Power: 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x | Lens Size (inches): 5.2 | Number of Lenses: 4 | LED Light: Yes | Adjustable Headband: Yes

DoCooler GXG-1987

DoCooler, an American company, make their version of a basic headband magnifier. It comes with an adjustable headband, four interchangeable lenses (of 1.5x, 2x, 2.5x and 3.5x magnification) and retails for 27 dollars on Amazon.

GXG-1987 1.5X 2X 2.5X 3.5X Double Lens Head-Mounted Headband...

Experience

During our time with the DoCooler, we found it to be very similar to the MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier.

That is no bad thing though, as the MagniPros model is an excellent magnifier in its own right and matching it is no mean feat.

However, they are not Siamese twins. Far from it, the GXG has its distinctive characteristics.

The frame is extremely lightweight and the magnifier weighs in at a mere 4.9 ounces. This makes the wearer feel as if he’s wearing nothing on his head at all, which is excellent news for those who find magnifiers too obtrusive.

However, the DoCooler has some flaws. The build quality leaves a lot to be desired and falls far below the bar set by the competition. The front piece does not stay in place and kept falling to my nose. Changing the lens is a hassle and you need a pair of tweezers to do so.

Pros

Lightweight frame
Interchangeable lenses included

Cons

Overpriced
Poor build quality
No included light

Magnification Power: 1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x | Lens Size (inches): 2.9 | Number of Lenses: 5 | LED Light: Yes | Adjustable Headband: Yes

Donegan DA-2 OptiVISOR

Donegan is an American company established in 1952 and specializes in optical equipment.

The Donegan DA-2 OptiVISOR makes it to the bottom of the list; however, there are compelling reasons for this.

Sale

Donegan DA-2 OptiVISOR Headband Magnifier, 1.5X...

Headband binocular visor with snap-in 1.5X magnifying lens...
Ground and polished glass prismatic lens for improved focus...

Experience

The Donegan DA-2 makes it to the bottom of this list for obvious reasons, but it still has a lot to its credit.

The DA-2 has a glass lens, a rarity in an increasingly plastic world. Further, the adjustment range of the headband is the greatest we’ve seen so far and can accommodate heads of all shapes and sizes.

It has a retractable visor, a nifty feature when you want to quickly alternate between viewing through the lens and not.

I’m afraid we must discuss Donegan’s flaws now. You get only one lens (no interchangeable lenses here), although you can choose its strength at the time of purchase. You also don’t get a light for night-time work.

However, the DA-2’s biggest drawback is its price. It is highly overpriced compared to the competition and cannot justify it, except for brand value.

Pros

Highly adjustable headband
Glass lens
Brand value

Cons

Highly overpriced
Lacks a light
No interchangeable lenses

Magnification Power: 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.0x | Lens Size (inches): 3.5 | Number of Lenses: 1 | LED Light: No | Adjustable Headband: Yes

Best Headband Magnifiers Comparison Table

Product	Magnification Power	Lens Size (inches)	Number of Lenses	LED Light	Adjustable Headband
Carson CP-60 MagniVisor Deluxe	1.5x, 2x, 2.5x, 3x	4	4	Yes	Yes
MagnifyLabs Headband Magnifier	1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x	1.9	5	Yes	Yes
MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier	1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x	5.2	4	Yes	Yes
DoCooler GXG-1987	1.0x, 1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.5x	2.9	5	Yes	Yes
Donegan DA-2 OptiVISOR	1.5x, 2.0x, 2.5x, 3.0x	3.5	1	No	Yes

Buying Guide For The Best Headband Magnifiers

Here are some of the things to look out for while choosing the perfect magnifier:

Lens Material

Different magnifiers use different materials for their lenses. Some manufacturers use acrylic and other plastics for their lenses while some use glass.

As a thumb rule, glass lenses are better than plastic lenses as they provide better quality, clarity, sharpness, and resolution.

However, there are exceptions to the rule and during our time, we found a few acrylic lenses whose clarity was on par with their glass counterparts.

Interchangeability of Lenses

Interchangeability of lenses, or lack of it, could be a deal breaker when choosing headband magnifiers.

While most manufacturers offer headband magnifiers with interchangeable lenses, some offer models with fixed lenses. In these models, even if there is a provision for changing lenses, they are usually sold separately and this drives the price up.

Lighting

If you wish to use your headband magnifier for working during the night, opt for one which has an inbuilt light.

Most models do not offer a light which increases the marketability of the ones which do. Having a light is a boon for productive night owls.

Models like the Carson CP-60 are worth serious consideration. Try to look for a magnifier that has LED lights as they offer adequate brightness, a balanced spread, and minimal power consumption.

Comfort

If you’re planning to buy a headband magnifier, chances are you’re going to be wearing it more often than not, which is why comfort is essential.

It is recommended to approach your local vendor and try all these models once to see which fits best.

Not all models are designed equally and their bands’ shape may vary, hence, it is important to pick the one which wraps around the contours of the head most snugly.

Band and Visor Adjustability

While adjustable headbands are the norm, there are bound to be some exceptions to this rule and we’d rather not see you end up with one of them!

An adjustable band is almost a non-negotiable feature these days. After all, how can you expect people to have the same sort of head shape and size?

While adjustable bands are common, adjustable visors are not. It is recommended to buy a magnifier with an adjustable visor as it improves clarity, depth, and convenience.

Price

Lastly, we get to the most important factor; price.

Throughout the course of our reviews, we found tons of value-for-money magnifiers which offered the most for your dollar.

Contrast these to some 30+ dollar items which didn’t even have adjustable headbands!

Headband Magnifiers FAQ's

Headband magnifiers are commonly used for tasks that require close-up work, such as crafting, jewelry-making, and electronics repair. They can also be useful for people with visual impairments who need extra magnification to see clearly.

Yes, most headband magnifiers are adjustable to fit different head sizes. Some models have adjustable straps or a dial that allows you to customize the fit.

Some headband magnifiers are designed to be worn over glasses, while others may not be compatible. Be sure to check the product specifications before purchasing to ensure compatibility with your glasses.

Headband magnifiers can be useful for children who need extra magnification for certain tasks, but it’s important to choose a model that is lightweight and comfortable for them to wear. Adult-sized headband magnifiers may be too large or heavy for a child’s head.

Conclusion

Wow, you made it through! Thank you for reading our detailed analysis of the best headband magnifiers on the market. We hope that this article has been a helpful and exciting journey in finding the perfect tool to enhance your vision and make your life easier during intricate tasks.

Out of these five best headband magnifiers, here are the top three expert recommendations:

For those who often need to work during nighttime and require reliable lighting, the Carson CP-60 MagniVisor Deluxe is an ideal option. Its bright LED light, well-sorted ergonomics, and good magnification make working at night a breeze.

If you prioritize clarity and comfort during your tasks, the MagnifyLabs Headband Magnifier is a good option. With its adjustable headband, glass lens piece, and streamlined design, it offers a no-frills experience with enhanced resolution and durability.

For anyone seeking the right balance between adjustability, ergonomics, and flexibility, the MagniPros Optical Glass Magnifier is the right choice. Though its lenses are acrylic, they provide clear images, and the adjustable headband with a comfort band ensures a perfect fit for your head.

In the end, the choice ultimately depends on your unique preferences, priorities, and budget. We hope our comprehensive review has provided you with the insight and confidence needed to choose the headband magnifier that will meet your specific needs. Now, you can go forth and achieve excellent visual results in your work with ease and comfort. Good luck, and happy magnifying!

Stained glass work is a long-practiced art, having its origins in the seventh century and today, we are going to discuss few of the best soldering iron for stained glass work right now.

The art flourishes to date, but the methods have seen a sea of change, ever since the advent of powered tools. Soldering irons are a tried-and-tested way of making sure your colored glass pieces stay together. Hence, they’re an essential part of any stained glass artist’s toolkit! However, the decision of getting a soldering iron for glass work can become cumbersome and feel heavy - this is where we come in to the picture.

Today, we’ll look at some of the best soldering iron for stained glass work on the market, followed by a small guide to help you decide which soldering iron is best for you.

Let’s start with the reviews!

Best Soldering Iron For Stained Glass

Whether you're a beginner or an experienced stained glass artist, these soldering irons are sure to provide you with the precision and control you need to create beautiful and intricate designs. So, without further ado, here’s the list of the 5 best soldering iron for stained glass.

Hakko FX601 - Best for Precision and Beginners

Sale

Hakko FX601-02 - Soldering Iron with High Heat Capacity

Dial controlled temperature selection
Compatible with T19 tips

The Hakko FX601 is one of the most well-rounded products on the market. It’s one of the lightest soldering irons and is very quick to heat up as well. For most projects, the Hakko FX601 will hold heat long enough for you to finish work, but larger projects may see it cool faster than it should.

Being a 67-watt ceramic element iron, you don’t lose anything compared to a standard 100-watt metal element soldering iron.

Experience

On small to medium-sized projects, the Hakko FX601 is a joy to hold and use. The ceramic iron immediately strikes you as being nearly weightless compared to a regular metal iron. The temperature adjustment is surprisingly precise since usually soldering irons falter in holding the set temperature.

The temperature always stays within 10 degrees above or below your desired value. This makes it ideal for soldering glass without much tinkering with the temperature, once set. Further, the heat recovery capabilities are solid with this iron, which adds to the user experience. This is a major issue, particularly with older irons. The cleaning process recovery time is one of the best in its class.

The highest temperature it can achieve is around 540 degrees Celsius. It ships with a regular-sized tip, which you can replace with any T19 series tip available on the market. For heavy-duty work, this will suffice - but only just. It is the best iron for regular use.

Verdict

This iron can hold its own among the best in its class. The ergonomic nature and ceramic element mean it is a wonder to use and operate, while the flexibility of adjustable temperature adds to its usability. The iron holds temperature well, is fast to heat up, and can tolerate high temperatures. We strongly recommend this to anyone who’s starting out, and as an all-purpose iron for seasoned users.

Pros

Easy to hold for long hours
Solid construction, ceramic element lasts longer
Holds temperature well

Cons

Might not perform at its best in larger projects

Power Source: Corded | Wattage: 65W | Temperature Range: 240°C - 540°C | Tip Temperature Accuracy: ± 1.8°C | Heating Element: Ceramic

Weller W100PG - Best for Reliability and Simplicity

Weller W100PG Weller Farenheit Heavy Duty Soldering Iron...

Safe - the soldering iron uses industry leading Weller...
Temperature - the soldering iron temperature is controlled...

The Weller W100PG is a standard-use iron from Weller. Weller needs to introduction to the field of soldering irons - these have long been used, and even passed on from generation to generation. Generally speaking, Weller products have a shelf life of a decade or even more - and the W100PG is another such machine.

Experience

The heavy-duty W100PG does a solid job of handling pretty much anything you throw at it. It comes equipped with a 100W nichrome heater, whose temperature can be controlled using this soldering.

Various tips, which allow you to go from 600 degrees Fahrenheit to 800 degrees Fahrenheit.

The temperature regulation is such that the solder won’t affect any of the glass, but will act as a perfect connection between your panels.

The Weller W100PG boasts a lightweight (for a metal element) design, which doesn’t come with or require any base station. However, if you’re just starting out, we recommend having one of your own just the same. The parts used are all heavy-duty, and rest assured, will last you ages even under the most heavy use.

One of the major reasons why Waller and all of its products are so popular for soldering glass panels is their simplicity. There is no moving part, a simple heater in the midst, and a set of nominally priced replaceable tips are all the modifications you can make. This is why Weller products have been around since decades before this review and will last for decades hence.

Verdict

A no-frills, no-nonsense soldering iron - the epitome of a simple electrical appliance that does what it says on the label, and does it extremely well. It’s a no-brainer for those who have more experience soldering, but for newer users, we recommend going for irons with adjustable temperatures and faster cooling times.

Pros

Weller has been around for ages, and its products have an air of reliability par none
Simple to use
Lightweight

Cons

New users may have difficulty operating it

Power Source: Corded | Wattage: 100W | Temperature Range: 371°C - 482°C | Tip Temperature Accuracy: ± 1.1°C | Heating Element: Nichrome

Hexacon SI-P250 - Best for Heavy-Duty Projects

Hexacon SI-P250 HD Plug Tip Iron

Extra Heavy Duty Plug-Tip Soldering Iron
Equipped with a 5/8" semi-chisel soldering tip (No. HT499X)

For those who routinely work on large projects, or require industrial-level heating capability, the Hexacon SI-P250 should be on top of your list. This 250W behemoth of a soldering iron usually hasn't been used by stained glass workers, but the trend is slowly catching up. For those working on heavier metals like iron, this iron is a definite recommendation.

Experience

Hexacon might not be known to you as a prominent soldering iron manufacturer if you've traditionally been involved in stained glass work. This is bound to happen, since Hexacon is generally known for its industrial soldering irons, capable of heating up to much higher temperatures than your run-of-the-mill soldering iron.

The Hexacon SI-P250 works as well as expected, with a minimal heat recovery time and a solid feel. The unique hexagon shape is distinctive and using it is quite ergonomic while working. The material choices make the SI-P250 indestructible for all intents and purposes. The ⅝” diameter of the tip and the wedge design makes it useful for any soldering work you can think of.

This soldering is specifically aimed at the most heavy-duty tasks a soldering iron can be realistically expected to do. Hence, for those dealing with medium-to-low-scale stained glass projects, we would recommend going in for the other featured soldering irons. However, for heavy-duty tasks, nothing else comes close.

Verdict

Hexacon is a new addition to soldering irons, specifically with respect to stained glass work. Those looking for the last word in heavy-duty soldering irons need to look no further. The impeccably finished body and the high-quality soldering tip make it a joy to use for as strenuous a task as you can think of.

Pros

Best-in-class construction
Heating times are much ahead of the competition
Soldering thick metals is no big task

Cons

Steep learning curve for first-time users

Power Source: Corded | Wattage: 250W | Temperature Range: 315°C - 482°C | Tip Temperature Accuracy: ± 1.1°C | Heating Element: Stainless Steel

American Beauty 100W Ergo Handle

American Beauty Tools American Beauty 3138-100 Pencil-Style...

Ni-chrome compression wound heating elements are proven to...
Paragon iron-clad lead-free soldering iron tips consistently...

You’d be surprised to be hearing of this name, too. American Beauty is generally associated with workmen and industrial usage, but this uniquely designed soldering iron is hard not to recommend. The L-shaped handle and strongly built tip make this tool a great addition to your stained glass toolbox.

Experience

The American Beauty 100W model is another hardy, easy-to-use soldering iron. What sets it apart from the rest is the wonderfully shaped handle and tip, which makes it easier to reach the hardest of places in your glasswork. The best part is, it doesn’t skimp on any essential features for the sake of this novel design.

It heats up as well as you’d expect a 100W nichrome element soldering iron to, with very little to fault in the overall experience of using it. One obvious caveat is that you’ll definitely need a base station with this because of the shape. Otherwise, there is little to fault in this simple, ergonomic soldering iron.

Their level of customer service and support is also par none. The design allows for swapping out all parts for better ones, should you require it. However, you won’t (and shouldn’t need to, given the cost difference) need one any time soon, since the American Beauty ships with extremely solid parts to boot. Overall, if you like it, go for it.

Verdict

As a general-use soldering iron for your stained glass work, very little comes close. Sure, there is a price to pay - but between the consumer experience, the ergonomic shape, and the powerful heating element, you get your money’s worth. A solid buy in any case.

Pros

Ergonomic design like none other
High quality, modular internal parts which can easily be replaced
Superior customer experience, a rarity in this segment

Cons

You could get a regular 200W iron for nearly the same price

Power Source: Corded | Wattage: 100W | Temperature Range: 260°C - 650°C | Tip Temperature Accuracy: ± 3.3°C | Heating Element: Resistance Wire

American Beauty Heavy Duty 200W

American Beauty 3158-200 Heavy-Duty Soldering Iron, 200...

Ni-chrome compression wound heating elements are proven to...
Paragon iron-clad lead-free soldering iron tips consistently...

American Beauty makes wonderful products, as introduced in the previous review. However, what if you wish to do more heavy-duty work? Sometimes, try as you might, 100 watts of power just can’t cut it. For those looking for a reliable, yet ergonomic 200-watt soldering iron, this one is a solid contender.

Experience

Owners of the American Beauty soldering irons generally tend to leave them on with power throughout the day, with no interruptions. This is a testament to the quality of materials used as well as the build quality. The company has a track record of decades’ worth of solid, trouble-free experiences.

We can attest to the last line very well. In soldering thick metal pieces to glass, the soldering iron broke no sweat and handled it like a piece of cake. This 200W iron is definitely not aimed at small projects or lighter metals, hence you should be clear with your priorities beforehand.

The American Beauty Heavy Duty 200W should be on top of your list if you’re looking for a reliable, easy-to-use, modular soldering iron.

Verdict

With almost nothing to fault, the 200W American Beauty is the go-to heavy-duty user’s choice. Backed by decades of experience, even if not that popular in the stained glass work circles, it’s definitely worth a shot - although pricey for what it is. You’ll thank yourself for having bought it a decade or so from now when it’ll work as well as it does today.

Pros

Heavy-duty heating gives short heat-up times
Solid materials and construction
Indestructible build quality, easy to use

Cons

Pricier than other heavy-duty irons

Power Source: Corded | Wattage: 200W | Temperature Range: 260°C - 871°C | Tip Temperature Accuracy: ± 3.3°C | Heating Element: Resistance Wire

Having wrapped up the product reviews, we now head on to the key factors which will help you make a decision on which soldering iron suits you best for your stained glass work. We can roughly break these factors into two categories, the technical aspects as well as convenience.

Best Soldering Irons For Stained Glass Comparison Table

Product	Power Source	Wattage	Temperature Range	Tip Temperature Accuracy	Heating Element
Hakko FX601	Corded	65W	240°C - 540°C	± 1.8°C	Ceramic
Weller W100PG	Corded	100W	371°C - 482°C	± 1.1°C	Nichrome
Hexacon SI-P250	Corded	250W	315°C - 482°C	± 1.1°C	Stainless Steel
American Beauty 100W Ergo Handle	Corded	100W	260°C - 650°C	± 3.3°C	Resistance Wire
American Beauty Heavy Duty 200W	Corded	200W	260°C - 871°C	± 3.3°C	Resistance Wire

Buying Guide For The Best Soldering Irons For Stained Glass

When it comes to stained glass projects, choosing the right soldering iron is paramount to producing high-quality artwork. To help you make the most informed decision, we have put together this comprehensive guide detailing the factors you should consider when buying a soldering iron for stained glass.

1. Type of Soldering Iron

There are two common types of soldering irons used for stained glass work:

Standard Soldering Irons: These irons feature a consistent power output and offer excellent heat transfer capabilities. They are ideal for beginners and users who need a budget-friendly option.

Temperature-Controlled Soldering Irons: These irons allow you to regulate the temperature, which is particularly beneficial for various types of glass and different techniques. They are recommended for more experienced users.

2. Power and Temperature Range

Power output, expressed in watts, affects the iron's heat generation and temperature stability. Look for a soldering iron with a power rating between 80 and 100 watts. This ensures rapid heating and a temperature range suitable for most stained glass projects.

3. Tip Size and Material

Soldering iron tips come in various sizes and materials, which influence their heat transfer capabilities and durability.

Copper tips offer better heat transfer but require more frequent replacement.

Iron-Plated tips are more durable, with lower heat transfer rates.

Look for a tip size in the range of 1/4" to 3/8" for optimal results with stained glass projects.

4. Ergonomics and Comfort

Select a soldering iron that is easy to grip and maneuver for extended periods. This will help reduce fatigue and ensure precision during soldering.

5. Brand Reputation and Reviews

Choose a soldering iron from a reputable brand with positive reviews, signifying that the model is reliable and long-lasting. Well-known brands in the stained glass industry include Hakko, Weller, and American Beauty.

6. Budget

Determine your budget and compare the features offered by the soldering irons within your price range to find one that meets your needs and preferences.

7. Additional Features

Look for features such as:

A built-in stand or separate stand for safety
Interchangeable tips for increased versatility
Fast heat-up times
LED status indicators for temperature
ESD (electrostatic discharge) safe option if you work with sensitive electronic components

Important Tip: Remember to maintain your soldering iron properly by cleaning and tinning the tip, storing the iron safely when not in use, and using high-quality solder. This will ensure that you achieve clean, precise solder joints and extend the life of your soldering iron.

Technical considerations

Power [Watts]

Strictly in numeric terms, the higher the power, the faster the soldering iron heats up. However, numbers don’t always tell the complete story. Power (in watts) simply tells you how fast it heats up, but not how long the heat is retained and how quickly it is recovered from a relatively less hot state.

Hobby soldering irons come in at around 65 to 100 watts, and regular use is between 100 to 200 watts. Heavy-duty irons are in the 200 to 300 watts range.

Element Material

Generally, only two types of elements are offered in soldering irons, nichrome (also known as metal) and ceramic. The metal element heats up a large metal body, in contrast to the ceramic element, which heats up the area close to the tip. Hence, metal element soldering irons heat up slowly but retain heat for longer as compared to ceramic element soldering irons.

The choice really comes down to which end of the compromise is more important to you. If you work in longer bursts where you expect the iron to keep running, go for the metal element iron. If you are comfortable working in shorter bursts where you require a lesser heating time, the ceramic element iron is better suited for you.

Temperature Controller

A simple heads-up, not every soldering has, or is expected to have a temperature controller. This is similar to a dimmer switch, which controls the voltage in order to give you the desired temperature. However, most units with controllers (except some like the Hakko reviewed above) have wildly varied temperatures at the tip regardless of which temperature you select. Take care of this before going in for a temperature-controlled soldering iron.

Convenience

Modularity and replacement parts

Modularity here refers to how easily the device can be broken apart into smaller parts for more flexibility. Some soldering irons have little-to-none flexibility, wherein even their tips cannot be swapped out. Other soldering irons come with fully modular designs, allowing you to replace the body, the holder, and the tips (which are of various kinds).

If you’re content with your current configuration, there is not much need for a modular design. On the other hand, if you wish to experiment later on or don’t want to run to the hardware store for large projects, you’re best off going for a modular design.

Soldering Iron For Stained Glass FAQ's

Yes, a soldering iron for stained glass can be used on other materials such as metal, wood, and plastics, but it’s important to use the appropriate solder for the material.

The tip size and shape should be chosen based on the project’s requirements. A fine point tip is ideal for detailed work, while a chisel tip is better for larger areas. A variety of tip sizes and shapes can be purchased separately.

Check the temperature control to ensure that the temperature is consistent and accurate. The tip should heat up quickly and maintain a consistent temperature throughout use.

While a regular soldering iron can be used for stained glass, it’s not recommended as it doesn’t have the necessary temperature control and power needed for working with glass.

The ideal wattage for a soldering iron for stained glass varies based on the thickness of the glass you’re working with. Typically, a 80-100 watt iron is sufficient for most projects.

Conclusion

First of all, thank you for taking the time to read through our article! We hope you found it both informative and useful in your quest to find the perfect soldering iron for your stained glass projects. Now that you've been through the experience of each product, it's time to reveal our top three expert recommendations.

Out of these 5 best soldering irons for stained glass, here are the top three expert recommendations:

The Hakko FX601 is an ideal option for both beginners and experienced users alike thanks to its easy handling, lightweight design, and precise temperature control.
For those in search of a no-frills, reliable soldering iron, the Weller W100PG is a good option as it is known for its simplicity, quality, and ease of use.
If you're tackling heavy-duty projects, the Hexacon SI-P250 is the right choice, offering outstanding construction quality, and unparalleled heating capabilities.

By choosing one of these top three soldering irons, we're confident that you'll find a suitable partner for your stained glass projects. Of course, each product has its pros and cons, so you should carefully evaluate your specific needs and requirements before making a final decision.

In the end, your satisfaction with your soldering iron is what matters most. Now that you're well-equipped with this knowledge, we hope that you'll feel more confident making the right choice for your stained glass endeavors. So go ahead and try out these fantastic tools and enjoy the beautiful world of stained glass! Good luck, and happy soldering!

Related Articles

13 Best Soldering Iron Of 2023

The 5 Best Wood Burning Tools & Pyrography Pens

Next to having the best vegetable spiralizer, my goal has always been to get a mandoline slicer. After all, it's one of the most coveted kitchen gadgets — even amateur chefs need one.

You can do many great things with mandoline slicers, like make fruit crisps or potato chips! Making healthy snacks at home has never been this easy before.

To save yourself the headache, today, I will review some of the best mandoline slicers in the market.

What Are the 10 Best Mandolines to Buy?

I've been scouring the internet trying to find the best mandoline, and let me tell you how challenging that was.

Thankfully, my search wasn't for nothing because I found the best mandoline slicers imaginable. I've listed them here, which I hope will help you in your search.

1. Mueller Austria Multi-Blade Adjustable Mandoline Slicer - Best Overall

Sale

Mueller Austria Mandoline Slicer for Kitchen, Adjustable...

Adjustable Slicer – Cuts evenly every time! Slide fruits...
Includes 5× Blades – Blades evenly cut onions, cucumbers,...

What I like

Sharp V-blade options
Stainless steel prongs
Broad range of slice thickness settings
Very easy to store

What I don't like

No comfortable grips or handles

Ranking first on my list is the Mueller Austria multi-blade adjustable mandoline. With over 20,000 reviews on Amazon, you know this product is the one to beat.

The first thing I noticed with this mandoline slicer is how sturdy and well-built the design is. For only less than $40, that's practically a steal!

This best mandoline slicer offers a no-thrill and no-fuss operation, making it perfect for beginner and professional chefs. You can get straight to slicing in the kitchen any time.

I also love how this mandoline comes with five interchangeable blades, all very sharp and come in up to 9mm blade thickness settings.

However, I wish this came with easy grip handles to make my meal prep experience much easier. Nonetheless, the adjustable kickstand fairs well in the kitchen.

Blade/Slicing Options: Slicer blade, wavy blade, shredder, coarse shredder, and grater | Blade Thickness: 1 to 9 millimeters | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Cheese and vegetables | Weight: 2.2 pounds

2. Oneida Mandoline Slicing Set - Best Value for Money

Oneida Mandoline Slicing Set

Sharp, hardened stainless steel easily slices both firm...
5 Settings include thin straight slices, medium, thick, as...

What I like

Foldable legs for easy storage
Dishwasher-safe blade
Easy-to-adjust blade and thickness settings
Sharp stainless steel V-blade style

What I don't like

Does not come with replacement blades

If you're looking for a mandoline you can grab and go in the store, you can't go wrong with grabbing this stainless steel slicer.

It has everything you'd want in a mandoline without the hassle of changing the blades.

The body has a built-in blade changer knob that lets you switch between three thickness settings. I love this feature because I can get my vegetables into julienne cuts without switching to a julienne blade myself.

Once I finish using the slicer, I can pop it straight into the dishwasher and leave it to wash. Although it would also be best to hand wash the blades to remove any hardened particles.

I wish this slicer came with replaceable blades in case my blades start to dull or rust. But other than that, this slicer works perfectly.

Blade/Slicing Options: Julienne and slicer blade | Blade Thickness: Thin, medium, and thick | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits, cheese, and vegetables | Weight: 1.04 pounds

3. Kyocera Mandoline Slicer - Best Budget Pick

Kyocera Advanced Ceramic Adjustable Mandoline Vegetable...

Precision and Elegance in Every Slice: The art of culinary...
Unmatched Cutting Performance: Our veggie cutter features...

What I like

Durable and sharp ceramic blade
Stationary blade
Built-in safety features
Adjustable dial for different thickness settings

What I don't like

Tendencies to slip and feel unstable

Believe it or not, you can already have one of the best mandoline slicers for only less than $25.

One of the things that attracted me to this particular slicer is its ceramic blade. It can easily compete against any chef's knife because it is sharp!

The great thing about ceramic blades is that they're long-lasting and stay sharp longer than stainless steel ones. You won't have to worry about it rusting over time either.

I also love the design of this slicer because it can easily fit on top of a storage container. You can shred your vegetables and have the convenience of a food holder at the bottom.

If there's one design improvement I'd want for this mandoline slicer, it's probably the safety guard. In general, it does its job well, but the body sometimes tends to slip.

Blade/Slicing Options: Slicing and julienne blades | Blade Thickness: 0.5 to 3 millimeters | Blade Material: Ceramic | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 0.24 pounds

4. DASH Safe Slice Mandoline - Best All-In-One Slicer

Sale

DASH Safe Slice® Mandoline Slicer, Julienne + Dicer for...

SAFER: The unique design prevents your hands from ever going...
VERSATILE: With 30 plus slicing options, the mandoline cuts...

What I like

Reliable built-in safety features
Versatile slicing options
Compact and portable
Comes with a recipe guide

What I don't like

Harder to clean because it's not dishwasher-safe

The DASH safe slice mandoline is an all-in-one product that can get you slicing from start to finish. The package comes complete with everything you need.

Right out of the box, I love how this stainless steel mandoline slicer already comes with a ton of accessories:

Chute
Fruit and vegetable pusher
Food holder
Cleaning brush

I don't have to think about buying all these separate accessories and spending more than I originally intended!

Despite its many accessories, setting up this mandoline slicer hardly takes long. The design is intuitive — even beginners can figure out how to set this up.

You also get 30 slicing options between just two blades.

My only challenge with this mandoline slicer is how hard it is to clean. There are a lot of separate components I need to hand wash, which can take quite some time.

Blade/Slicing Options: dicing, matchstick, and julienne cuts | Blade Thickness: 1 to 8 millimeters | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 1.4 pounds

5. Fullstar Mandoline Slicer - Best Mandoline Slicer for Multiple Uses

Fullstar Mandoline Slicer for Kitchen - Vegetable Chopper,...

Best functionality on the market - everything you need in...
Easy Meal Prep with Rust-Resistant Blades - Our vegetable...

What I like

All-in-one kitchen gadget
Sharp V-shaped blades
Comes with a ton of accessories
Dishwasher-safe parts

What I don't like

Heavy compared to other mandoline slicers

The Fullstar mandoline slicer isn't necessarily the cheapest, retailing at nearly $50 in the market. However, the price is worth considering the awesome features and accessories you get.

You aren't just getting a mandoline slicer because this product can also chop and spiralize fruits and vegetables. You can say goodbye to your other kitchen gadgets!

The product comes with 11 different inserts and blades for different cooking styles. It also comes with a food holder to ensure you get all your slices in one go and without a mess.

I got the chance to explore the safety features of this mandoline, and I think they're pretty sufficient. The finger guard and the protective gloves ensured my hands were always safe.

One thing I noticed about this handheld slicer is it feels weighty compared to other handheld models. But thankfully, this won't affect your performance in the kitchen.

Blade/Slicing Options: Slicing | Blade Thickness: Thin, medium, and thick | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits, cheese, and vegetables | Weight: 3.31 pounds

6. Prepworks by Progressive Adjust-A-Slice Mandoline - Best Mandoline Slicer for Limited Storage

PrepSolutions Adjust-A-Slice Mandoline Slicer, Green –...

Contains (1) PrepSolutions Adjust-A-Slice Mandoline in Green...
Adjustable Slicing Thickness: Easily customize your slices...

What I like

Straightforward and easy to use
Wide slicing surface
Perfect even slices
Dishwasher-safe

What I don't like

Doesn't come with a replaceable blade or accessories

You can't find a mandoline slicer as compact as this one, especially for its price point. It looks like the average cheese grater you can stow away inside your cabinet.

To be honest, this mandoline slicer doesn't look anything spectacular. It sports a plastic body and features a stainless steel long sharp blade.

It pretty much does what you expect it to, without the hassle. The slicer comes with a vegetable pusher, so you don't have to worry about handling the vegetable yourself.

Thanks to this simple feature, you don't have to risk cutting your fingers! This slicer is generally best for beginners who only need it for simple tasks.

Unfortunately, don't expect this mandoline to come with extra blades. It only has one straight blade for all the work you need to do. But for its price, it's already a winner.

7. Swissmar Borner V-Slicer Plus Mandoline - Best Standing Mandoline

Sale

Börner V3 TrendLine Mandoline Starter Set (6 pcs.) •...

V3 - BEST ALLROUNDER MANDOLINE - The Börner V3 TrendLine...
ESSENTIAL MULTIBOX INCLUDED - The supplied Multibox is a...

What I like

Sharp V-blade
Made of tough and durable stainless steel
Comes in a complete set
Easy to clean and dishwasher safe

What I don't like

A bit tricky to handle

This handheld mandoline has a lot of potential to be your best friend every meal prep. Its V-shaped blades are sharp enough to cut even the hardest vegetables in one pass.

Not just that, but the set comes with additional blades for different cutting styles. You can always get the right thickness in every style.

Despite being a V-style blade, I hardly felt intimidated handling this mandoline, thanks to the food safety holder. It's comfortable on the hand and doesn't slip while I'm slicing.

One of my favorite parts of this mandoline slicer is its storage caddie. It's large enough to hold a ton of vegetables which I can enjoy eating as a salad later on.

Fair warning, getting used to this mandoline slicer is a bit tricky. But once you've gotten through this dilemma, you're all set.

Blade/Slicing Options: Slice, shred, julienne blades | Blade Thickness: 3.5 to 7 millimeters | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 1.4 pounds

8. OXO Good Grips V-Blade Mandoline Slicer - Best Mandoline Slicer for Beginners

Sale

OXO Good Grips V-Blade Mandoline Slicer, White (1155700)

Sharp, V-shaped blade of hardened stainless steel easily...
Straight and wavy blades for straight or crinkle cuts, and...

What I like

Soft rubber grip handle
Multiple thickness selector
Easy-to-grip food holder
Comes with four different blades

What I don't like

Material construction could be improved

OXO has some of the best kitchen gadgets, so I'm happy to share that their mandoline slicer is no exception. Straight out of the box, I can already tell that the Good Grips V-blade mandoline slicer is a no-frills-and-fuss product.

You can take it out of the box and start slicing away without installation or set-up procedures.

There are four different thickness settings to choose from. Rest assured, each of them can give an even cut each time, so they also cook evenly.

I love using straight and wavy blades when making fun-shaped vegetables. It's a sneaky way of getting kids to eat their vegetables.

However, I wish the brand would consider a more durable plastic material for its body. It feels a little cheap but in no way affects the performance of this mandoline.

Blade/Slicing Options: Straight slice, french fry, crinkle cut, and julienne | Blade Thickness: 1.5, 3, 4.5, and 6 millimeters | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 1.7 pounds

9. OXO Steel Chef's Mandoline Slicer 2.0 - Best High-End Mandoline

Sale

OXO SteeL Chef's Mandoline Slicer 2.0

Makes straight, crinkle cut and waffle cut slices in a wide...
Makes thin julienne strips and French fries

What I like

Elegant and sleek design
Impressive precision control
Soft non-slip grips
Sharp straight blade

What I don't like

Very expensive

True to its name, the OXO Steel Chef's mandoline slicer 2.0 is perfect for aspiring or professional chefs out there.

This professional-quality mandoline provides a wide range of functions imaginable. The straight blade works perfectly in cutting even the toughest vegetables out there.

The serrated blade works well with soft vegetables, ensuring you get thin slices without crushing them.

Unlike similarly priced mandolines, I love how this one doesn't take up too much storage space inside a kitchen cabinet.

The only reason which would stop you from buying Chef's mandoline slicer 2.0 is its price tag. It costs nearly $115, which is way more than what other slicers cost.

Blade/Slicing Options: Straight slice, crinkle cut, waffle cut, julienne strips | Blade Thickness: 0.5 mm intervals | Blade Material: Alloy steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 3.78 pounds

10. Benriner Mandoline Slicer - Best Japanese Mandoline

Benriner Mandoline Slicer, with 4 Japanese Stainless Steel...

Benriner's Mandoline Slicer quickly and easily slices fruits...
Made from handcrafted Japanese stainless steel blades and...

What I like

Comes with multiple blades
Made using BPA-free plastic
Very easy to use
Reliable hand guard

What I don't like

Cutting surface is not large enough

Japanese mandolines feature everything I'd want for a slicer: compact, lightweight, and easy to use. It isn't anything fancy and does the job with relative ease.

This mandoline may look plain and simple, but its performance exceeds what I paid for. It comes in different sharp blades that can slice and julienne anytime!

All that's left for you to do is choose your favorite blade style and start slicing. The hand guard on the body is pretty wide, perfect for people with relatively large hands.

I also enjoyed how this mandoline can hook on bowls so that it doesn't slip and slide all over my kitchen counter!

However, I wish the cutting surface was large enough — especially for large vegetables. I had to cut my squash into long pieces to slice them properly.

Blade/Slicing Options: Straight edge, coarse, medium, and fine tooth blades | Blade Thickness: Straight, fine, medium, coarse | Blade Material: Stainless steel | Food Recommendations: Fruits and vegetables | Weight: 3.78 pounds

Quick Comparisons Of Top Fruit-Veggie Slicing Experience

Mandolines	Blade/Slicing Options	Blade Thickness	Blade Material	Food Recommendations	Weight
Mueller Austria Multi-Blade Adjustable Mandoline Slicer	Slicer blade, wavy blade, shredder, coarse shredder, and grater.	1 to 9 millimeters	Stainless steel	Cheese and vegetables	2.2 lb.
Oneida Mandoline Slicing Set	Julienne and slicer blade	Thin, medium, and thick	Stainless steel	Fruits, cheese, and vegetables	1.04 lb.
Kyocera Mandoline Slicer	Slicing and julienne blades	0.5 to 3 millimeters	Ceramic	Fruits and vegetables	0.24 lb.
DASH Safe Slice Mandoline	dicing, matchstick, and julienne cuts	1 to 8 millimeters	Stainless steel	Fruits and vegetables	1.4 lb.
Fullstar Mandoline Slicer	Slicing	Thin, medium, and thick	Stainless steel	Fruits, cheese, and vegetables	3.31 lb.
Prepworks by Progressive Adjust-A-Slice Mandoline	Slicing	Thin, medium, and thick	Stainless steel	Fruits, cheese, and vegetables	0.01 lb.
Swissmar Borner V-Slicer Plus Mandoline	Slice, shred, julienne blades	3.5 to 7 millimeters	Stainless steel	Fruits and vegetables	1.4 lb.
OXO Good Grips V-Blade Mandoline Slicer	Straight slice, french fry, crinkle cut, and julienne	1.5, 3, 4.5, and 6 millimeters	Stainless steel	Fruits and vegetables	1.7 lb.
OXO Steel Chef's Mandoline Slicer 2.0	Straight slice, crinkle cut, waffle cut, julienne strips	0.5 mm intervals	Alloy steel	Fruits and vegetables	3.78 lb.
Benriner Mandoline Slicer	Straight edge, coarse, medium, and fine tooth blades	Straight, fine, medium, coarse	Stainless steel	Fruits and vegetables	3.78 lb.

Factors to Consider When Buying the Best Mandolines

Choosing the best mandoline slicers is a challenging task. With its different styles and types, narrowing your search can take forever.

To ensure you find only the best mandoline that will fit your needs, below are a few essential factors in mind:

Hand Protector

A great way to keep your hands and fingers protected whenever you're using your mandoline slicer is to have one with a built-in hand guard.

This ensures your hands are safe from the sharp blades and free from any accidents.

You can also use cut-resistant gloves for extra measure, although they may not be comfortable to handle.

Handles and Grips

If you want to hold your mandoline slicer properly, ensure your product comes with handles or grips.

The handles will help you keep the slicer in place, perfect for long hours in the kitchen for meal prep. The grips should also be reliable, so they don't slip when slicing.

In general, most mandoline slicers come with this feature. It's just a matter of finding what provides the best comfort in terms of its size.

Thickness Indicator

Having a thickness indicator is everything you'd want in a mandoline slicer. You can choose the desired thickness settings, depending on the dish you're making.

I enjoy how a mandoline can make thin slices. They are so thin they make perfect potato chips to fry! At the same time, I can also make even thick cuts whenever I want.

If you want this flexibility, always look for a thickness indicator in your mandoline slicer. Your job in the kitchen will be a lot easier.

Handheld vs Kickstand

There's a variety of mandolines out there, some of which are handheld or come with a kickstand.

A handheld mandoline is perfect for preparing small food batches. As long as it's comfortable to hold, it shouldn't cause you any hand strains.

On the other hand, a kickstand frees both your hands. Instead of gripping the handle, you can lay it on the table so your dominant hand can start slicing.

Safety

It's no secret that mandoline slicers have extremely sharp blades. If you're not careful, you can accidentally nip yourself in the kitchen.

Keep your eyes peeled for mandoline slicers with built-in safety features.

It doesn't always have to be anything fancy. Sometimes, a good hand guard and sturdy grip are enough to protect your fingers. Using cut-resistant gloves can also help.

Size

Mandoline slicers come in different sizes. If you have limited counter space, I highly recommend choosing a small, compact slicer you can easily stow inside your kitchen cabinet.

If you have extra room, going for a bigger mandoline would be best. You can leave it on top of your counter without it looking too cluttered.

Regardless of the size you choose, make sure it comes with a sharp blade to keep it effective at its job.

Accessories

Finding a product with free accessories is a sure winner if you want value for money. I'm always delighted by this idea because it feels like having more products for the price of one.

Some accessories that are great to have are:

1. Interchangeable Blades

Choosing a mandoline slicer with interchangeable blades gives you product versatility. You can choose from different thickness settings and types of blades.

Some of my favorite blade attachments to use include the following:

Straight blade
Julienne blade
Serrated blade
Wavy slicer
Waffle cuts

2. Protective Glove or Hand Guard

Save yourself a trip to your local hardware if your mandoline slicer has a free glove or hand guard.

I always appreciate an extra pair of gloves from my manufacturer because it shows their care and concern for their customers.

Price

No matter how much money you're willing to spend, there's always a mandoline slicer for your budget. You don't have to sacrifice budget or quality to find the best product!

Just set a budget for yourself before buying a mandoline slicer. This helps narrow your search and find the best mandoline slicer for you.

How Did I Test Mandoline Slicers?

Before arriving at this list, I had to ensure I tested all the products I mentioned. In doing that, I based my decision on the following key indicators: durability, power, and ease of use.

Durability

Regardless of how much I'm willing to spend, I always ensure the product I choose is made of durable materials. This ensures I get much use for my equipment without wasting money!

I always check what materials the mandoline is made of — particularly the blade and the body.

I also have a feel of the mandoline and if it's sturdy on the hand. After all, I don't want it sliding or wiggling as much as possible as I do my meal prep.

Ease of Use

Let me tell you now that testing different mandoline slicers caused me serious hand strains. But there are a few products out there that make slicing a breeze.

I'm thankful for these products because using them feels like a breeze. Less hand strain means more fruits and vegetables to snack on!

You don't have to sacrifice comfort to find the best and most effective mandoline slicer.

Power

Your mandoline slicer will be for nothing if it can't cut vegetables the way you want. Whether you're slicing hard or soft foods, it should be able to cut well.

I tested the mandolines in this list by checking how powerful and effective they are at making slices. I also made sure its thickness settings stand true.

You can say goodbye to your cutting board once you've landed a powerful mandoline slicer worth your time.

What Are the Different Types of Mandolines?

Finding the right type of mandoline affects how effectively you use this kitchen gadget. It can help you evenly slice your fruits and vegetables, perfect for serving your family.

Let's learn the different mandoline types and why they may or may not be for you:

1. French Mandoline

If you want to roll with the professional chefs, you need to get your hands on a french mandoline. It's a great mandoline for beginners to learn how to use this nifty kitchen gadget.

French mandolines are a crowd favorite because of the outstanding precision it delivers. You can set your desired thickness settings with relative ease!

However, setting up a french mandoline can be tricky, especially for a first-timer. It can also be a little pricey, so budget savers stay clear of them.

2. V-Shaped Mandoline Slicer

As its name suggests, this type of mandoline slicer has a V-shaped blade. It isn't anything spectacular, but it can cut with great precision.

This blade type is an awesome deal for cooks who want a mandoline they can grab and go. It gets the job done with relative ease and in the least amount of time.

My only problem with V-shaped mandolines is there's no option for interchangeable blades. Nonetheless, you can still choose your desired thickness settings.

3. Japanese Mandoline

Based on my experience, working with Japanese mandolines is a lot easier and more convenient than with other mandoline types. The blade sits diagonally, so you can easily glide your vegetables.

It's also compact, lightweight, and accurate, making it perfect for beginners and professionals alike.

Unfortunately, I won't recommend a Japanese mandoline for people with big hands. Its small body and blade style size may feel limiting.

FAQs Related To Mandolines

Before I leave with my parting words, allow me to answer some of the FAQs I get about mandolines. Keep reading because this might convince you to buy one now!

You can buy a mandoline slicer regardless of how much you’re willing to spend, and that’s the beauty of it!

Choosing a budget mandoline slicer won’t be a problem because there are many options out there that don’t sacrifice quality for the price.

Whether you’re a pro in the kitchen or not, you can never go wrong with having a mandoline slicer in your kitchen cabinet. It has a lot of uses that can shorten the whole cooking process!

You don’t have to worry about tiring yourself to have perfectly uniform slices. Say goodbye to your cutting board and switch to a mandoline instead.

A Recap of the Top Picks

I've listed many products, all reliable and effective in the kitchen. You won't regret choosing any of them.

But three of all the mandoline slicers I've named in this list stood out and deserve one final praise:

Best Budget Pick: Kyocera Mandoline Slicer

A ceramic mandoline slicer for less than $25? That's practically a steal! You can enjoy many years with this slicer without worrying about it breaking on you.

You can thinly slice tomatoes and sweet potatoes to top your favorite dishes. If you want the best budget mandoline slicer, you need to get your hands on this one.

Best Value for Money: Oneida Mandoline Slicing Set

This mandoline slicer is hard to beat when it comes to value for money. It's a straightforward kitchen gadget that does pretty much everything you need it to.

It may not give you the versatility you'd expect from slicers with different blades, but it still is one of the best you can get for its price.

Best Overall: Mueller Austria Multi-Blade Adjustable Mandoline Slicer

The Muller Austria mandoline slicer is one of the best to come by that doesn't compromise quality for its price.

For less than $40, this mandoline has five different blades to suit your needs. Making french fries and fruit crisps has never been this easy.

Conclusion

If you've ever dreamed of cooking potato chips at home, now is your time. You can wow your friends with amazing cooking without learning fancy knife skills.

All you need is the best mandoline slicer in hand to test your awesome cooking skills. Pair it with the best molcajete, and start cooking.

A meat slicer is one of the best ways to get perfectly sliced meats and other food. However, working with this type of machine requires time and practice to get it right.

Before you can work with the best meat slicer, it's important to know how to operate the machine.

Here's a helpful guide on properly maintaining and using a meat slicer.

How to Use Meat Slicer Properly - The Slicing Process

Operating meat slicers doesn't have to be difficult, especially if you know the basics.

We've arranged this quick guide full of tips and tricks to help you get slicing like a pro in no time.

Here's how you can use a meat slicer safely and properly.

Step 1. Prepare Your Equipment

Before working with any food slicer, preparing your equipment is paramount. It will help you operate the meat slicer safely and effectively.

Read any user manuals and safety reminders before activating your machine. While meat slicers have their similarities, different manuals can help you understand the individual features of your machine.

You should also ensure that your machine's safety features are functioning correctly to prevent accidents while working.

Wear cut-resistant gloves from the start of the preparation process until you're done working with a food slicer.

Also, prepare the food you'll be working with. Cut any large chunks of meat into manageable pieces and ensure no bones can damage your blades.

Step 2. Place Your Food in the Meat Slicer

Once you've got everything set, lift the weighted pusher arm and place your food onto the food carriage.

Close the handle and make sure that it's firmly held in place. It will keep the food mounted securely while working your sharp blade through it.

It's best to have a flat surface where your meat slices can fall on while slicing them.

Tip

Add wax paper onto the flat surface that will catch your meat to keep the slices in perfect shape.

When working with round meats, like roast beef, it can be difficult for the meat slicer to work with your food. It can take a few slices before you can get uniform slices.

Step 3. Adjust the Machine to Your Desired Thickness

Before working through your meat, adjusting how thick your cuts will be is crucial. You can adjust this by turning the index knob.

You can quickly run your blade through the slab of meat for a sample slice and adjust it according to your preference.

It can be a trial-and-error process if you're unsure how your index knob should be positioned. You'll be able to get the hang of it once you've gotten some practice with your machine.

This step is essential to ensure that your meat slicer is stable and can safely cut through the meat.

Step 4. Turn the Meat Slicer On

Note

For manual meat slicers, you can skip this step.

Now that everything is prepared, you can turn your meat slicer on. Plug it into your power source and switch on the power button.

As soon as you do this, the blades should start turning. Be careful to prevent accidents.

If you're still new to using a meat slicer, you can switch to manual mode before plugging it in. Switch to automatic mode when you're ready.

Step 5. Make Swift Slicing Motions

Once your machine is on, you can start slicing your food. This step is usually more manageable with a manual slicer since you have more control over how you slice.

Push the sliding tray forward as you work through your food. Don't use your hands to touch the food to prevent accidents with the blade, even when wearing cut-resistant gloves.

For manual slicers, ring down the blade onto your food and let it cut through before bringing it back up.

Start slow if needed, especially if you're still getting used to the process. Over time, you can make swifter motions as you slice your food.

Once you feel more confident, let your free hand shift to where the sliced meat will fall to catch them and ensure that your slices are intact.

You might have to readjust the thickness of your slices in between. Be sure to turn the machine off to avoid accidentally cutting yourself while adjusting.

Step 6. Turn Off Your Meat Slicer

Once you're done, turn your machine off and remove the remaining food from the food carriage.

Close your gauge plate and dial your index knob to zero so the blade presses against the machine.

Turning your machine off immediately after use is important, especially if you have children nearby. It prevents your machine from accidentally turning back on in case your table or counter is bumped.

Step 7. Clean and Sanitize Your Meat Slicer

Once you're done using the machine, it's important to clean and sanitize it to eliminate any food particles and cooking oil on the equipment.

Note that there is a difference between cleaning and sanitizing. While cleaning entails wiping down every crevice, sanitizing is a more thorough process following the FDA's food safety guidelines.

For businesses, it's recommended to clean and sanitize every 4 hours. It ensures that all food served is clean and safe for consumption.

You can clean and sanitize it after use if you use it at home and only briefly. However, if you use it any longer, it's best to follow the every 4-hour rule.

Place your meat slicer blade cover on AFTER cleaning, especially for home kitchens. Putting it on before you clean it can transfer food particles onto the cover and breed different bacteria over time.

What's a Meat Slicer?

A meat slicer, also known as a deli meat slicer or food slicer, is a machine that allows you to slice foods efficiently and uniformly.

Based on the name, you would think that only meat can be sliced on this machine. However, it's one of the most versatile machines in the kitchen, working with many different types of food.

This machine can slice anything typically sliced with a mandolin or knife, like cheeses, fruits, and vegetables.

The best part about a meat slicer is that you can get paper-thin slices whenever done properly.

Different Types of Meat Slicers

Despite having the same objective, meat slicers come in different types. It mostly depends on what they're going to be used for.

Meat slicers can be classified into three types:

Light-Duty -These are low-volume equipment best used for meat and vegetables across short periods. These are not designed for frozen foods.
Medium-Duty -These are more robust pieces of equipment than light-duty ones. It can let you slice meat and vegetables for several hours a day. These can also cut up cheeses for up to 30 minutes or as advised by its user manual.
Heavy-Duty - These are top-of-the-line equipment used by large restaurants and butcher shops. They are used for extended periods. They have the best motors, making them more expensive than the typical commercial meat slicer.

Tip

While some heavy-duty meat slicers can be used to slice frozen meat, it's best to let them thaw out first to prevent heavy damage to the machine.

When choosing your meat slicer, it's best to consider what you will work with and your budget for this type of machine.

What Can I Use a Meat Slicer For?

Despite its name, a meat slicer can produce more than sliced meat. It's one of the MOST VERSATILE tools you can have in your kitchen.

You can make the most of its functions and use this machine in various ways.

Slicing Lunch and Deli Meats

Why go for processed store-bought meat when you can slice your own meat at home?

A deli meat slicer at home can let you buy whole meats in groceries and cut them to your desired thickness.

Whether making a sandwich or having cold-cut meat for your charcuterie board, this machine can help you work all that at home.

Slicing Cheese

Besides meat, you can also use this machine to slice cheese. It can undoubtedly round out your charcuterie board by accompanying your sliced meat.

A deli slicer is more efficient at cutting cheeses than any other cheese slicer on the market.

Slicing Bread

Using this machine, you can also slice bread much faster using a serrated blade.

This machine is guaranteed to give you evenly sliced loaves instead of having to estimate every time.

Slicing Fruits and Vegetables

You can also slice fruits and vegetables using a meat slicer.

If you want thinly sliced fruits and vegetables for sandwiches and other meals, having a food slicer can be helpful for you.

Slicing Raw Meat

You can use a meat slicer to work with raw meats, like in deli shops.

Be sure to disinfect your meat slicer afterward to prevent diseases and cross-contamination.

Slicing Meat for Hot Pots

Hot pot meats require the slices of meat to be paper thin so it can easily cook in the broth.

When you use a meat slicer, it's easier to get the pieces perfect for a hot pot.

Slicing Roast Beef

One of the most common ways to use meat slicers is to have them slice roast beef. These are common for restaurants but can also be done at home.

You'll be guaranteed even slices of roast beef every time compared to using a knife.

How Can I Keep My Meat Slicer Sharp?

The best way to get the best thin slices of meat and other food is to keep your blades sharp and ready for action.

Here's a step-by-step guide to keeping your meat slicer blade sharp and ready for slicing.

Step 1. Turn Off Your Machine and Prepare the Blades

Before sharpening your blades, it's important to prepare them.

Ensure that your machine is turned off and unplugged before preparing it. Let it cool down before sharpening the blades if you've used them beforehand.

Then, open the cover of your blades and wipe it with a dishcloth and detergent water. It should help remove any particles from your last slicing session.

Rinse and dry your blades to remove soap and water interfering with the sharpening process.

Step 2. Turn On the Slicer and Grind

Once your blades are clean and ready for sharpening, apply lubricating or cooking oil.

Then, adjust your blades, so it's touching the sharpening stone. You can check your device's manual for special instructions, especially for this part.

Tip

If you're using a whetstone for sharpening, ensure that it's close to the ends of your blade for the best results.

Turn your machine on and let the blade grind against the stone. Let it run for a few minutes to sharpen your blade.

Step 3. Turn Off the Slicer and Clean the Blades

Turn your device off and check if the blades are sharp enough. If not, repeat the grinding process until you're satisfied with your blade's sharpness.

If you're done with grinding, turn your device off and unplug it to prevent accidentally turning it on while cleaning your machine.

Once again, wipe off any excess dust and metal particles using warm detergent water.

Rinse and apply sanitizer or alcohol to thoroughly eliminate any harmful substances which can contaminate your food next time you use the slicer.

We also recommend sanitizing the rest of your machine in case any dust or residue gets stuck on them.

Step 4. Put Everything Back Together and Store Machine Properly

Once everything is dry, you can put everything back together. All parts should be secure before storing them, especially the blades.

Ensure your machine is dry before putting it away to prevent rust.

Keep it in a secure and dry place to avoid accidents, especially if you have kids around. It will also keep your machine in top shape for the next time you have to use it.

Electric Meat Slicers Vs Manual Meat Slicers

Meat slicers can be classified into two based on how they're operated.

Electric meat slicers automatically cut through food by using an electric power source. Most commercial meat slicers fall under this category.

It's best to use an electric meat slicer if:

You want to cut meat faster
You're working with large amounts of meat (e.g., restaurants, bakeries, etc.)
You don't mind spending more on your meat slicer

On the other hand, manual slicers require strength and effort to cut through the meat. The operator needs to rotate the slicer blade for it to work manually.

It's best to use a manual meat slicer if:

You want more control over your blade
You're only working with a limited amount of meat
You're on a budget

How Not to Use a Meat Slicer

Now that you know where meat slicers are used, you must also know what to avoid when using a meat slicer.

By being aware of these safety tips, you can avoid damaging your machine or contracting diseases.

These are a few things to avoid when working with a meat slicer.

Slicing Raw Meat Before Cooked Meat

One of the most important things to remember about food prep is to avoid mixing raw and cooked meat. That includes when you slice meat through the food slicer.

Slicing raw meats before your cooked meats can cross-contaminate the food you're about to eat. Raw meat can breed bacteria that cause severe illnesses, like E.coli and salmonella.

If you must do this, ensure your slicer is THOROUGHLY SANITIZED before moving to your cooked meat.

Slicing Frozen Meat

It's best to not use a meat slicer for frozen food. Over time, the ice crystals can damage the blades of your machine, especially when they're not properly maintained.

You can let your meat thaw out and soften or run it through a meat grinder to prepare it for the meat slicer.

While some machines claim to be safe for frozen meat, it's best to avoid doing so unless necessary.

Cutting Meat With Bones

You should NEVER slice meats with the bone in them since they can be challenging for the meat slicer to work with.

These are too hard for any blade and can damage your machine in the long run. While some blades may be strong enough to cut through bones, they can wear them out over time.

It's important to prepare your meat before placing it onto your machine. Remove any parts which may be difficult for the machine to cut.

Slicing Soft Cheeses

A meat slicer is also usually used for cheeses, especially since they're more efficient than any cheese slicer.

However, ensure you're not working with soft cheeses when slicing cheese. You wouldn't want them to goop up your slicing machine.

Save the deli slicer for firmer cheeses that won't melt through the machine. These can easily be cut into thin slices without slipping through the machine's meat pusher and making a mess.

Cutting Oversized Meats

When your meat is too big, your whole meat slicer can get overwhelmed by the weight and size. They might not even fit in the meat carriage under the camp arm.

Preparing your meat involves cutting it into smaller, more manageable pieces for slicing.

Using the Wrong Meat Slicer Blade

Depending on your cutting, you can easily switch between stainless steel blades. Blade size can affect how your machine performs.

Use a serrated blade if you're working with hard cheeses, bread, and other food items you usually cut with a serrated blade or knife.

Use a smooth-edge blade for a cleaner cut for meat and other foods.

Working Without Proper Protective Gear

Since you will be working with a sharp blade, wearing cut-resistant gloves is always important to ensure you won't cut yourself.

It's also important not to use your hands to push the meat through your blades. Use the clamp arm and food pusher to keep yourself from getting injured.

Is a Meat Slicer for You? Factors to Consider

If you're considering if a stainless steel meat slicer is for you, you can consider the following factors:

Space: If you have limited space, it's best to look for lighter, more compact models. Ensure you have the space for it, especially since the machine works with sharp blades.
Material: Meat slicers can be made from different materials, affecting their price and longevity. You can choose from stainless steel, aluminum, and plastic.
Frequency: If you only use it a few times a year, purchasing a small meat slicer is best, especially for home cooking. Otherwise, invest in a professional-grade slicer with a durable motor for more frequent slicing.
Budget: Meat slicers can come at different prices based on material and features. Don't go for the lowest price because it can be made with cheaper, less reliable parts.

Use Meat Slicer FAQs

You may have more questions on how to use a meat slicer.

We’ve gathered the most common questions on the subject to help you further understand it.

Yes, you can slice raw meat on the meat slicer.

However, properly disinfect your machine to prevent food poisoning and other diseases.

It’s also important not to slice cooked meats after using the machine for raw ones until adequately disinfected.

It depends on what you’re going to use the meat slicer for.

If you’re going to use it for a business requiring slicing meat for long periods, it’s best to get a commercial meat slicer powered by electricity to make things easier.

However, if you’re only going for a simple home meat slicer that doesn’t need to be used for long periods, you can settle for a manual meat slicer.

Yes, they can also be used for vegetables.

It can slice anything that you can slice using a mandolin or knife.

Just be careful working with them, especially the leafy ones. If you’re not confident, you can work slowly to prevent accidents.

Conclusion

Now that you know more about using a meat slicer, you might also be interested in learning about other tools, like a manual meat grinder.

It's vital to learn how to safely use these tools in the kitchen if you have them.

Whether it's to slice roast beef, cheese, or vegetables, become more efficient with this versatile and reliable machine.

A good meat slicer lets you slice food of different thickness levels with the least resistance possible.

It saves you time in the kitchen, ensuring you enjoy a broad range of precision and control settings.

In this meat slicer buying guide, I'll discuss some of the best slicers you should check out right now. You won't need to look for other meat slicer reviews anymore.

10 Best Meat Slicers You Should Buy

I've searched high and low for the different food slicers in the market, and I'd have to say I'm impressed.

My search wasn't for nothing because I could find the best meat slicer for different categories. Let's go through some of my favorites.

1. OSTBA Electric Deli Food Slicer - Best Overall

OSTBA Meat Slicer Electric Deli Food Slicer with Child Lock...

To be a chef: The food slicer cuts the food precisely, it...
Easy to clean: seamless and removable features make...

What I like

Made of durable and high-quality materials
Perfect for cutting different kinds of food
Sleek and modern design
Easy to install and adjustable serrated blade

What I Don't Like

Challenging to clean

The OSTBA electric meat slicer combines power and precision in one handy kitchen equipment. It's a perfect meat slicer for amateur and professional cooks, and let me tell you why.

The serrated blade on this meat slicer is worth raving about. It features an adjustable blade thickness, ensuring you get the right cut for your fruits and vegetables each time.

I also appreciate that this meat slicer has a built-in safety lock and power button. I don't have to worry about the slicer suddenly powering on when I don't need it.

Overall, the serrated blade of this electric deli food slicer is very easy to clean. However, the nicks and crannies of this machine are a bit hard to clean.

2. Anescra Meat Slicer - Best Value

Meat Slicer, Anescra 200W Electric Deli Food Slicer with Two...

✔ 200W Powerful Meat Slicer: The update electric food...
✔ Two 7. 5’’ Stainless Steel Blade: We understand that...

What I like

Easy-to-clean removable parts
Compact and space-saving
Beautiful aluminum body
Reliable suction feet

What I Don't Like

Not ideal for people with big hands

I'm sure I'm not the only one saying I hate feeling cheated. Like paying a ton of money for kitchen equipment only to find out it doesn't live up to your expectations.

Thankfully this was the last of my problems when I discovered the Anescra meat slicer. I'm happy to share that this slicer is worth every penny you pay.

It features a serrated and standard blade to satisfy all your cutting needs. Couple it with its 200W horsepower, and this handy kitchen equipment will be a game changer.

In general, I like how small and compact this meat slicer is. But some may find it too compact, and people with large hands might find it hard to handle.

3. Chefman Die-Cast Electric Meat & Deli Slicer - Best Budget Pick

Sale

Chefman Electric Deli Slicer With Adjustable Slices,...

SLICE YOUR FAVORITES: Use your food cutter to easily slice...
SPACE SAVING DESIGN: With a sleek, compact design, this 9" x...

What I like

Very affordable and good value for money
Lasts you a long time
Compact and lightweight design
Beautiful sleek, and modern finish

What I Don't Like

Cannot withstand long operations

Who says you must spend a fortune to have one of the best electric meat slicers on the market? Certainly not this Chefman Die-Cast deli slicer.

I was over the moon when I found this product because of how affordable it is without compromising its quality and features.

Its 7.5-inch stainless steel blade packs a ton of power that can match commercial meat slicers. You can slice your favorite cold cuts and cheeses without sacrificing their quality.

The only problem I experienced with this slicer is it can only operate for an hour. Now, this may feel very limiting, especially if you've got a lot of work ahead of you.

4. Cusimax Electric Meat Slicer - Best Electric Meat Slicer

Meat Slicer, CUSIMAX Electric Deli Food Slicer with Two...

[Different Thickness] - CUSIMAX 200W electric meat slicer...
[Advanced Designn] - We adopt the most advanced bearing and...

What I like

Adjustable thickness settings
Professional quality meat slicer
Convenient food pusher
Strong suction feet

What I Don't Like

Hard-to-clean areas

Electric slicers are among the most common food slicers you can get today. It's easy and convenient; you can "plug and play" this kitchen equipment anytime.

I've found a lot of electric meat slicers out there, but I'd have to give it to Cusimax for being the best. This 200W food slicer packs a ton of power to slice food within minutes.

I loved using the food pusher on this food slicer because it helped guide me in cutting my frozen meats with great precision and control.

It's a perfect meat slicer for home use because it combines power and precision in one.

Unfortunately, there were some hard-to-reach areas on this kitchen equipment. Cleaning those areas became more challenging than cutting my smoked meats.

5. Cuisinart Kitchen Pro Food Slicer - Best Home Meat Slicers

Sale

Cuisinart Kitchen Pro Food Slicer, 7.5, Stainless steel,...

Removable 7.5-inch undulated stainless steel cutting blade....
Stainless steel removable carriage

What I like

Easy-to-clean food slicer
Modern and chic body
Lightweight and affordable
Comes from a reliable brand

What I Don't Like

Cannot run for more than an hour

Cuisinart has become a household name for kitchen equipment. It's become a go-to brand for many homemakers because of its exceptional line of products and quality.

Their automatic meat slicer lived up to its name, perfect for slicing most meats and cheeses for your subs.

The food slicer sports 130W horsepower, comparably lower than most slicers. Nonetheless, it still packs enough power to be considered one of the best slicers for home use.

That said, expect this kitchen equipment to last you for an hour at maximum. Nonetheless, you can still get enough output from this food slicer to satisfy your hungry stomach.

6. Elite Gourmet Ultimate Precision Slicer - Best For Cold Cuts

Sale

Elite Gourmet EMT-625B Ultimate Precision Electric Deli Food...

DAZZLE YOUR FRIENDS & FAMILY WITH THE MOST DELICIOUS...
PRECISELY CUT SALAMI, HAM, MORTADELLA, CHORIZO OR PEPPERONI...

What I like

Many built-in safety features
Perfect for slicing most foods
Ultra-sharp blade
High-quality and durable body

What I Don't Like

Not dishwasher friendly

Wine night with my friends means whipping my Elite Gourmet electric meat slicer. It's one of the best slicers I've found that can make precise and consistent thin slices for my meats and cheeses.

I no longer have to buy pre-made charcuterie boards because I can make one for myself! And the best part is I can put all my favorite meats, fruits, and cheeses!

I love how well thought out this product is because it already comes complete with everything I need from start to finish: blade guards, food clamp, and food platform!

Unfortunately, this meat slicer isn't dishwasher safe. The manufacturer recommends hand washing this equipment, which can get tricky for some people.

7. Beswood Electric Meat Slicer - Best Commercial Meat Slicers

BESWOOD 10" Premium Chromium-plated Steel Blade Electric...

Premium Chromium-plated Steel Blade with protection against...
There is no need to sharpen the blade frequently

What I like

Rust-resistant steel blades
Large round blade diameter
Smooth and quiet operations
Durable and well built

What I Don't Like

The bulky and heavy design

There are a lot of industrial-grade meat slicers in the market that are very tempting to get. They all come with exceptional quality that combines quality with durability.

But perhaps one of my favorite commercial slicers today is the Beswood electric meat slicer. It's perfect for home and professional use, giving users a wide range of flexibility.

What I like about this electric meat slicer is its smooth and quiet operation. It's unlike other meat slicers at this level, which typically make this distinct screeching noise.

Because this is a commercial-level food slicer, expect it to be very bulky and heavy. You'll need to find a permanent place for this inside your kitchen.

8. Nesco Stainless Steel Food Slicer - Best Stainless Steel Meat Slicer

Sale

NESCO Stainless Steel Food Slicer Adjustable Thickness,...

Full stainless steel sliding food carriage. 180 watt...
Large, detachable 8.7" hardened stainless steel serrated...

What I like

Food carriage sliding tray
Large sharp blade
Sports a dual safety feature
Exceptional build quality

What I Don't Like

Makes loud sounds

I'm not going to lie, I was very intimidated when I saw the Nesco electric food slicer for the first time. It sports an all-stainless steel body, which beginner and amateur cooks tend to shy away from.

Despite its looks, I was happy to test this food slicer on my frozen and cooked meats. And let me tell you now that it did not disappoint.

The 180-watt motor can cut with exceptional precision, even for my frozen meats. I was able to save a lot of time than what I'd normally spend in the kitchen.

The only thing I didn't like about this meat slicer was the loud screeching sounds it made. It leaves me with a bad headache to nurse after meal prep.

9. Chef's Choice 615A Electric Meat Slicer - Best Compact Meat Slicer

Sale

Chef'sChoice 615A Electric Meat Slicer Features Precision...

VERSATILE: This rugged slicer features all structural...
POWER: Extraordinary powerful high torque motor with gear...

What I like

Sports a tilted food carriage and meat holder
Easy to clean removable blade
Reliable thickness dial
Safety lock feature

What I Don't Like

Tricky to cut thin slices

Another one of my favorites is Chef's choice meat slicer. It's another one of the best long-standing brands for kitchen equipment.

This meat slicer looks unassuming and far from intimidating. It's so small and compact you wouldn't think it's capable of meat slicing! But this meat slicer will definitely wow you.

Once you've powered on this 615A electric meat slicer, you can expect it to slice frozen and cooked meat well.

Its tilted food carriage also comes in handy to make sure you can slice meat more efficiently.

The meat slicer blade on this equipment is pretty sharp. However, it was a bit tricky to cut thin slices.

It took me a few attempts to master this meat slicer to get it to my desired thickness.

10. Techwood Electric Meat Slicer - Best Countertop Meat Slicer

Meat Slicer, Techwood 200W Electric Food Slicer with...

[ Upgraded Workmanship] - We understand that the slicer...
[ Different Thickness] - Techwood 200W electric meat slicer...

What I like

Comes with built-in safety features
Can cut a wide range of food times
Sharp stainless steel blade
Adjustable thickness options

What I Don't Like

It cannot be used to slice frozen meat

This 200-watt automatic meat slicer has an ultra-sharp blade that can cut through most food items. If you want to use a meat slicer that won't hold you back, this is the one to beat.

You can set the meat slicer blade to different thickness settings, providing you with different options for different cooking styles. I love this feature because it offers the same versatility as manual meat slicers.

The bottom of this slicer sports a non-slip grip, ensuring it doesn't slip and slide all over the place. You won't have to worry about the slicer blade getting to you.

Although the blade of this slicer is powerful, the manufacturer doesn't recommend using it on frozen meat. It can compromise the quality of the blades in the long run.

Quick Comparisons Of Top Meat Slicers

Top Meat Slicers	Blade Length	Blade Material	Material	Recommended Use	Watts	Weight
OSTBA Electric Deli Food Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Cast Iron	Bread, cheese, and meat	150 W	8.64 lb.
Anescra Meat Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Stainless Steel, Aluminum	Bread, cheese, and meat	200 W	10 lb.
Chefman Die-Cast Electric Meat & Deli Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Stainless Steel	Bread, cheese, and meat	180 W	9.46 lb.
Cusimax Electric Meat Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Stainless Steel	Bread, cheese, meat, and vegetable	200 W	8.64 lb.
Cuisinart Kitchen Pro Food Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Premium-coated Steel and Die-cast Aluminum	Bread, cheese, meat, and vegetable	130 W	11 lb.
Elite Gourmet Ultimate Precision Slicer	7.5 inches	Stainless Steel	Aluminum	Bread, cheese, cold cuts, and vegetables	180 W	10.58 lb.
Beswood Electric Meat Slicer	10 inches	High-carbon and Chromium-plated Carbon Steel	Aluminum, Chromium-plated Steel, Rubber	Bread, cheese, and meat	240 W	33 lb.
Nesco Stainless Steel Food Slicer	8.7 inches	Stainless Steel	Stainless Steel	Bread, cheese, meat, and vegetable	180 W	11.45 lb.
Chef's Choice 615A Electric Meat Slicer	7 inches	Stainless Steel	Aluminum	Cheese and meat	120 W	10.61 lb.
Best Countertop Meat Slicer	9 inches	Stainless Steel	Stainless Steel, Aluminum	Bread, cheese, meat, and vegetable	200 W	15.42 lb.

Factors to Consider When Buying the Best Meat Slicers

There are a lot of awesome meat slicers in the market, and you won't have a hard time finding exactly what you need.

But before you do, there are a few considerations you need to keep in mind to ensure you find only the best.

Let's review the different factors that can help you narrow down your search.

1. Blade

The blade of your meat slicer means everything to ensure you can get even thin slices each time. You don't have to run your food back and forth from the slicer blade and ruin its quality.

Luckily, most meat slicers that come from reliable brands use sharp blades. The only point of contention is how big the blades are.

Regardless of the blade size, the goal should always be to find a blade that can cut meat like butter. There shouldn't be too much resistance whenever you're handling the device.

Don't worry because even the most affordable meat slicer can come with exceptional blade quality.

2. Motor

After many years of testing meat slicers, I realized that I should prioritize motor power in my search. A powerful motor translates to more cutting power at an exceptional speed.

A lighter horsepower is perfect for occasional use at home. It can cut soft meats and cheeses into evenly thin slices. However, it can only run for an hour at a time.

Medium-powered motors are slightly more powerful and capable of running a few hours more. You can get much work done besides cutting meats and cheeses for your charcuterie board.

But if you want a good all-around meat slicer that can run for hours, you can never go wrong with a heavy-duty meat slicer. It can slice frozen meat evenly and with ease!

3. Ease of Use

Meat slicers are usually categorized based on their operation: automatic or manual. Both are relatively easy to use, depending on what you're more comfortable with.

If you're new to meat slicers, I recommend picking automatic meat slicers because of their hassle-free operations.

You can get straight to slicing meat without worrying about the other details.

Once you get comfortable using automatic meat slicers, you can move on to manual meat slicers to challenge yourself. With enough practice, you'll get the hang of using it.

Manual meat slicers work perfectly for seasoned operators, especially those who want more control over handling their meat slicers.

It works almost the same as using a manual meat grinder.

4. Ease of Cleaning

Cleaning a meat slicer is both an easy and hard task. It's easy because there are no fancy after-care procedures.

You only have to wash it with soap to prevent bacteria from building up from the raw meats.

What makes it challenging, however, are all the different parts of the meat slicer that are hard to reach. Take the case of the gears, for example, which even small hands can't get to.

Thankfully, many meat slicers come with removable parts. This makes cleaning your kitchen equipment an easy task.

5. Safety

Safety should be your priority when handling powerful kitchen equipment such as this one. Just think of the sharp blade you'll be up against.

I'm sure you don't want your kitchen looking like a blood bath whenever you're slicing meat. And a way to prevent this is by ensuring your meat slicer has safety features.

Even a simple blade guard can do so much to protect your fingers! But for added protection, I recommend using cut-resistant gloves!

You can also check if your meat slicer has an emergency stop button, which can quickly shut off your meat slicer in between operations.

6. Type of Food

What type of food do you plan to slice on your equipment? If you're using it for tough cuts of meat, then using heavy-duty equipment with long blades is recommended.

But if you're only using it to slice cheese and bread, a simple meat slicer can do the job. That being said, buying a meat slicer also depends on the type of food you'll use it on.

Luckily, you can find a wide range of selections to choose from. There's always something you can use for your favorite foods.

7. Integrated Blade Sharpener

Some meat slicers already come with an integrated blade sharpener. It's one way to get your money's worth because you won't need to buy a separate accessory.

Personally, I find integrated sharpeners to be useful. It performs as expected, and you don't have to worry about buying a separate sharpener.

Simple accessories such as this are a great way for brands to attract customers!

8. Rubber Non-Slip Feet

A part of the safety features of a meat slicer is its non-slip rubber feet. This ensures your slicers won't slip from your kitchen counter during operation.

It might not seem like much now, but it can affect how you enjoy your meat slicer. You don't have to worry about it accidentally falling and injuring any of your body parts.

Thus, make sure you find a meat slicer with a reliable and sturdy rubber grip. It should be able to stay in place on top of your kitchen counter, regardless of how you maneuver the machine.

9. Noise

The last thing you want is a noisy meat slicer in your kitchen. You don't want it making thundering and roaring sounds that can wake your neighbors.

At the same time, you don't want the noisy sounds to give you a headache right after using the meat slicer. You might feel sick and have a headache because of the sounds!

That said, make sure your meat slicer operates quietly. Luckily, most meat slicers already have this feature, so it's one last thing you must worry about.

10. Price

Set a budget for yourself regardless of what meat slicer you're looking for. This helps you narrow your search and make sure you stay within budget.

Whether you're looking for an expensive or affordable slicer, there's something for you. It can get the job done perfectly, ensuring it doesn't compromise quality for its price.

You can have sliced meat at home without going to your butcher to complete the job. Now that's a money-saving hack you can do.

11. Operations

In general, there are two types of meat slicers: automatic/electric and manual slicers. Both vary in operation and provide a wide range of flexibility depending on your need.

Let's learn the difference between the two and see what you should choose.

Manual Slicers

Many professionals prefer traditional manual slicers over automatic ones. Although manual slicers typically require more muscle work, it nevertheless provides a seamless operation.

One of the great things about manual slicers is you won't need electricity to run them, and they won't alter the taste or texture of your meat.

Manual slicers are perfect for occasional use and who don't have a high demand to slice. It's a perfect meat slicer for home use if you can do the muscle work.

But if not, then you might want to check out an automatic slicer instead.

Automatic Slicers

Automatic meat slicers require a power source nearby. This being said, its power depends on its wattage. Thus, the more powerful it is, the better!

On average, most automatic slicers' wattage can range between 100 to 400 watts. For home use, 100 to 200 watts is enough. Anything higher than that will be for commercial use.

I love the convenience automatic slicers bring. I simply have to load my meats on the food carriage and start slicing! I don't have to pull a muscle to get thinly sliced foods.

If you're looking for a meat slicer for home and commercial use, this one can handle the job well.

Features of a Good Meat Slicer

Buying a meat slicer means doing a thorough review of the features it comes with. To get my money's worth, I always ensure my slicer comes with features that make my life easier in the kitchen.

Through my experience reviewing food slicers, I have learned to prioritize certain features over others. I've listed some of them here, which you must remember.

Accessories

The accessories with your food slicers don't have to be anything spectacular. If at all, you need it to be more functional to ensure a seamless operation.

One of my favorite accessories I usually look for includes the following:

Heavy-duty slicing guard
Extra blades: serrated or smooth blade
Blade removal tools
Vegetable chutes

Non-stick Coating

Non-stick coating isn't a necessity when it comes to buying a meat slicer, but it certainly is a big plus. It ensures you won't feel any drag whenever you're slicing meats.

There's a comparable difference between cleaning a meat slicer with a non-stick coating and those without. Any leftover meats and cheeses slide off easily, making cleanup a breeze!

Ensure the non-stick coating doesn't peel off and stick to your food.

Receiving Tray

A receiving tray helps catch all your meat slices, so you don't create a mess on your kitchen counter. Some slicers have a tray and food carriage, which fits perfectly with the equipment.

However, some slicers don't come with a tray, and you'd have to use one of your trays to catch your meat.

This isn't a total deal breaker for me, but fitting a 3rd party tray on my slicer gets challenging.

What Are the Benefits of Using Meat Slicers?

There are a ton of benefits to having the best meat slicer. I'm here to give you that small nudge if you still need some convincing.

Here are some of my favorite reasons I would never trade my meat slicer for other kitchen equipment.

1. Efficiency

Regardless of the wattage of your meat slicer, you can expect it to deliver fast and efficient operations. It saves you the time cutting meat you'd usually spend using a knife.

You can slice meat at home without laboring too much in the kitchen. The machine practically does the job for you, so you can save time and dedicate it to other tasks.

2. Uniformity

One of the main reasons I keep returning to my meat slicer is its reliability in making even cuts. This helps me cook my meats evenly and close to perfection as possible!

Not just that, but I also love this handy kitchen equipment because I can use it as a deli slicer. With its even thin slices, my meat tray looks as if it was professionally done.

3. Easy to Use

If it isn't apparent enough, you hardly have to break a sweat when using the right meat slicer. They're so easy to use that even a beginner and amateur cook can use this kitchen equipment.

There may be a learning curve at first, which I'm sure you'll enjoy learning. But once you've gotten through this, the next steps will be a breeze.

4. Saves Money

Save yourself a trip to your local butcher and slice your meats at home. You no longer have to pay extra to get even and thin slices!

The market is filled with meat slicers that are far more affordable than what you'd spend combined in your local butcher.

5. Effective Portion Control

If you're fond of meal prepping and trying to stick to recommended portions, best believe that a meat slicer can do the job.

With its different thickness settings, you can ensure you can slice meats based on your desired portions.

6. Fresh Meat Slices

Who doesn't love fresh meat? You can taste its flavors better, ensuring your meal always comes out the best way you can imagine.

Having your meat slicer ensures you can get a fresh cut of meat at home, perfect for when you want to impress your friends with your cooking. Who says you can't roll with the pros?

How to Use a Meat Slicer

Getting the hang of how to use a meat slicer can be very intimidating. After all, you're dealing with powerful kitchen equipment with sharp blades.

I want you to get the most out of your slicers, which means knowing the proper way to clean the equipment and sharpen the blades. I've listed a few tips below to help you out.

How to Clean a Meat Slicer

Who doesn't love a clean meat slicer? They look as if they're fresh out of their box, looking brand new each time.

The only way you can achieve this is if you clean your meat slicers after every use. You don't want raw meat getting stuck on the blades and collecting bacteria. Yikes!

Here are effective tips to help you clean your meat slicers:

Use a sanitizer concentrate and not regular soap to wash the blade;
Rinse the blade properly and wipe it dry after to prevent rusting; and
Make sure to clean the body and feeding tray and free it from any raw meat particles.

Safety Tip

Make sure to use cut-resistant gloves when washing the blade.

How to Sharpen a Meat Slicer

Dull blades are the last thing you'd want for your meat slicers. You won't be able to make paper-thin slices or cut anything! And when this happens, your meat slicer will go to waste.

Keep the blades of your meat slicer sharp. For many beginners, this can be a daunting task. Luckily, this is a cool kitchen skill anyone can pick up easily.

Here's how you can keep your blades razor-sharp:

Use a sharpening stone to sharpen the edge of your blade;
Apply cooking or sharpening oil on the surface;
Keep the blades clean and dry every after use.

Important Reminder

Don't over-sharpen your blades because they might become brittle in the long run.

Preventing Cross Contamination

Food slicers can slice different types of food, making them one of the best kitchen equipment. Because of this, you might have to deal with a higher risk of cross-contamination.

As much as possible, clean your blades right after you use them to cut a particular food item.

Take the case of meats, for example. Right after you cut them, clean them before you use them to cut fruits and cheeses! You don't want to risk having an upset stomach because of this small mistake.

Meat Slicers FAQs

Through my many years of reviewing meat slicers, I often get many questions about them. I’m finally answering some of them here to finally put an end to some of your burning questions.

Keep reading because you might learn something about your favorite meat slicer.

Yes, you can cut frozen meat in a meat slicer. However, I don’t recommend doing this all the time because it can damage your blades.

If your blade is sharp enough, cutting meat feels like slicing butter. You’d be surprised that it feels the same for cutting frozen to semi-frozen meat!

But again, give your meat time to thaw so you don’t damage your blades.

Powerful and heavy-duty meat slicers won’t have difficulty cutting through bone. Nevertheless, I do not recommend this because it can damage your blades.

Once or twice is enough, but cutting bones as part of your normal operations is not good. To avoid this problem, have your local butcher chop your bones instead!

Considering how costly it can get, you don’t want to risk damaging your meat slicer.

Serrated blades are perfect for cutting thick chunks of meat. It can go through meats like butter, making the entire slicing operation a breeze.

Smooth blades, however, are best used for those who want to end up with even thin slices. This is perfect for cutting cheeses and even cold cuts.

At the end of the day, the type of blade you need depends on your usage. If you want to do a wide range of activities, you can look for a meat slicer with interchangeable blades.

A 100-200 watts meat slicer is enough for your daily activities. Most slicers with this wattage usually sport a seven to eight-inch blade, perfect for those who only slice meat occasionally.

But if you require more horsepower, I recommend a meat slicer with 200 to 400 watts. It makes the best home meat slicer, and you can do a wide range of activities with it.

A Recap of the Top Picks

In this review, I've named some of my favorite meat slicers that can get your money's worth. But of all the products I've mentioned, three stood out and deserved one final mention.

Best Budget Pick - Chefman Die-Cast Electric Meat & Deli Slicer

You never have to settle for less once you've tried the Chefman Die-Cast deli slicer. It's one of the most affordable food slicers you can get that doesn't compromise quality.

Personally, this is one of my favorite go-to food slicers to use when I do my meal prep. I can load up on my favorite sandwiches!

Best Value - Anescra Meat Slicer

A meat slicer that's a bang for your buck? Well, that's the Anescra electric deli food slicer for you. This 200W slicer is powerful enough to keep up with your daily activities.

Plus, all this comes in a small, compact body that you can easily stow away inside your kitchen cabinet. You get the best of both worlds!

Best Overall - OSTBA Electric Deli Food Slicer

Topping my list is no other than the OSTBA electric meat slicer. It's one of the best meat slicers you can get today, especially considering its price.

Its cast iron body and serrated stainless steel blade are enough to convince you that this slicer can last you a lifetime.

Conclusion

Having the best meat slicers can make your life in the kitchen a breeze. You can slice foods based on your desired thickness!

The results always look amazing, especially if you're trying to make a charcuterie board. I'm sure you'll wow your friends with this new amazing skill.

I hope you enjoyed this article. Let me know which is the best meat slicer worth your time. I'd love to hear your thoughts.

You can also check out my take on the best manual meat grinder, which you might also be interested in having in your kitchen.

Even the best small microwaves can rapidly become filthy and odorous from food spills and splatters.

The good news is that there are different ways to remove tough stains and grime, freshen up your oven, and ensure that it stays hygienic for future use.

This article will cover five easy-to-remember and effective methods of how to clean a microwave, plus some additional tips!

5 Ways to Clean a Microwave

With frequent use, microwaves can quickly become dirty and smelly from food debris, splatters, and general use.

Here is a guide on how to clean a microwave oven using common household items that are easy and effective in removing tough stains and grime.

1. Paper Towels and Water

Paper towels and water are safe and environmentally-friendly alternatives to chemical substances.

Dampen a clean cloth with water and place them inside the microwave. Heat the oven on high power for 3-5 minutes until the damp rag is hot and steamy.

Let them sit inside for a few minutes to let the steam loosen any food residue and grime.

Once the towels cool down, use them to clean the microwave's interior and exterior.

2. Dish Soap and Water

Mix warm water and a few drops of dish soap until it turns into sudsy water.

Place the bowl in the oven on high heat until the water boils and produces steam. Use a few squirts of dish soap and some elbow grease to scrape away any difficult-to-remove stains.

Use a clean damp cloth or sponge to wipe down the surfaces and remove any soap residue.

3. Baking Soda and Water

Baking soda is a great cleaning agent because it's a mild alkali that causes dirt and stubborn grease to dissolve easily in water. This makes it a mildly abrasive natural cleaner and deodorizer.

Mix a tablespoon of baking soda with one cup of hot water in a microwave-safe bowl. Mix the two until it forms a thick cleaning paste, and apply it to the stains on the dirty microwave.

Let the mixture sit for about five minutes, then wipe off the paste residue and remaining grime with a dampened, non-abrasive sponge.

4. Lemon Juice and Water

Start by filling a microwave-safe bowl with water and adding a few tablespoons of lemon juice.

Place the bowl in the microwave and heat it on high power for 2-3 minutes until the water produces steam. Let the filter soak for ten more minutes.

Wipe the outside and inside of your microwave with a microfiber cloth dipped in the lemon-water solution.

Cleaning a microwave with lemon leaves it smelling fresh and citrusy.

5. Vinegar and Water

Fill a microwaveable bowl with two cups of water and two tablespoons of white vinegar.

You can also add drops of essential oil to minimize the bad smells from the vinegar.

Put the bowl in your microwave with vinegar and let the water and white vinegar mixture sit for ten minutes.

Then, carefully remove the bowl using oven mitts, and use a sponge or microfiber cloth to clean both the inside and outside of your microwave.

Additional Tips for Cleaning Your Microwave

While home hacks are effective ways to deep clean your microwave, additional tips can make the process easier.

Cover Your Food

Covering your food helps contain any spills or splatters and prevents them from sticking to the microwave interior.

Food splatters can leave behind tough stains that are difficult to clean and create unpleasant odors.

Covering your food can also help it heat up more evenly, resulting in better-tasting food.

Clean Spills Immediately

It's important to clean up spills and splatters as soon as they occur.

That's because they quickly accumulate and harden over time, making them more difficult to remove.

This not only creates unpleasant odors but also reduces the oven's efficiency.

You can use a damp cloth or paper towel to wipe up any spills, making sure to remove all food residue.

Use Microwave-Safe Dishes

Non-microwave-safe dishes can melt, break, or catch fire.

When selecting dishes for use in the microwave, look for those that are labeled as microwave-safe. These dishes are typically made from glass, ceramic, and oven-safe plastic.

Learning how to safely microwave metal and use microwave-safe dishes is essential to protect your microwave and stay clear of any dangers.

Follow Cook Times

Following cooking time is important in preventing overcooking or undercooking your food in the microwave.

In addition to destroying the flavor and consistency of your food, overcooking also risks damaging your microwave and producing unpleasant odors.

Meanwhile, undercooking might lead to foodborne illness or an undesirable taste.

To ensure your food is perfectly cooked, always follow the recommended cook times on the packaging or recipe.

Clean Routinely

A regular cleaning routine for your oven helps detect early signs of a fire hazard, such as when your microwave fan turns on when the door opens.

Set a regular schedule for a deeper clean every few weeks (or depending on the frequency of use) to prevent the buildup of tough stains and grime.

If you routinely clean your microwave, you can ensure it operates efficiently and prolongs its lifespan.

Clean A Microwave FAQs

Get the answers to common questions about how to clean a microwave with our helpful FAQs:

Natural cleaning agents are most effective at removing stains, grime, and food residue from the interior or microwave door.

Moreover, they don’t damage the appliance’s control panel or leave harsh chemical residue — even on the microwave turntable and microwave filter.

You can ask a cleaning expert to recommend microwave cleaning products on Amazon — especially if they are highly rated and effective at cleaning your home appliance.

These include steam cleaners, bleach, cleaning sprays, an all-purpose cleaner, and microwave-safe cleaning sponges.

Keeping a microwave clean involves mixing water with non-toxic and eco-friendly cleaning agents — such as white vinegar, baking soda, lemon/orange slices, or dishwashing liquid.

These natural ingredients are effective at removing stubborn stains (like tomato sauce or burnt popcorn), grime, and burnt smell from the interior of your microwave without leaving behind harsh chemical residues or fumes.

Whatever you choose, rinse the interior with the mixture and wipe it with a clean rag to prevent any residue from remaining inside the microwave.

Conclusion

It's never been simpler to achieve a clean microwave with these practical tips and tricks!

Whether you prefer natural cleaning methods or specialized cleaning products, these tips and tricks will help you keep your microwave looking and smelling fresh.

Microwaves are a staple in most kitchens, sometimes taking over the role of a standard oven in food prep and cooking food. However, choosing the right size microwave can be difficult.

The perfect fit for your kitchen and cooking needs will depend on several factors, including your family size, counter space dimensions, and desired wattage.

In this article, we'll explore the different convection microwave sizes so that your device takes up just enough space in your kitchen or dorm room.

Standard Microwave Sizes by Type

When choosing the perfect microwave, it's important to understand the different types and their standard sizes.

Microwaves come in various types, including countertops, over-the-range, and built-in microwaves. Each type has pros and cons, so knowing which will fit your needs is important.

Built-in Microwaves

A built-in microwave, also known sometimes as a convection oven, is popular among homeowners. You can open any drawer or cabinet and find a convection microwave inside.

These microwaves are integrated into the kitchen cabinetry. You may find a built-in microwave as a drawer microwave or a wall oven, perfect for those with limited counter space.

The typical microwave dimensions for built-in microwaves measuring 24 to 30 inches wide, 14 to 24 inches deep, and 16 to 22 inches tall. It takes up around 1.6 to 2.2 cu ft. of space.

The internal dimensions, or the space inside the microwave, will vary depending on the model. But generally, a built-in microwave interior space ranges between 1.0 to 2.2 cu ft.

Built-in microwaves generally meet standard cabinet dimensions. Make sure that the microwave fits standard cabinet widths.

When considering where to install your built-in microwave, it's important to remember the microwave door. You don't want the open microwave door to swing out and hit something.

Closed door depths range from 0.73 to 0.85 cubic feet for built-in microwaves. The open door depths range from 2.21 to 3.08 cubic feet.

Built-in microwaves also tend to have higher wattage than countertop models, with most models ranging from 800 to 1200 watts.

What I like

A sleek and sophisticated look that integrates seamlessly with kitchen cabinetry
More advanced cooking features, such as convection cooking and grilling
Wider temperature range for more advanced cooking techniques

What I Don't Like

More expensive than other models, both in terms of the initial purchase price and installation costs
More difficult to install, requiring professional installation during a kitchen remodel or renovation
It can be more challenging to repair or replace if something goes wrong

Countertop Microwaves

Countertop microwaves are a popular and affordable option for those who want a simple and convenient way to heat food quickly.

These compact microwaves are designed to sit on top of a counter or table and come in various sizes and styles to fit any kitchen.

Countertop microwaves, or compact microwaves, come in various sizes, ranging from small to medium-sized microwaves.

Standard microwave sizes generally range from 0.5 to 1.1 cubic feet, with widths ranging from 12 to 24 inches, and the microwave height typically ranges between 8 to 14 inches.

The internal dimensions also vary depending on the compact microwave, but most models have a capacity of 0.5 to 1.0 cu ft, which can easily fit a plate or small casserole dish.

When considering where to place it, it's important to consider the door. Closed-door depths range from 0.5 to 0.7 cubic feet, and open-door depths range from 1.7 to 2.2 cubic feet.

Another important factor to consider when choosing a mini microwave is wattage. Most compact models range from 600 to 1200 watts, offering faster and more cooking power.

What I like

They are more affordable and easier to install since they don't require professional installation
Offer greater portability and can be easily moved from one location to another
Take up less space and don't require any permanent modifications to your kitchen

What I Don't Like

Take up valuable counter space and may not fit well in smaller kitchens
They may not have as many advanced cooking features or as high wattage, which can limit their versatility

Over-The-Range Microwaves

Over-the-range microwaves are a popular choice for those who want to save space in their kitchen.

Over-the-range microwaves combine the functions of a microwave with those of a range hood, making them a convenient and practical addition to any kitchen.

Over-the-range microwaves measured from 24 to 30 inches in width, in depth from 10 to 18 inches, and over-the-range height is 16 to 18 inches. The size ranges from 1.5 to 2.5 cubic feet.

The internal capacity of an over-the-range microwave ranges from 1.5 to 2.2 cubic feet, similar to most countertop microwaves.

It's important to consider the depth of an over-the-range microwave when the door is closed and open.

The closed-door depths typically range from 0.6 to 0.7 cubic feet, while the open-door depths can be as much as 2.6 to 3.5 cubic feet.

This means you'll need sufficient space above your range to accommodate the over-the-range microwave when the door is fully extended.

Over-the-range microwaves generally have a higher wattage than countertop microwaves, ranging from 800 to 1200 watts.

The temperature range in an over-the-range microwave is similar to other microwave types, typically heating food to a temperature of around 160°F to 200°F.

What I like

Combines the functions of a microwave and range hood in one unit
Fit any kitchen with different microwave sizes
It can help remove smoke, steam, and cooking odors from the kitchen

What I Don't Like

It requires professional installation
It may not be suitable for all kitchen configurations, unlike most microwaves

How to Get Your Microwave Dimensions

If you're looking to buy a new microwave, it's important to know the dimensions of your current microwave or the size of your existing microwave enclosure.

Exterior Dimensions

When measuring your new or current microwave, you'll want to start with the external dimensions.

This will give you an idea of how much cu. ft., it will occupy your countertop or cabinets. You'll need a tape measure and a flat surface to place your microwave on to get started.

Measure width: Measure the width of your microwave from left to right. Make sure it fits the standard cabinet width.
Measure height: Measure the microwave height from top to bottom. If the cabinet is too large, you can install a trim kit to fit your microwave.
Measure depth: Measure the microwave depth from front to back. This is the distance from the front of the microwave to the back.

Note

A trim kit is useful when the cabinet you place the microwave in is too large to fit it.

Interior Space

Once you have the external dimensions, you can measure the internal dimensions of your new microwave.

This will give you an idea of how much space you have inside the microwave to cook or reheat food. You'll need a tape measure and a flat surface to place your microwave on to get started.

Measure width: Measure the width of the inside of your microwave from left to right. This is the distance across the widest part of the microwave.
Measure height: Measure the height of the inside of your microwave from top to bottom. This is the distance from the bottom of the microwave to the top.
Measure depth: Measure the depth of the inside of your microwave from front to back. This is the distance from the front of the microwave to the back.

Remember

Ensure your devices are empty before measuring the microwave dimensions. This will ensure you get accurate measurements and avoid any accidents.

What Size Microwave Do I Need: Other Things to Consider

Aside from the microwave dimensions, there are a few other important factors to consider before purchasing.

Let's take a look at three key considerations:

Microwave Wattage

The wattage is basically how powerful it is. A higher wattage means quicker cooking times.

You might not need a high-wattage model using your countertop microwave to reheat leftovers or defrost frozen food.

But if you want to whip up meals quickly and efficiently, a microwave with a higher wattage could be the way to go.

Family Size

Think about the size of your family when choosing. A countertop model might be all you need if it's just you or you're living with a partner.

If you're feeding a big family or regularly cooking for guests, a larger microwave that can fit big dishes or cook multiple items at once could be a better choice.

Ventilation Space

Ventilation space is also very important. It dictates how much food can fit inside. A countertop microwave might do the trick if you only use it occasionally.

But if you frequently cook food in your microwave or use your appliance as your go-to kitchen tool, large microwaves might be the better option.

Microwave Size FAQs

Now, let’s move on to some frequently asked questions about microwave sizes and features.

The size is an important consideration because it determines the amount and size of food that can be cooked or reheated at one time.

For more information, check out our article on the best small microwave.

Whether a 25L capacity is sufficient depends on the individual’s requirements and the size of the dishes they want to prepare or reheat.

A 25L capacity is typically large enough for most families, but large microwaves may be more suitable for cooking large quantities of food.

The ideal size of a countertop microwave oven for a family depends on their size and cooking needs.

A capacity of 1.0 to 1.6 cu ft. is usually sufficient for a family of four, but larger families may need a bigger appliance or more than one.

A convertible vent model can be used as a vented or recirculating microwave, while a recirculating model filters the air and returns it to the kitchen.

Look at our article on Convertible Vent Vs Recirculating Microwave for additional details.

A mixture of water and vinegar can be used to clean a microwave. The interior can be wiped with a soft cloth or sponge.

Check out our piece on How to Clean a Microwave for more details.

Conclusion

In conclusion, choosing the right size microwave oven is essential to ensure that it meets your cooking needs and fits your space.

It's important to consider factors such as your household size, the types of food you plan to cook, and your kitchen layout when selecting a microwave size.

Doing so lets you get the perfect fit-size microwave and enjoy convenient and efficient cooking or reheating.

As an avid camper and hiking enthusiast, I have had the opportunity to test out countless fire pits. I have developed a deep understanding of what features are important to consumers.

In this article, I will share my top 10 portable fire pits and my experience with each product.

I've carefully selected fire pits based on quality, durability, size, ease of use, and overall value for money.

Whether planning a weekend camping trip with your family or a cozy evening in your backyard with friends, I got you covered.

So, let's dive into the top 10 best portable fire pits you can get now!

What Are the 10 Best Portable Fire Pits You Should Buy?

Fire pits are a great way to bring warmth and ambiance to outdoor gatherings, camping trips, or backyard parties. They come in various shapes and sizes.

There are different portable fire pits on the market. There are wood -burning fire pits, propane fire pits, smokeless fire pits, and even those that run on their own fuel from electric ignition.

Collapsible fire pits are important because they offer a safe and convenient way to have a fire outdoors without needing a permanent fire pit or fire ring.

A portable fire pit can be easily moved and stored, making them an easy-to-carry fireplace. They can also be a portable grill for barbecuing on your backyard patio.

Here are, in my opinion, my top 10 favorite fire pits.

1. Best Overall - Solo Stove Ranger

Solo Stove Ranger Big Yard Bundle Portable Outdoor Fire Pit...

RANGER BIG YARD BUNDLE: The world’s most unique bundle to...
RANGER SHELTER: A great companion for your fire pits for...

What I like

Easy to use
Compact Size
Sturdy base and a Spark arrestor

What I don't like

Expensive compared to other fire pits

My friends and I enjoy trips and spending time in nature, and the Solo Stove Ranger has quickly become our go-to fire pit for these adventures.

The Solo Stove Ranger is incredibly easy to use. Do some fire building, and voila! The unique airflow system ensures the fire burns efficiently and with little smoke.

Its design produces less smoke and more heat than traditional fire pits. Add a case of beer and a collapsible camping chair, which becomes a more enjoyable experience.

I love the lightweight and portable Solo Stove Ranger, making it easy to pack in the car for my next camping trip.

The durable stainless steel construction has held up well to frequent use, giving us confidence that it will last for many more trips.

The Solo Stove Ranger is also designed with safety in mind, with a sturdy base and a spark arrestor that prevents embers from flying out of the pit in the light wind.

Although, the price point of Solo Stove fire pits is higher than other fire pits on the market, which may deter budget-conscious campers looking for a backyard fire pit.

Size: 15" x 15" x 12.5" | Weight: 15 pounds | Fuel Type: Wood | Price: Mid-range | Extra Features: Double-wall design, minimal smoke production, ash pan for easy cleaning and maintenance, includes a carry case for portability and storage

2. Best Value - UCO Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit

Sale

UCO Flatpack Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit

Stainless steel grill folds to 1.5 inches thick and fits in...
Regular size features 13 x 10-inch grilling area for up to 6...

What I like

Easy to pack and transport.
Easy to assemble and disassemble, with no tools required
It can be used with wood or charcoal, providing flexibility in fuel choice

What I don't like

The small size may not be suitable for larger groups
The height of the fire pit may be lower than desired for some users

As a father, it was a proud moment when my eldest son asked for his first portable fire pit.

This lightweight fire pit is easy to pack and is convenient for transportation! Just fit it in the carrying case and go.

I wanted to find something affordable but still reliable, and after some research, I came across the UCO Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit.

It seemed the perfect option for our family camping trips and backyard barbecues, so we tried it.

I have to say, I was pleasantly surprised by the quality and functionality of this budget-friendly folding fire pit.

Size: 13.5 x 10 x 1.5 inches | Weight: 3.2 pounds | Fuel Type: Wood or Charcoal | Price: Affordable | Extra Features: N/A

3. Best for Backyards - KingSo Outdoor Fire Pit

What I like

Easy to assemble and disassemble
The size of the fire pit is just right
The foldable fire pit is made of high-quality materials
Feels sturdy and well-built
The design of the fire pit is sleek and modern

What I don't like

The fire pit can be heavy, especially hiking to a campsite.
The included carrying case is a bit flimsy
It doesn't provide much protection for the fire pit.

As a father of three and a camping enthusiast, finding the perfect portable fire pit has always been my priority.

I've been through my fair share of Fire pits, but the Kingso Outdoor Fire Pit stands out as one of the best I've ever used!

When my family and I went camping at Yosemite National Park, we brought this wood-burning fire pit, which exceeded our expectations. We've used it multiple times, and it still looks and functions like new.

It's large enough to keep the fire going for a few hours but not too big that it takes up a lot of storage space.

We could keep the fire roaring at a cozy blaze in this portable campfire while using its included fire poker to adjust the heat while we roast marshmallows and hot dogs, making it a great fire pit for outdoor trips.

Size: 32" x 32" x 17" | Weight: 30 lbs | Fuel Type: Wood | Price: Affordable | Extra Features: Removable mesh screen, flame poker for easy adjustment of the wood and charcoal briquettes, Multi-functional design that can be used as a fire pit or grill

4. Best for Medium Gatherings - Solo Stove Bonfire

Solo Stove Bonfire 19.5" Smokeless Fire Pit with Removable...

SMOKELESS FIRE PIT: Experience the magic of a cozy,...
WARMTH ON THE GO: This portable, lightweight camping heater...

What I like

The Solo Stove Bonfire is incredibly easy to set up and use
The stainless steel construction is durable and resistant to rust and corrosion
The unique design of the fire pit allows for a smokeless fire
The compact size and lightweight construction

What I don't like

The Solo Stove Bonfire can be a bit pricey compared to other portable fire pits on the market.
Some users have reported that the fire pit can be difficult to clean after use.

I recently had the opportunity to use the Solo Stove Bonfire on an outdoor trip and was blown away by its innovative design and ease of use.

As someone who loves spending time outdoors, I always look for high-quality camping gear, and the Solo Stove Bonfire did not disappoint.

The Solo Stove Bonfire is a fire pit perfect for outdoor trips, backyard barbecues, and other outdoor activities.

The sleek design and innovative technology make it a standout option among portable fire pits.

Size: 19.5" x 19.5" x 14" | Weight: 20 pounds | Fuel Type: Wood | Price: Mid-range | Extra Features: Smokeless design, stainless steel construction, comes with a carrying case

5. Best Propane - Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit

Sale

Bond Manufacturing 67836 54,000 BTU Aurora Camping,...

Includes lid, stones, tank holder, gas hose and regulator
Steel frame with rubbed bronze finish

What I like

The propane pit uses propane tanks
The compact and lightweight design
The adjustable flame control allows for flame height and heat output customization.
The included lava rocks add a stylish touch and create a realistic campfire feel.
Electric ignition allows for easy fuel ignition on this portable propane fire pit.

What I don't like

Propane fuel is a bit more expensive than wood and charcoal
The price is higher than some other portable propane pits.
The lava rocks that come with the propane fire pit are too few.

As a family of five that loves spending time outdoors, we always look for new ways to enjoy the fresh air.

When we stumbled upon the Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit, we knew we had to try the propane pit.

It promised to be the best propane portable fire pit, and we were eager to put it to the test. And it's safe to say it is one of the best gas-powered pits we have purchased.

We recently took it with us on a weekend trip, and we were blown away by how convenient and easy it was to use.

Its warmth and ambiance made our evenings around the campfire even more enjoyable. A huge bonus for this one is a locking lid, which keeps the fire safety in place.

Although, maintenance can be a pain since propane fuel is more expensive than wood and charcoal, making refueling more expensive on this propane gas fire pit.

Since the propane fire pit provides few lava rocks, I suggest buying a separate bag of lava rocks to supplement.

Size: 18.5" x 18.5" x 14.65" | Weight: 18 pounds | Fuel Type: Propane | Price: Mid-range | Extra Features: Adjustable heating performance, weather-resistant finish, included lava rocks

6. Best for Camping - Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit

Fireside Outdoor Portable Fire Pit for Camping, Portable...

PORTABLE FIRE PIT FOR EASY TRANSPORT AND STORAGE: The Pop-up...
DESIGNED FOR OUTDOOR USE WITH WEATHER-RESISTANT MATERIALS:...

What I like

The collapsible design is easy to set up and take down
The heat shield on the bottom keeps the ground cool
The included carrying case makes it easy to transport and store.

What I don't like

The small size limits the amount of wood that can be burned simultaneously.
The price point is slightly higher than other portable fire pits on the market.

My wife and I have explored some of the most beautiful camping spots across the country.

During our most recent couple's trip, we brought along the Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit, which exceeded our expectations.

The collapsible design made it incredibly easy to pack and transport, and once we arrived at our campsite, it was a breeze to set up the pop-up fire pit

We enjoyed cozy evenings by the fire, roasting marshmallows and sharing stories under the stars. In the morning, we quickly packed the fire pit in its carrying case in 5 minutes!

Size: 24" x 24" x 15" | Weight: 8 lbs | Fuel Type: Wood or charcoal | Price: Mid-range | Extra Features: Collapsible design, heat shield, carrying case.

7. Best for Short Trips - Snow Peak Takibi Fire and Grill

Snow Peak Takibi Fire & Grill, Stainless Steel, Durable,...

Versatile Design: Snow Peak's Takibi Fire & Grill can be...
Five Piece Set: Our Takibi Fire & Grill includes a Grill...

What I like

The dual functionality of the fire pit and grill
The Takibi Fire and Grill is made from durable stainless steel
The compact size and portability

What I don't like

The Takibi Fire and Grill's price point is higher than most portable fire pits
The grill grates can be difficult to clean, especially if food gets stuck between the bars.

As an avid camper and outdoor enthusiast, I always seek high-quality gear to stand up to the elements and enhance my experience.

The fire pit's dual functionality makes it versatile and practical for cooking meals. The removable grill bridge can be placed to turn the fire pit into a grill.

The Snow Peak Takibi Fire and Grill is one such product that has exceeded my expectations in every way. This wood-burning fire pit is the perfect pop-up fire pit for any trip.

It is a highly functional open fire pit, and with the removable grill grate, it can double as a grill, making it the perfect addition to any camping trip or backyard gathering.

Size: 19.7" x 19.7" x 13.8" | Weight: 31 lbs. | Fuel Type: Wood or charcoal | Price: Expensive | Extra Features: Airflow system for reduced smoke, dual functionality as a fire pit and grill, Made from durable stainless steel

8. Best for Large Groups - Sun Joe Fire Joe Wood Burning 30 Inch Steel Fire Pit

Sun Joe SJFP35-RW-STN SJFP Cast Stone Base, Burning Fire Pit...

Ideal outdoor centerpiece for warmth and enjoyment
Durable cast stone base adds a sophisticated touch to any...

What I like

The large size of the wood-burning fire pit
The stylish design of the fire pit
The ash catcher is a great feature that makes cleaning up after use a breeze.

What I don't like

The fire pit is heavy
The assembly was a bit tricky and took longer than expected

As a family of five, we love spending time in our backyard. Therefore, we wanted something large enough to accommodate us when we purchased a new pit.

That's when we came across the Sun Joe Fire Joe Wood Burning 30 Inch Steel Fire Pit.

The size of this fire pit is impressive - it can easily fit large logs and has enough space for everyone to gather around comfortably.

Size: 30" x 30"x 24" | Weight: 32 pounds | Fuel Type: Wood | Price: Mid-range | Extra Features: Spark screen, log grate, poker tool.

9. Best for Patio - Outland Living Fire Table

Outland Living 410 Series Fire Table – 36-Inch Outdoor...

Perfect addition of functionality and style for your...
Product dimensions – 36” L x 36” W x 24.5” H | Max...

What I like

The sleek and modern fire table makes it a stylish addition to any backyard or patio
The table's surface is made of a weather-resistant resin wicker material
The fire table has a locking lid, making it easy to protect when not in use

What I don't like

The fire table is relatively heavy
The propane tank that fuels the fire pit component of the table is not included in the purchase

The Outland Living Fire Table is a versatile addition to any backyard. I enjoyed experiencing this propane fire pit at a friend's dinner party, where we gathered around it.

What struck me most about the fire table was how seamlessly it blended into the rest of the patio furniture, even with the propane tank. It was not out of place in the patio space.

It functioned as a fire pit and a table, making it the perfect centerpiece for any outdoor gathering.

Size: 44" x 32" x 23" | Weight: 96 lbs | Fuel Type: Propane | Price: Expensive | Extra Features: The fire table doubles as a table, making it a versatile addition to any outdoor space. It also comes with a cover to protect it when not in use.

10. Best Splurge - Biolite Firepit+

BioLite FirePit+ Smokeless Fire Pit and Grill, Charcoal and...

Smokeless wood and charcoal burning fire pit and grill...
Ideal for camping, RVing, overlanding, tailgating, beach,...

What I like

It has a patented airflow system
Ability to be controlled remotely via the BioLite app.
The rechargeable battery allows up to 24 hours of burn time
The wooden pallets allow for a smokeless burn from the flames.

What I don't like

The BioLite FirePit+ is quite heavy
The high-tech features and advanced technology come at a price.
Wood pellets are hard to ignite with a fire starter.

Recently, my wife had a few friends over for a wine and barbeque hangout session, and her friend brought along the Biolite Firepit+. I was impressed by its high-tech features.

As we gathered around the fire, I couldn't help but notice how little smoke the smokeless fire pit produced, making it a comfortable and pleasant experience for everyone.

It's safe to say that the Biolite Firepit+ is not your typical smokeless fire pit. One of the best things about the BioLite FirePit+ is its ability to be controlled remotely via the BioLite app.

We could adjust the flame size and heating performance with our phones, making it easy to control the fire without getting up and manually adjusting it.

The Biolite Firepit+ is also fueled by wood pellets, which are hard to ignite if you do not have a dedicated fire starter. However, they do provide a smokeless burn.

Size: 27 x 13 x 15.8 inches | Weight: 19.8 pounds | Fuel Type: Wood pellets | Price: Expensive | Extra Features: Smokeless airflow system, remote control via app, rechargeable battery, grill grate, stainless steel construction.

Quick Comparisons Of The Top Fire Pits That Are Portable

Best Portable Fire Pits	Size	Weight	Fuel Type	Price	Extra Features
Solo Stove Ranger	15 x 15 x 12.5 inches	15 lb.	Wood	Mid-range	Double-wall design, minimal smoke production, ash pan for easy cleaning and maintenance, includes a carry case for portability and storage.
UCO Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit	13.5 x 10 x 1.5 inches	3.2 lb.	Wood or Charcoal	Affordable	N/A
KingSo Outdoor Fire Pit	32 x 32 x 17 inches	30 lb.	Wood	Affordable	Removable mesh screen, flame poker for easy adjustment of the wood and charcoal briquettes, Multi-functional design that can be used as a fire pit or grill
Solo Stove Bonfire	19.5 x 19.5 x 14 inches	20 lb.	Wood	Mid-range	Smokeless design, stainless steel construction, comes with a carrying case
Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit	18.5 x 18.5 x 14.65 inches	18 lb.	Propane	Mid-range	Adjustable heating performance, weather-resistant finish, included lava rocks
Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit	24 x 24 x 15 inches	8 lb.	Wood or Charcoal	Mid-range	Collapsible design, heat shield, carrying case.
Snow Peak Takibi Fire and Grill	19.7 x 19.7 x 13.8 inches	31 lb.	Wood or Charcoal	Expensive	Airflow system for reduced smoke, dual functionality as a fire pit and grill, Made from durable stainless steel
Sun Joe Fire Joe Wood Burning 30 Inch Steel Fire Pit	30 x 30x 24 inches	32 lb.	Wood	Mid-range	Spark screen, log grate, poker tool.
Outland Living Fire Table	44 x 32 x 23 inches	96 lb.	Propane	Expensive	The fire table doubles as a table, making it a versatile addition to any outdoor space. It also comes with a cover to protect it when not in use.
Biolite Firepit+	27 x 13 x 15.8 inches	19.8 lb.	Wood Pellets	Expensive	Smokeless airflow system, remote control via app, rechargeable battery, grill grate, stainless steel construction

Why Should You Get a Portable Fire Pit?

I can confidently say that getting a portable fire pit is an excellent investment for anyone who loves spending time outdoors.

Fire pits provide a warm and cozy atmosphere, making them perfect for creating a relaxing ambiance that can help you unwind and de-stress.

Portable fire pits also offer a great way to cook food outdoors. Many models come with grilling racks, allowing you to prepare meals for your friends and family.

In addition, getting a portable fire pit is a sustainable and eco-friendly choice. It allows you to enjoy a fire without leaving a traditional fire pit behind or damaging the environment.

Many parks and campgrounds require portable fire pits for this very reason, and by using one, you're doing your part to preserve the beauty of nature.

What Are Things to Consider Before Buying a Portable Fire Pit?

When it comes to portable fire pits, there are a few key factors that you should consider before making a decision. These include:

Size and Portability: You'll want to choose a fire pit that is big but portable. Consider the weight, dimensions, and whether the fire pit can be easily packed and transported.
Material: The material of your fire pit will affect its durability and longevity. Look for fire pits from high-quality materials such as stainless steel or cast iron.
Heating Performance: The heating performance of your fire pit will determine how warm and cozy your campsite will be. Look for models with a high BTU output.
Ease of Use: You'll want a fire pit that is easy to set up and use, with features like a simple ignition system and a removable ash tray for easy cleanup.
Safety: Safety should always be a top priority. Look for models with features like a locking lid or a fireproof mat to prevent accidental fires.

FAQs Related To Portable Fire Pits

Got more questions about the best portable fire pits? Here are our frequently asked questions about the topic.

The lifespan of a portable fire pit can vary depending on factors such as the quality of materials used, and maintenance

Made from high-quality materials such as stainless steel or cast iron, they tend to last longer.

Regular maintenance, including cleaning after each use, proper storage, and regular inspection, can help prolong the life of the fire pit.

Absolutely! I love having a portable fire pit in my backyard. It’s a great way to enjoy the outdoors and has cozy gatherings with friends and family.

However, it’s important to check with local regulations and follow safety guidelines to ensure that the fire pit is legal and safe.

It depends on the type of fire pit you have. Traditional fire pits that burn wood are not very effective as patio heaters since they produce a lot of smoke.

However, some fire pits are specifically designed to function as patio heaters, which use propane or natural gas as fuel and produce heat without smoke.

If you want to use your fire pit as a patio heater, it’s important to ensure it is safe and that you are following all safety guidelines.

To learn more about patio heaters, check out our guide on the best patio heaters and best tabletop heaters.

No, a fire pit cannot replace a microwave. A fire pit is designed for outdoor use and primarily for heating and cooking food over an open flame.

Conversely, a microwave is an indoor appliance that uses electromagnetic radiation to cook and heat food quickly and efficiently.

The two serve different purposes and cannot be used interchangeably.

To know more, please check out our guide on the best small microwaves.

Summary

Now that I have talked about portable fire pits, here are my thoughts on the best portable fire pit on the market!

Best Overall: Solo Stove Ranger
Best Budget: UCO Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit
Best for Backyards: KingSo Outdoor Fire Pit
Best for Medium Gatherings: Solo Stove Bonfire
Best Propane: Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit
Best for Camping: Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit
Best for Short Trips: Snow Peak Takibi Fire and Grill
Best for Large Groups: Sun Joe Fire Joe Wood Burning 30 Inch Steel Fire Pit
Best for Patio: Outland Living Fire Table
Best Splurge: Biolite Firepit+

Conclusion

A fire pit is essential for anyone who loves spending time outdoors.

Whether camping, hosting a backyard party, or simply enjoying a night under the stars, a fire pit can provide warmth, light, and ambiance to any gathering.

When choosing a portable fire pit, it's important to consider the size, weight, fuel type, price range, and any extra features such as a smokeless design or carrying case.

With so many options available today, there's a fire pit that suits every need and budget.

Don't miss out on the opportunity to enhance your outdoor experience with the cozy glow of a portable fire pit.

Is the skillet your all-around cookware and bakeware in your kitchen? You might want to reconsider.

Depending on your cooking methods, specialized kitchenware like the broiler pan and baking sheet can elevate your resulting dishes.

Discover here the difference these bakeware tools make and know which to use to achieve the best results for your dish.

Broiling vs Baking: What Are the Differences?

Your oven has different heating zones. The difference between broiling and baking lies in which ones they take advantage of.

Here's how broiling is different from baking:

Broiling

Source: Kitchen Arena

Broiling depends on a single concentrated heating element only. This can either be from the top or bottom of your oven, but it uses high heat from 500 to 550° F to quickly crisp the exterior of foods.

It may not be a common cooking method for you in contrast to baking. But if you want to achieve fast cooking for veggies, fish, poultry, and steak, you might want to know about this method.

Baking

Source: Tasting Table

What about baking then? Baking involves all oven elements. Instead of direct heat, baking aims to slowly achieve even heating from 200 to 500° F. Because baking time usually takes longer.

Baking is best for delicate foods, such as substantial veggies like carrots, squash, and potatoes.

Aside from desserts and loaves of bread, you can use baking for pasta and thicker cuts of meat to ensure that they're cooked on the inside without the risk of burning the exterior of your dish.

You should know that some foods, such as casseroles, may require you to bake AND broil. To make the best-tasting casseroles, you'll need to bake the dish to heat its filling evenly and broil it afterward to crisp its crumb or cheese toppings.

Broiler Pan Overview

Broiler pans have two components: the perforated drip rack and the high-walled tray.

This facilitates the separation of fats, oils, and grease, especially when dealing with meat. When cooking with a broiler pan, you'll need a marinade or glaze to help your meal or veggies stay juicy.

Find the best broiler pan here.

What I like

Allows short cooking time
Can hold out in high temperature

What I Don't Like

Only cooks the exterior
Can scorch foods when left unattended

Baking Sheet Overview

Baking sheets are interchangeably called sheet pans. A flat surface characterizes them; a low rim contains heavier ingredients like vegetables.

A baking sheet is different from a cookie sheet. Though both shallow, a baking sheet has rolled edges on its sides.

These sheet pans have different sizes: eighth, quarter, half, two-thirds, and full.

What I like

Allows even cooking
It can be left unattended for a long time

What I Don't Like

It takes a while to get hot
May warp up in higher temperatures

Broiler Pan vs Baking Sheet: Head-to-Head Comparison

So which is one better? Let's compare them based on the following features:

Heat Resistance

Broiling pans are made of much thicker metal than baking sheets. Unlike many baking sheets, they won't warp when exposed to extreme heat.

Winner

Broiler Pan.

Capacity

A baking sheet offers a larger surface area. They can hold more steaks and chops, so you can use a baking sheet instead when serving more people.

Winner

Baking Sheet.

Fat Release

The rack of broiler pans allows fat and oils to drip away from your food. Because of this, you get to eat a less greasy yet drier meal. You can use marination or dips to build on its moisture instead.

Winner

Broiler Pan.

Non-Stick Surface

The design of a broiling pan won't give you any problems with remnants and juice sticking to your pan.

If you use a baking sheet even with a separate rack, you can't just use parchment paper to line your pan. You must use high-temperature oil or pan spray to provide a non-stick coating.

Winner

Broiler Pan.

Burn Prevention

A baking sheet provides even warming. The dishes you'll place on your baking sheet won't get scorched immediately, even if you leave them unattended for several minutes.

Winner

Baking Sheet.

What Different Pans Can You Use for Broiling?

Look for bakeware that specifies it's "broiler-safe." Aside from this, you can also look into the following broiler-safe cookware that can withstand short bursts of intense heat in your oven:

Cast-Iron Pan

Cast-iron cookware is widely used because of its great durability and conduction properties. It is made of thick and heavy non-stick metal, so you won't have to worry about leaving it unattended.

Compare frying pan vs skillet here to know more.

Roasting Trays

You can use a roasting tray with a stainless steel rack sitting inside it to imitate the design of your broiler pan. It's best to line your vegetable ingredients at the bottom of the pan to prevent your drippings from catching fire.

Compare the broiler pan vs the roasting pan here.

Aluminum Foil Trays

Aluminum foil can withstand a higher temperature. You can shape it into a tray for better containment or use disposable aluminum pans for easier cleanup.

What Different Pans Can You Use for Baking?

Baking uses lower temperatures, so you have more bakeware and materials.

Baking sheets made of aluminum are commonly used because they conduct heat efficiently. Other cookware materials include stainless steel, silicone, ceramic, and glass.

The following pans are specialized for baking desserts, but they can also be used to bake thicker foods, such as roasts and casseroles:

Standard Cake Pans

This bake-safe cookware comes in different shapes and sizes, but their volumes are often similar. This is to provide shape options without involving complicated partial recipe conversions.

Take, for example, the 6-inch round pan and the 8-inch round pan. Both pans offer 4-cup capacities. Another better example is the 9-inch round pan and the 8x8-inch square pan. They have different shapes, but they offer 8-cup capacities.

Springform Pans

Springform cake pans have a removable bottom interlocked with a spring-locked ring. The design is to facilitate easy serving so that cheesecakes and quiches don't have to be inverted anymore.

Muffin Tins

If you want smaller servings instead of having one big serving for your dish, you can bake them onto muffin tins. They have 12 to 36 concave cups in one bakeware.

Instead of your usual desserts, you can use these for savory baking eggs, sushi, or rice cups.

Loaf Pans

You can guess from the name that this bakeware is used for baking loaves of bread.

Loaf pans are also referred to as pound cake pans. They have high supporting walls, which hold up your mixture when the dough rises.

Instead of bread, you can also use this pan for baking lasagna and meatloaf.

Bundt Cake Pan

Bundt cake pans have a non-stick coating with a fluted or grooved shape and a center tube. Their shape facilitates even baking for the outer crusts.

Since these pans are made of heavy material, you can use them for recipes that need to be left in the oven for longer.

Angel Food Cake Pan

On the other hand, these pans have flat tops and smooth edges in addition to their tall center tube. These pans can also have a removable bottom to help remove cakes easily.

Broiler Pan And Baking Sheet FAQs

Here is additional information that might be helpful to you:

You can use a baking sheet or a roasting pan instead.

Use a sheet pan instead to achieve a toasted effect, as in bread or crisp vegetables. However, the broiler’s high heat can warp its thin material, so you might have to dispose of it afterward.

Use a roast pan instead if you don’t want your meat, fish, and veggies to cook in their fat. Make sure you place its rack to separate them from the drippings.

No, you can’t use a cookie sheet to broil food.

Unlike a baking sheet, a cookie sheet isn’t completely lined by an outside rim. Since a cookie sheet is often shallow or flat, it has no full rim lining to prevent food from spilling.

The rim lining of a cookie sheet is only for you to grab onto for putting the cookie sheet into the oven. As such, a cookie sheet is best for baking cookies or biscuits and never bread or other foods that may drip.

Broiler Pan Vs Baking Sheet Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Is Better for You?

Now that we know the difference between a broiler pan and a baking sheet, it's time to know when to use each one.

Use a Broiler Pan If...

You want to warm the exterior only. Similar to grilling, it sears the exterior of food only. Use it to achieve a golden-brown crust or a crown of melted cheese.
You're dealing with thin cuts of meat. It can't cook deep into your food. You'll have to use ingredients that are easily cooked.
You are in a hurry. If you don't have an hour to spare, resort to this pan.

Use a Baking Sheet If...

You need even cooking. This is for cooking the inside and through of food without the risk of burning its outside.
You're dealing with dense dishes. To ensure cooking their interior, you must bake your thick-cut meat and dense dishes first before using the sheet.
You have time to spare. Use this tool if you can wait hours or have something else to do while waiting.

Conclusion

Broiler pans and baking sheets may look similar, but they are built differently for different purposes.

Although one can substitute for the other at certain times, you can't expect the same quality regarding the results.

Use each one for the specific method they're meant for to ensure you and your family can enjoy well-made dishes.

Explore the variety of cookware and bakeware in your kitchen, starting with broiler and roasting pans.

They may look similar, but the main difference in their use depends on the direction of the heat source in your oven.

If that's unclear to you, read more about their differences and when it's best to use each one.

Broiler Pan Overview

The oven's broiler setting can cook food using, of course, the broiling method. But what is broiling?

Broiling is used to cook food at extremely high temperatures using direct heat from the top of the oven.

As such, it follows that a broiler pan cooks your favorite foods under very high temperatures while heat is distributed from the top of the oven.

But what does an oven-broiling pan look like?

Broiling pans have a flat surface and consist of a bottom pan and an upper pan. The higher pan is designed with a slotted base for the juice and meat drippings to drip onto the bottom pan while your dish is cooked.

Because of this, the lower pan is commonly called the drip pan.

Broiling pans are made of heavy metal or steel with a non-stick surface to withstand high temperatures. This includes enameled steel, cast iron, copper, and aluminum foil.

Check out the best broiler pan here.

What I like

Healthier Cooking - Broiling is a healthier method than frying using a frying pan vs. a skillet. It only uses the natural fat from vegetables, poultry, meat, and seafood in cooking.
Fat Removal - Cooking meat or fish on a broiler pan drains excess fat into the drip pan. This removes unwanted fat content from your dish.

What I Don't Like

Resulting Dryness - The design of a broiler pan naturally drains moisture from dishes. This often results in dryness in meat dishes.

Roasting Pan Overview

Roasting is also used to cook food at high temperatures. However, the heat is distributed from the bottom of the oven instead of the top, as in broiling.

The cooking methods may be similar, but their cookware is easier to differentiate. This is because a roasting pan has higher sides that resemble a tall sheet pan than a broiling pan. Instead of an upper pan, you get a metal rack for roasting pans.

This design facilitates a more even heat distribution, which allows the marinade to flow through. Ironically, this isn't best for coffee roasting.

Roasting pans usually come in stainless steel, copper, aluminum foil, and vitreous enamel-coated cast iron cookware. Most of these have a non-stick coating.

What I like

Moisture Retention - Roasting pans can cook meat and vegetable dishes that are tender and juicy since moisture can flow through the cookware.
Large Capacity - They can hold more food since these pans are deeper.

What I Don't Like

Heavy Construction - The roasting pan is often heavier than a broiler pan because of its design and capacity.

Broiler Pan vs Roasting Pan: Comparison of Features

Let's now compare these two pans side by side to know which one is superior.

Material - Broiler pans and roasting pans typically use the same materials. Stainless steel, hard anodized aluminum, enameled steel, and cast iron are commonly used. Both also come in aluminum foil pans for a disposable option.
WINNER: TIE
Size - Although using the same materials, broiling pans and roasting pans come in different sizes to accommodate the cooked food, ranging from small pork roasts to large turkey dishes. However, broiling pans are generally shallower, so their variety isn't as much.
WINNER: Roasting Pan
Design - A broiling pan is similar to a baking sheet regarding shallowness. It has two separate pieces: a slotted base and a drip pan. Roasting pans are made of a single deep pan and an optional metal oven rack. For how they cook food, each serves its purpose properly.
WINNER: TIE
Cooking Time - Broiling pans and roasting pans are both used for cooking food at high-temperature. However, the heat distribution is different. Heat comes from the base of the oven in roasting pans, while for broiler pans, heat comes from the top. Heat comes in contact with the food faster in broiler pans.
WINNER: Broiler Pan
Even Cooking - Broiler pans drain the dripping from the meat and sear food with high heat. On the other hand, roasting pans cook meat in their own juices and can use lower temperatures and broader heating elements to achieve an even internal temperature.
WINNER: Roasting Pan

Broiler Pan Vs Roasting Pan Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Is Best?

Now that we've specified the differences between these cookware pieces, here's when it's best to use each one:

Use a Broiler Pan If...

You want to sear your food. Broiling pans have a shallow base, as in a baking sheet. This construction makes using a broiler pan perfect for quickly searing or grilling food like steaks. Know the difference between the broiler pan vs the baking sheet here.
You need to extract excess fat from your food. Broiler pans have a slotted bottom and a drip pan that extracts the fats and juices from your food as it cooks.

Use a Roasting Pan If...

You want a slow cooker for large cuts of meat. If you want to cook a chicken or beef dish that needs to baste in its own juices, a roasting pan is your better option.
You want juicy meat cuts. Roasting pans are better because they cook meat in their own juices. You won't have to prepare a separate marinade or glaze to give you moist meat.

Conclusion

Broiler pans and roasting pans have different heat distribution designs.

What to use depends on the delicious recipes you want to cook. You can achieve a variety of dishes using these two pans even if you use the same ingredients, such as meat, poultry, vegetables, and seafood.

These cookware pieces are great must-haves in your kitchen because they each offer a low-calorie cooking method to promote healthy and yummy dishes in your home.

Aren't skillets and frying pans the same thing? Apparently not!

Most people use the terms interchangeably. Nonetheless, they still have their fair share of differences.

Only a professional chef will know exactly which pan or skillet suits certain food. But it wouldn't hurt to know which kitchen tool is better.

In this article, we'll talk about the frying pan vs skillet and their key differences. Keep reading!

Frying Pan Overview

A cast iron frying pan is usually called a skillet, while nonstick ones are simply called frying pans.

A pan is a type of metal cookware with a long handle used to cook food conveniently. A frying pan's specifically designed with a flat bottom, wide base, and rounded flared sides.

Frying pans are shallower and thinner because frying requires faster heating.

These frying pans have a non-stick chemical coating that prevents food from sticking to the bottom when cooking or frying.

A nonstick pan is more affordable, easy to clean, and convenient to cook with. It's particularly useful for sautéing more delicate food like eggs, vegetables, and fish.

What I like

Rust-resistant surface
Does not easily scratch
Thinner, shallower, and more lightweight
Faster cooking
Versatile
Requires less oil

What I Don't Like

Can easily burn food
Usually not oven-safe
Needs more attention

Skillet Overview

A cast iron pan and a carbon steel pan are called skillets.

A skillet is usually made of iron, alloyed with a small amount of carbon for hardening. It is a pan designed with a flat base, sloped or slanted sides, and a handle.

A cast iron skillet is deeper, much like a sauté pan. Its sloped sides help redistribute the food. Although skillets take longer to get hot, they retain heat for longer.

This quality makes them a good tool for searing a steak or cooking meat at high heat. They're ideal for stir-frying and fast-cooking dishes that need constant stirring or moving around the cooking surface.

Most skillets also come with a lid. They're put to good use for braising, which is the combination of pan-searing and slow-cooking in a sauce until the whole dish is tender.

You might also want to consider a broiler pan for your kitchen.

Here are the 3 common types of skillets according to their material:

Cast Iron Skillets

This is perhaps the most popular type of skillet. They're durable and long-lasting.

A cast iron skillet, however, requires seasoning to prevent food from sticking.

Aluminum Skillets

Aluminum skillets are perfect for cooking low-heat quick foods like bacon and eggs.

An aluminum skillet lasts longer when they're given a non-stick or ceramic coating. However, they're not suitable for extreme heat cooking since the coating can create hot spots.

They're not meant to be used in a dishwasher either, as dishwashers can damage their coating in the long run.

Stainless Steel Skillets

Stainless steel pans are popular among professional chefs. They are easy to clean and very durable. Plus, they can stand extreme temperatures, depending on their steel grade.

If you're considering the culinary arts as a career or are a hero in the kitchen, you better get a stainless steel skillet!

What I like

Great heat retention
Oven-safe
Comes with a lid
Thicker and deeper
Non-toxic and non-stick
Durable and long-lasting

What I Don't Like

Heavier
The handle can heat up fast
Some don't have a non-stick coating
Cast iron requires more maintenance

Frying Pans vs Skillets (Cast Iron) : Head-to-Head Comparison

When it comes to frying pans vs skillets, there's not much to argue. The only real difference is that skillets are not shallow. They're usually deeper than frying pans by about 2 inches and come with lids.

French skillets are even often mistaken as frying pans because they look very similar. But these skillets just happen to be a little more spacious and have higher sides.

You can cook the same dishes in both options. But if you're keen, check out these comparisons.

1. Material

Investing in durably made pans and skillets is the best way to go. They're often made with stainless steel, nonstick surfaces, ceramic, cast iron, and aluminum.

Nowadays, hard-anodized aluminum is the better option. But the difference in quality isn't too far from stainless steel.

Go for tri-ply or five-ply combinations of stainless steel and aluminum. These have excellent heat retention, heat distribution, and safety, whether you're using a skillet or a frying pan.

Winner

Stainless steel and aluminum skillets and pans.

2. Handle Construction

Pan-fried dishes often need to be shaken and flipped when stir-frying. Therefore, frying pans need longer handles for better tossing ability.

Plus, with the help of a wooden spatula, you'll have a pleasurable time in the kitchen!

Skillets tend to be used for more ingredients. So a sturdy handle is a must-have to carry the weight.

Ideally, both pans and skillets should have stay-cool handles that are securely riveted to their base.

Winner

Tie! Both cooking tools have sturdy handles.

3. Cookware Size

Skillets and pans are available in 3.5-inch to 17-inch diameters. The most popular are 8-inch, 10-inch, and 12-inch diameters.

The ideal size will depend on how many people you're cooking for and the type of meals you make.

A smaller pan or skillet is great for one- or two-person meals and quick bites.

An 8-inch frying pan is great for whipping up quick breakfast scrambles or a pan-fried fish with some vegetable sides.

Larger skillets are great to use for family-size portions and full-pan meals like stir fries and noodles.

Winner

8-inch, 10-inch, and 12-inch Pans.

4. Weight

Again, your choice will depend on your recipes, cooking methods, and needs.

A frying pan and skillet are both lightweight. They're not difficult to move across a stove.

Winner

Tie! Whether you're using a pan or skillet, they come in roughly the same weight.

5. Design and Purpose

Since fry pans are flat-bottomed and don’t have a lid, they work well with shallow frying, searing, and high-heat grilling.

Thanks to the tall and straight sides of frying pans, they're the tool to use when making eggs, pancakes, frittatas, and dry stir fry.

The vertical sides of sauté pans mean it's easier to pour liquid from them. They can be used to cook thick sauces, curries, and stews.

But the thin angled-out sides and flat bottom of skillets can cause a mess when cooking with a ton of liquid and ingredients, even if they're deeper than a frying pan.

A skillet is better than a sauté pan when cooking fewer things due to its smaller cooking area. But its even heat distribution is a great compromise!

Winner

Pans and Sauté Pans.

6. Evaporation Rate

Being able to control the moisture in your meal is key to excellent-tasting meals.

If you want faster thickening and cooking down of sauces, skillets will get the job done faster than a sauté pan.

That’s thanks to the flatter and wider surface of skillets and pans. Sauté pans, on the other hand, have a larger surface, so it’s harder to lose moisture.

If you plan to cook juicy and tender dishes, a sauté pan is the better option.

Winner

Skillets!

What Is a Sauté Pan?

The word “sauté” is a French word meaning “to jump.” But when it comes to food, it refers to cooking food with direct heat from the pan.

Sauté pans generally have a wider surface area with straight sides. Their shape makes them suitable for holding soups, stews, and curries.

Because these dishes are often cooked under lower temperatures for a long period, most sauté pans come with non-stick coatings.

If your recipe needs a good amount of liquid ingredients and not much stirring, like when cooking sauces for pasta, a sauté pan is perfect for the job!

There's also the broiler pan and roasting pan.

How Is a Sauté Pan Different From Frying Pans and Cast Iron Pans?

A sauté pan is shallow with straight sides, while skillets and frying pans have slanted sides.

Unlike a skillet or frying pan, a sauté pan isn't designed for a ton of shaking and flipping food around. You wouldn’t even dare once you’ve realized how heavy sauté pans can be!

You might want to know the difference between a broiler pan and a baking sheet too.

Frying Pan Vs Skillet FAQs

Do you need information about a skillet and a frying pan? Check out these FAQs!

A fry pan is one of the cooking vessels you will find in any kitchen. A skillet has the same functionality of cooking food as a frying pan but isn’t as shallow. It can be deeper by up to 2 inches.

Most cast iron skillets are more durable and versatile than non-stick pans. However, they do require more maintenance to prevent food from sticking to its patina when cooking.

A nonstick pan is easier to use and care for.

Nonetheless, both are capable of whipping up amazing food! It’s all up to the chef at this point.

A sauté pan, a skillet, and a frying pan use a flat cooking surface.

A grill pan has a nonstick coating with raised ridges that make char and grill marks on the food.

Frying Pan Vs Skillet Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Should You Use?

The difference between a frying pan vs a skillet is very minute. Whichever you have in the kitchen, you can still make delicious food for your friends and family.

But if you're still having trouble distinguishing them, follow these tips.

Use a Frying Pan If

You're looking for non-stick cookware with quick cooking capabilities that requires little to no oil to cook with.

Use a Cast Iron Skillet If

You prefer thicker, oven-safe, and deeper kitchen equipment that cooks meats evenly and whips up nice stir-fries.

Conclusion

You can perform the same cooking methods on either a skillet or a frying pan.

The right pan for you should be the one you're comfortable using in your daily kitchen routines.

A slow cooker is one of the best appliances to tenderize and get the best flavors out of our meats.

Most slow cookers become one of our kitchen go-to’s, next to having the best small crock pot.

Today, we will be introducing you to the different slow cooker sizes. We want you to find the best slow cooker to satisfy your cooking mission.

What Are the Different Slow Cooker Sizes?

Whether you’re cooking a feast for yourself, a friend, or a large family, you need to find the perfect slow cooker. This ensures you can satisfy a hungry crowd with your delicious cooking.

Let’s go through the different sizes and find the perfect crock pot for you.

1-2 Quarts

Cooking up small meals is much easier in a small slow cooker. It can whip a small batch of food perfect for you and two other friends!

Generally, a 1 to 2-quart slow cooker offers a decent cooking capacity. It cooks enough food to satisfy a hungry couple on a date night. You can even use it to serve a hot dip for your chips!

Drawing from our experience, the only drawback with a standard size slow cooker is fitting large cuts of meat and vegetables, especially if you’re using a one-quart slow cooker.

That said, we recommend cutting your ingredients smaller than you usually wood. The size is perfect enough for cooking small dishes at home.

Number of servings: Good for up to 2 persons | Ideal for: A person living alone | Starting price: $30 | Perfect for: Beans, dips, rice, sauces, and soups | Shape: Usually round shape

2-4 Quarts

The average crock pot size is usually anywhere between 2 to 4 quarts. It’s perfect for feeding a small family without ending up with too many leftovers.

Preparing meals for up to six people is a lot easier, and you don’t have to worry about going back and forth to the kitchen to whip up a delicious meal.

It’s perfect for roasting whole chickens or can sometimes serve as a rice cooker!

A 3-quart slow cooker provides the best compromise for whipping a small to medium amount of food.

Despite its cooking capacity, this slow cooker is still pretty compact. It can easily fit on your kitchen counter without it being too bulky.

Number of servings: Good for up to 3 persons | Ideal for: Small household | Starting price: $40 | Perfect for: Casseroles, starters, side dishes, and vegetables | Shape: Usually rectangular or round shape

5-6 Quarts

You should go for slow cookers weighing five and six quarts if you want to cook your favorite foods for large groups.

It’s enough to satisfy our food cravings and have leftovers to share with family.

Based on our first-hand experience, meal prepping with a medium to the large slow cooker is a breeze. Cooking a whole chicken with some side dishes won’t be a problem!

Just throw all your ingredients inside the crock pot and leave it to stew! A 5 to 6-quart slow cooker can satisfy your slow-cooking needs.

However, some may find a 6-quart slow cooker to be really large. At the same time, it also tends to be heavy, which makes it a hassle to bring during a picnic.

Number of servings: Good for up to 5 persons | Ideal for: A person living alone or a small household | Starting price: $50 | Perfect for: Deserts, mains, soups, and stews | Shape: Usually oval shape

7-10 Quarts

Large slow cookers are one of the best to have around the house when planning to host a party and feed a large family.

Batch cooking with a big pot is also much faster and more convenient when preparing meals.

You can whip a delicious and savory meal at home and share it during your next family outing! We’re sure you’ll wow them with your food.

The heating element on a larger slow cooker works perfectly, just like its smaller versions. It can heat up and cook evenly, ensuring your large roasts are perfectly cooked.

Because of its large size, there’s a reasonable expectation that it also comes with a large price tag.

Rest assured; this will be a worthy investment for slow cooking.

Number of servings: Good for up to 7 persons | Ideal for: A person living alone or a small household | Starting price: $60 | Perfect for: Meal prep, mains, roasts, and stews | Shape: Usually rectangular or oval shape

Things to Consider When Buying Slow Cookers

There are several slow cooker sizes and slow cooker brands out there. You won’t run out of products to choose from.

You can have over a hundred selections yet still find it challenging to find the best slow cooker for you.

To help you with your search, we’ve listed several factors to consider when looking for a slow cooker. This ensures you land only the best product out there.

1. Household Size

Always base the size of your slow cooker on the number of people you plan to feed at a time. In general, a smaller crock pot is perfect for feeding a small family.

However, if you want to feed a hungry crowd and still end up with a few extra servicing, the correct slow cooker size would be a large one.

With the different crock pot sizes out there, you’re sure you’ll be able to score only the best deal. Not just that, but it also helps you narrow down your search.

2. Type of Food to Cook

Certain crock pot sizes are best for certain food types. Take the case of a whole chicken, for example, where a large and oval-shaped crock pot would be better to use.

With that said, always keep in mind what type of food you plan to cook. This ensures they can fit your pot perfectly, and you don’t waste your ingredients.

You’ll risk overcooking your food when your pot is too big. Food tends to cook faster when it’s underfilled.

On the other hand, overcrowding your slow cooker means food will get cooked slower than usual.

3. Price

Thankfully, crock pots come in different price points.

There are many slow cooker brands out there that offer a reliable line of products, ranging from budget-friendly to the most expensive.

Always set a budget for yourself before buying a slow cooker. This helps you narrow your search, to ensure you score the perfect slow cooker for a certain price point.

Regardless of how much you’re willing to spend, ensure it also comes with an awesome set of features and versatility that can get your money’s worth.

4. Storage Space

If you only have limited kitchen storage, the best crock pot for you would be anywhere between 1 to 4 quarts.

It doesn’t take up too much storage space and looks like a small appliance.

Thus, find a slow cooker that will fit inside your kitchen storage. This ensures your counter doesn’t look too cluttered.

But if you have extra storage, you shouldn’t have any problem using large crock pot sizes. You can cook a feast enough to feed a large family.

5. Versatility

Finding a versatile and multifunctional kitchen appliance will be a good idea to get the most out of your slow cooker.

Regardless of what size crock pot you need, you won’t have trouble finding one with impressive functionality. You might even be surprised to find others that can double as pressure cookers!

Through the years, we’ve found a lot of uses for our slow cookers besides slow cooking. In some cases, we could even use the oven-safe bowl for baking some of our favorite dishes.

6. Weight and Maneuverability

The larger your slow cooker is, the heavier it becomes. Maneuvering around with a large crock pot can be challenging, especially if you go on a picnic.

The material of your crock pot can also affect its weight.

Take the case of stoneware and cast aluminum inserts, which could require some heavy lifting, especially if it's 10 quarts.

It isn’t exactly the wrong slow cooker to choose from, but it’s not the most ideal for bringing around. Thus, choose the right crock pot sizes you’ll be comfortable handling.

7. Accessories

We’re sure you want to get the most out of what you paid for, so having a few accessories in the packaging is always a welcome addition.

We always look forward to some of the usual accessories, including insulated bags and heat-resistant carrying handles!

Having a few extra accessories also ensures you can try different cooking styles in a single pot. You can try sautéing and browning meat to add flavor to your dishes.

What Rules Should You Remember When Cooking in a Crock Pot?

It’s no secret that crock pots are one of the handiest kitchen appliances. Through the years, we always get excited to test out the different crock pot sizes and how it fairs compared to others.

But before you get excited to start cooking, there are a few rules you should keep in mind to enjoy your crock pot.

1. Choose Meat Wisely

The beauty of using a crock pot is that you can tenderize even the toughest meat. Take lamb shanks and pork ribs, for example.

You can easily pull them apart with a fork, with the least resistance possible.

That said, make sure you choose the right type of meat for slow cooking. Drawing from our experience, we figured that choosing tough cuts of meat would be BETTER.

But that doesn’t mean you can’t cook tender cuts of meat like sirloin and steak. You can still use a slow cooker. However, it would be better to cook it on stovetops instead.

2. Layering Is Important

Learn how to layer your crock pot effectively so that you’re able to cook every ingredient properly.

Whether you’re cooking meats alone or meats and veggies together, layering them is important.

We always recommend putting tough cuts of meats or root crops at the bottom of your slow cooker or any ingredient which requires a long cooking time.

On the other hand, you can place vegetables at the topmost layer since they get cooked easily. You can take them out of the pot immediately once they’re done.

3. Understand the Recipe

You might find things complicated if it’s your first time using a crock pot.

Given the different crock pot sizes, knowing how to play around with the recipe may seem like rocket science.

So before you power on your slow cooker, take some time to understand the recipe you want to use.

What kind of temperature setting does it call for, and what crock pot sizes should you use?

Smaller slow cookers tend to heat up faster because of their small cooking surface, unlike a bigger pot, where you must carefully temper the crock pot's settings.

4. Use Half the Amount of Liquid

If your recipe calls for 4 cups of water, cut it in half and use 2 cups instead. One of the first things you need to remember is slow cookers keep moisture well.

That being said, you don’t have to worry about the liquids inside evaporating. No wonder slow cookers are perfect for cooking stews, sauces, and soups!

The same idea applies to a smaller slow cooker. Reduce the number of liquids in half to ensure you get the best results.

Note

If you’re cooking rice, you might need to add more liquid than you normally use.

5. Add Seafood and Dairy Last

If your ingredients call for seafood or dairy products, consider adding them last. If not last, at least a few minutes before they’re served.

Remember, both of these food items cook pretty fast. You’ll risk burning or overcooking them if you keep them inside a slow cooker for a long time.

To prevent any cooking mishaps in the kitchen, check out the different slow cooker recipes you can master at home.

How to Clean Your Slow Cooker Properly

Whether you have a two or 10-quart slow cooker, knowing how to clean them properly is important. This ensures your well-loved instant pot can last you a long time.

You might think putting your crock pot inside the dishwasher is enough.

Soaking it in warm soapy water might do the trick, but there are several things you can do to make sure you cover all your bases.

Let’s discuss cleaning your small and large slow cookers at home.

1. Don’t Use Abrasive Cleaners

Removing tough and stubborn spots can be challenging, and you might think you need to use abrasive cleaners to do the job. But this is the last thing you should use.

Unfortunately, abrasive cleaners such as scouring pads and steel wool can damage the coating of your slow cooker. You might have many scratches on your pan, which can be a big eyesore.

To prevent this from happening, use cleaning sponges and cloths instead. You can also use rubber spatulas to scrape off any hardened particles.

2. Don’t Soak Your Slow Cooker for Too Long

After braising and stewing for hours, oil has probably accumulated on the surface. Once the oil has hardened, it becomes hard to remove.

One of the solutions you probably have in mind is to soak it in warm water to remove any oily parts. But before you do this, STOP!

Yes, you can soak the pot but don’t leave it in for too long.

It may also affect the quality of your stoneware insert, which could mean you have to buy a new one anytime soon.

3. Make a Deep Cleaning Schedule

Consider deep cleaning your slow cooker once in a while. This ensures your slow cooker retains its perfect condition, even after many uses!

You can make your crock pot look brand new once again! And the best part, you can save yourself the trouble of buying a new slow cooker each time.

However, no deep cleaning can save your slow cooker from the usual wear and tear.

Slow Cooker Size FAQs

Before we leave with our parting words, we’ll answer some of the FAQs we get about slow cookers. Keep reading because you might learn a thing or two from what we’re about to share.

You can cook small meals even in a 10-quart slow cooker.

You don’t always have to cook meals in your pot to their maximum capacity, especially if there’s just one of you.

Make sure you get the measurements right so you still have enough food. Don’t worry because most recipes indicate how much food it serves.

Unfortunately, you can’t cook a large meal on a small slow cooker. We don’t have to expound on this, as the reason is apparent.

You won’t have difficulty finding slow cookers within the 5 to 7 quarts size range. It’s one of the most common and flexible sizes because it’s perfect for cooking small to medium meals.

It’s large enough to roast a whole chicken but also small enough to ensure you don’t have too many leftovers in your fridge.

On average, the LARGER the crock pot, the PRICIER it becomes. So in that aspect, large crock pots are more expensive than others.

But don’t worry because you can get a large crock pot without breaking the bank.

There are large crock pots out there that come with great value for money to make sure you get what you’re paying for.

Kitchen appliances of today come with neat and awesome features that can make your life in the kitchen a breeze.

You can leave your food to cook in your instant pot and work on other things!

Smartphone Syncing

Believe it or not, you can find “smart” slow cookers today that are highly advanced, so much so that you can pair your slow cooker with your phone, to control it wherever you are.

The beauty of this feature is you can turn on and off your slow cooker WITHOUT standing up and breaking a sweat.

You could be in a different room while you control this cooking vessel.

Consider getting a new slow cooker with this advanced feature! Despite this feature, you don’t have to worry about it working differently than your usual slow cooker.

You can enjoy it the same way as using your favorite slow cooker. Get straight to cooking your food without worrying about any learning curve.

Lid Locks

Never underestimate the power of having lid locks for your slow cooker. This small contraption is perfect for anyone who loves bringing their crock pot for a picnic.

Just lock the glass lid and go! You don’t have to worry about your pasta sauce spilling all over your car seat and have nothing to serve your friends.

You’d be surprised that even a 2-quart slow cooker would have glass lid locks. Your food can stay safe and warm inside your cooking pot.

Automatic Stirrer

Many slow cooker models today come with different accessories that can change how you enjoy your crock pot. Regardless of the sizes, make sure to look for accessories.

One of our favorite and most used accessories is the automatic stirrer. It makes sure you can cook soups and sauces without burning them.

Leaving your food to slow cook feels a lot better knowing you’ve got this feature to fall back on.

Warm Setting

Many slow cookers today come with an automatic warm setting that ensures your meals stay warm for hours after being cooked.

We love this feature because we can always expect a warm bowl of stew when we get home from a tiring day. Imagine your 6-quart slow cooker filled with braised beef you cannot devour!

Now that got us feeling hungry. No matter what size crock pot you have, an automatic warm setting will be very handy.

Digital Programmable Controls

A programmable slow cooker takes two-thirds of your work away.

You can set your crock pot to cook based on your settings, and that’s it! Even a basic digital timer can make your kitchen life easier.

The great thing about a programmable slow cooker is that it is a versatile kitchen appliance. Not only that, but most of them are also very energy efficient.

You don’t have to worry about your electricity bill skyrocketing, even after you leave your whole chicken to cook for many hours.

If you notice your crock pot blinking red light, ensure you know how to troubleshoot it.

In general, crock pots and slow cookers are the same. Crock-Pot is a famous slow cooker brand that has become a global household name.

So famous people have interchanged the two terms, referring to a slow cooker as a crock pot. Regardless of the term you use, they mean the same thing.

Both fare well if you want to cook food for long hours and even overnight!

Key Difference Between a Crock Pot and Slow Cooker

Despite the two terms being used interchangeably, there are key differences between the two, such as the heating element.

The heat element of slow cookers is usually found at the bottom of the pan. It provides even cooking, regardless of the different slow cooker sizes.

On the other hand, crock pots have heat elements on almost all sides, making them ideal for reaching a desired temperature.

Another thing is that crock pots usually have a removable stoneware insert, making it very easy to wash and even dishwasher-safe!

Conclusion

Regardless of how demanding your cooking needs are, there are many slow cooker sizes out there to suit you!

You can explore different slow cooker recipes and discover various cooking tips that can help you wow your friends and family.

Learning to cook the food you know people will love is always a dream.

We hope you enjoyed this article. Let us know in the comments what's the go-to size for your slow cooker. We’d love to hear your thoughts!

You can also check out take on the best broiler pan in the market, which lets you cook food you’ll be happy to serve.

If your crockpot starts blinking a red light, it indicates something is wrong.

Holding down the select and power buttons for 30 seconds while the slow cooker is plugged in may be necessary to reset it. After that, you should unplug the device and re-plug it.

However, if this doesn't resolve the issue, we also have more advice for what to do if your crockpot's red light starts blinking.

Surely, you'll get your crock pot back up and running in no time - continue reading this website article!

What Happens When a Crockpot Has a Blinking Light?

Depending on the model, a blinking light could mean several things, including a power outage, overheating, a broken lid, or a fault with the control panel.

When a crockpot (or any other electric home appliance) is in standby or sleep mode, the power light on the appliance likewise blinks or flashes.

The power light only indicates no power going to any of its heating functions. Therefore, a power light blinking may also indicate that its power-saving mode is active.

By pressing a button on the high or low setting of the crockpot, you may, however, end the power-saving mode.

A crockpot with a blinking light typically means an appliance issue.

Similar to how you need a slow cooker size guide before purchasing a new crockpot, it's vital to figure out why your pot lights turn red when you use them.

Ignoring the problem may result in the crockpot malfunctioning or perhaps posing a safety risk.

How to Fix Crock Pot Power Light Blinking?

The Best Small Crock Pots are equipped with built-in sensors to enhance the cooking experience of most.

And because they are electronic equipment, they are prone to issues.

In this section, we'll guide you through some simple steps to troubleshoot and fix the problem so you can get back to cooking your favorite food or meal.

1. Do Not Use Your Crock Pot if You Notice the Power Light Blinking

Safety should always be a top priority when fixing a slow cooker or crockpot because it is a kitchen stove or appliance dealing with an electrical system, heat, and potentially heavy or sharp iron parts.

A slow cooker can be hazardous to most people if it functions incorrectly.

For example, an electrical short could cause an electric shock, or a broken lid could cause hot liquids to spill and cause burns.

Therefore, following the manufacturer's instructions carefully when repairing a slow cooker or consulting a professional electrician first thing is important.

Safety always comes first, so only attempt easy solutions within your knowledge or skill level.

2. Check the Outlet You Plug Into

Check the outlet you're plugging it into.

The outlet might malfunction, making the crockpot or its lights blink. Ensure any removable cords or plug you use are in good working order and have no blown fuses or faulty connections.

Try to plug another device into an adjacent outlet to determine if it's working correctly or if the plug source is powered.

If the other plugged device does not work, you must repair or replace the outlet.

In most cases (for most people), after they plug in another new appliance like a mixer, blender, or iron - and it works, the outlet is not the issue.

Try the next troubleshooting step.

3. Plug the Crock Pot Back in if It's Unplugged

If you had previously unplugged your crockpot and now see the power light blinking, try plugging it back in.

The crock pot power light may keep blinking due to an electrical failure or a loose connection; reconnecting the crockpot after disconnecting it usually fixes the issue.

Before turning the crockpot on, ensure the socket plug is operational, and the lid is securely seated.

If the blinking light persists, move on to other troubleshooting steps or contact the manufacturer or a qualified electrician.

4. Reset Your Circuit Breaker

It may be time to reset your circuit breaker.

Sometimes a high temperature, energy surge, or electrical overload can cause the circuit breaker to trip, which can affect the performance of your crockpot.

Locate your fuses and identify the breaker that controls the outlet. Turn the breaker off, wait a few minutes, and then turn it back on.

This will reset the circuit breaker and may resolve the issue with your crockpot.

5. Reset Your Outlet Switch

If none of the previous troubleshooting tips still worked, you may need to reset your outlet switch, as there might be no energy going to any of its heating functions.

Some outlets have a built-in plug that can trip and cause the crock pot power light to blink.

To reset and stop the blinking lights, locate the outlet plug and look for a small switch on the faceplate. After, please turn it off and wait a few seconds before turning it back on.

6. Replace Your Outlet Switch/Fuse

The outlet switch/fuse replacement is your final hope to personally fix your slow cooker and continue your cooking experiences.

Your wall socket contains the fuse that powers your slow cooker.

A broken switch/fuse could result in electrical short and loose connections (breakers tripped) that would impair the crockpot's functionality.

Find the socket where your crockpot's plug is, unplug it, then carefully remove the faceplate.

Look for any evidence of damage, such as burning, charring, or corrosion, on your new appliance.

Replace the wall plug with a new one of the same rating if you see any damage.

Carefully turn off the electricity at the source before making repairs.

Crockpot Red Light FAQs

This FAQ will explore common questions and easy solutions to help you troubleshoot, explain, answer confusions, maintain, and save your slow cookers!

The crockpot power light blinks when the unit has been plugged in, but it’s not turned on.

However, several reasons can cause the lights to flicker, including:

Loose connections
A defective extension cord or power strip
Breakers tripped
Malfunctioning thermostat
Overheating or hot crockpot temperature
Wrong wirings or wiring overload
Problem with the electrical system in your home

The crock pot power light may also keep flashing if there has recently been an electricity spike or outage.

If you have tried several basic troubleshooting to save your cooker and none works, YES, YOU SHOULD.

Although following some troubleshooting steps, such as checking the socket and the adjacent outlet, resetting the circuit breakers or control, or replacing the extension cord or power strip, you may be able to fix the issue of your power light blinking.

Like the best broiler pans, crock pots are designed to cook food at a low temperature over an extended period, making them a convenient and easy way to prepare food and meals.

However, if a crock pot is not functioning correctly, it can be hazardous to the user.

Note also that if the crockpot is still under warranty, attempting repairs yourself may throw away or void the warranty.

If the power light blinking problem persists, it’s best to contact the manufacturer or a qualified electrician for an answer.

Conclusion

Don't let blinking or flashing red lights on your crockpot spoil your cooking plans!

It may be concerning, but worry less and follow the above steps.

So, whether you need to check the outlet, plug and unplug, reset the circuit breakers, or replace the removable cords, don't hesitate to take action and get your crockpot back in top shape.

For cracked pot concerns, you may check our website for a Can I Use A Cracked Crock Pot? article.

Using a cracked crock pot can be a safety hazard and is generally not recommended as it can be unsafe and may cause food to leak into the electrical components.

Some might be tempted to use a repaired appliance to save money or because of the lack of awareness of possible risks.

So it is important to understand the risks involved and decide whether to continue using a cracked slow cooker or replace it with a new one.

Read through this article and find tips on how to keep your crock pot safe and functional.

Why Can/Can I Not Use a Cracked Crock Pot?

A cracked slow cooker or crock pot is not recommended because it may cause a safety hazard, lead to further damage, void warranty (if it is still covered), and look unattractive.

1. Safety Hazard

A cracked pot can pose a safety hazard because it can cause the content to leak or spill, leading to burns, electric shock, or other injuries.

It may also not heat food evenly, resulting in undercooked or overcooked food.

2. Potential Further Damage

Using a cracked crock pot can cause the crack to worsen, which could make the appliance unusable or unfixable in the future.

If the crack becomes too large, the crock pot may not be able to contain the contents.

3. Warranty Void

If your crock pot is still under warranty, using it with a crack can void it — making it difficult to get replacement parts or repair if it stops working properly.

4. Not Aesthetically Pleasing

While this may not be a safety issue, a broken crock pot can be unsightly and detract from your dining area's appearance.

Here are some cases where you can continue using your crock pot.

The crack is very small and does not affect the integrity of the crock pot
The water doesn't leak out
You have assessed that it is safe to use

Otherwise, checking for the best small crock pot is another option.

What Does the Crack Look Like?

Some cracks may be barely visible, while others may be more noticeable. The appearance of the crack varies depending on the size and location of the crack.

If the crack is SMALL, it may look like a hairline fracture that is difficult to see. In some cases, it may appear as a small, shallow groove or indentation on the surface of the crock pot.
If the crack is more noticeable and BIGGER, it could look like a jagged line or a network of interconnected lines.

The crock pot may have a crack on the bottom or sides, and additional damage indicators like chipping or flaking may also be present.

Regardless of how the crack appears, it is crucial to take it seriously and determine whether it is worthwhile to continue using the pot.

Note

If you also start noticing a blinking red light, here’s what to do if the crockpot is blinking red light.

Reasons Why Crock Pots Crack During the Cooking Process

Crock pots or slow cookers crack while cooking due to a sudden temperature change, placing a cold crock pot on a hot surface, or using the crock pot on a stovetop or in an oven.

Let's look at these three main causes of slow cooker failure.

1. Cooking Frozen Food Out of the Freezer

Adding cold or frozen ingredients to a hot crock pot causes drastic temperature change — where high temperatures drop suddenly.

This affects the cooking time and quality of the food and may result in tiny hairline cracks in your slow cooker dish that often go unnoticed.

Thaw the crock pot before adding frozen meat or poultry, ensure the lid is covered, adjust the cooking time, or use a food thermometer to ensure the slow cooker can withstand high temperatures.

2. Refrigerating Your Crock Before Cooking With It

This practice also causes drastic temperature changes in your slow cooker, causing the chilled ceramic insert to heat up and crack.

Putting your ingredients in the fridge overnight might seem like a great idea to save time and prepare breakfast faster in the morning.

Still, it is not recommended to refrigerate slow cookers before using them.

Doing so can pose food safety risks, interfere with the cooking process, and foster the growth of dangerous bacteria.

For safety tips, move the food to a different container and put it in the fridge or refrigerator until you're ready to cook food in a slow cooker.

Start with a clean, dry crock pot at room temperature before adding ingredients and starting the cooking process.

3. Placing Your Crock Directly on the Burner

Slow cookers are designed to be used with a heating element built into the pot's base; therefore, placing the pot directly on a stovetop burner can also cause cracks, breaks, or, worse, create a fire hazard.

Most slow cookers are typically made of ceramic, stoneware, or other materials not designed to withstand direct heat from a stovetop burner.

The kitchen stove's heating element can create hot spots on the pot, which can ignite any spills or food particles on the pot, or the top of the crock won't receive enough heat, and the bottom will receive too much.

Reasons Why Crock Pots Crack After the Cooking Process

Crock pots or slow cookers crack even after cooking food for several reasons, such as submerging the hot crock in cold water or putting it down too hard.

1. Placing a Hot Crock in Cold Water

Let the hot slow cooker cool down naturally before exposing it to cold water or any other extreme and sudden temperature changes.

This sudden and drastic change in temperature can also cause the material to expand or contract too quickly, leading to fractures or other damage.

Reviewing the manufacturer's guidelines for properly handling and caring for your slow cooker is also a good idea to prevent any possible damage.

2. Placing the Crock Down Too Hard on Solid Surfaces

Placing a crock down too hard on a hard surface can cause it to crack or break, especially if it is made of a brittle material such as ceramic or glass.

The impact from a sudden force can create a stress point that weakens the material and causes slow cookers to fracture.

Be gentle when setting it down, and be sure the surface can handle its weight.

Can You Fix a Cracked Crockpot or Slow Cooker?

In some cases, it may be possible to fix cracked slow cookers, but it depends on the severity and location of the crack.

You can purchase replacement pots and a cracked crockpot insert or ceramic insert that will fit into the slow cooker's crock to keep using the base, provided that the machine, lid, and shell are not harmed or shattered.

If the crock is beyond repair, replacing the slow cooker with a new one is recommended to ensure the safe and reliable cooking of delicious recipes.

How to Fix a Cracked Ceramic Crock Pot?

Cracks in a ceramic crock pot can affect its functionality and pose safety risks during use.

In this section, we will explore the steps you can take to fix a cracked slow cooker, as well as the different considerations to ensure the safety and effectiveness of your repair.

1. Adhesive Glue

If you have a cracked slow cooker crock (dishware), it may be possible to repair it using adhesive glue designed for ceramic use.

Cyanoacrylate, a chemical that hardens when exposed to air, makes up super glue epoxy.

Here are the steps to follow to fix cracked slow cookers using adhesive glue:

Ensure the crack's surface is clean and clear of dust or debris before using any adhesive.
Spread the ceramic adhesive glue evenly over the hairline crack. Avoid using too much glue, which may make the crack more noticeable.
Allow the glue to dry completely.
Test the repair by filling the slow cooker with enough liquid (use a measuring cup) and turning it on.
Monitor the cracked pot closely during constant use to ensure the repair is holding up and the slow cooker is functioning properly.

2. Hot Milk

You may have heard you can patch a surface crack by making the milk boil in a crock pot or bowl for about 20 minutes.

We believe this ancient method of using hot milk is a temporary fix.

While hot milk may temporarily fill slow cookers' cracks, it will not provide a long-lasting repair.

The heat from the hot milk may cause the crack to expand or even shatter the roasting pan or canning pot, making the damage worse.

Over time, the crack will likely reappear, and the hot milk will not hold up to the wear and tear of normal use.

3. Cracked Stoneware Fixing With an Epoxy

Epoxy in the putty form can be used as a filler to patch holes, cracks, and other imperfections in a ceramic material (cookware and bakeware) and act as an adhesive.

Unlike super glue, epoxy contains two different substances or components that must be mixed to make it effective. These components are called epoxy and a hardener.

When mixed, a chemical reaction allows the epoxy to cure or harden.

Once it has hardened, you can sand it to provide a firm, non-stick coating and smooth surface finish on your slow cooker or instant pot.

Cracked Crock Pot FAQs

These questions aim to address users’ common concerns and solve their problems.

Slow cookers crack — no matter how small — leads to bigger danger.

Using a crock pot with a hairline crack is unsafe, as a small crack in a slow cooker can potentially lead to bigger danger over long periods.

This can weaken the structural durability of the slow cooker and increase the risk of it breaking or shattering, which could be very dangerous once hot food or liquid, like milk, spills out.

Yes. Similar to how all types of rice cookers are used, slow cookers are made to be kept on for extended periods, so leaving one on overnight is entirely safe.

However, you must ensure the slow cooker is positioned on a secure, heat-resistant, flat surface and that no flammable things are nearby.

As the dish may cook unevenly or overflow, ensuring the slow cooker is not overfilled and the lid is secured is also a good idea.

Eating food from a cracked ceramic insert may not be safe.

Bacterial growth can develop from food leftovers that are left behind or that sink into your already cracked insert.

Additionally, some crockpots may contain chemicals unsafe for consumption, such as lead or cadmium.

The risk of lead leaching can also be triggered by the contamination of chemicals or by acidic food that releases more lead when heated.

Yes, any electrical home appliance – even the best broiler pan – can catch fire.

But, if used properly and maintained according to the manufacturer’s instructions and there’s no manufacturing defect, the risk of a slow cooker catching fire is very low.

Additionally, modern slow cookers are designed with safety features such as automatic shut-off and temperature sensors that will prevent the slow cooker from overheating and causing a fire.

However, it is still important to use caution when using a slow cooker to keep food safe. Always check the manufacturer’s instructions or any manufacturing defects before using.

Ensure you keep flammable materials away and that your slow cookers have no broken switches or frayed cords.

Although most are dishwasher-safe, slow cookers are not designed to be used in a stovetop oven or are not oven-safe.

Even the lid is not oven safe as it is made of plastic components.

Slow cookers are designed to be used on a countertop or other flat surfaces. They are intended for slow, low-heat cooking.

The internal components of a slow cooker are not designed as oven-safe to withstand the extreme temperatures in a microwave oven when you cook or boil.

Putting a slow cooker in the oven could make all slow cookers crack, overheat, and cause a fire.

Conclusion

Crockpots have become the cooker for people who want delicious, slow-cooked food but don't have time to stand by the stove.

While it may be tempting to continue using a slow cooker with a small crack, it's important to prioritize safety in the kitchen and replace a cracked slow cooker as soon as possible.

Taking precautions, regular maintenance, proper handling, and following the manufacturer's instructions are essential to ensuring safe and enjoyable slow-cooked meals.

Who doesn't love rice? It goes well with any food, especially your favorite Asian dishes. It's become a staple in every household across different parts of the globe.

But cooking rice is a tricky procedure other people have yet to master. Nonetheless, it's a fast and fun process everyone should try to learn.

What better way to learn how to cook rice than knowing which type of rice cooker you should use? Today, we'll help you find the most awesome rice cooker you need for your home.

What Are the Different Types of Rice Cookers?

Rice cookers function the same way. You end up with a fresh bowl of steaming and soft hot rice that can get you salivating for your next meal.

Based on our first-hand experience, there's something about having perfectly cooked rice that can complete our meal.

And the best way to achieve this is to have the right rice cooker for the job. Let's go through the different types of rice cookers and find which of them is for you.

1. Basic Rice Cooker

As its name suggests, a basic rice cooker is a straightforward kitchen appliance that cooks rice. It's one of the best kitchen appliances without any thrills.

However, remember that basic rice cookers have no fancy features. If at all, it can only warm and cook rice as you expect it to. It has a reliable heating element, so you're sure it cooks rice evenly at all times.

The inner pot is commonly made of stainless steel, which makes it a highly affordable option. Indeed, you can cook high-quality rice without it getting compromised.

2. Digital Rice Cooker

Digital rice cookers are just like your basic rice cooker. The only difference is that digital rice cookers sport an easy-to-use interface thanks to their digital settings.

Drawing from our experience, setting your desired temperature and cooking time is very easy. You can set your rice cooker however you want your rice to end up.

What we love about digital rice cookers are their flexible cooking options. You can cook other foods, such as steaming vegetables or rice cakes.

3. Electric Rice Cooker

Electric rice cookers are perfect for anyone with limited home storage space. They usually come compact and cook up to two cups of rice or more.

The beauty of electric rice cookers is they're incredibly easy to operate. They're a plug-and-play appliance that can serve you delicious rice!

You can have cooked rice waiting for you when you get home. It can keep the rice warm until you've turned it off.

4. Gas Rice Cooker

Gas rice cookers are your traditional kitchen appliance. It can produce high heat results, which could be good or bad for cooking rice.

For us, gas rice cookers are perfect if you want to heat any leftover rice or cook porridge. It's also perfect for cooking white rice, but you must learn how to temper the heat.

Once you've mastered this art, you can cook great rice with your gas cooker. You can even explore other grains, like when you cook quinoa, brown rice, and white rice.

5. Induction Rice Cooker

Induction rice cookers work differently than your usual rice cooker. Instead of boiling water to cook rice, it uses a different heating element.

We're always amazed at how perfectly induction rice cookers can make rice. All the grains manage to be fully cooked and soft, despite not being boiled like the traditional process.

You don't have to worry about uncooked rice when using this appliance. Instead, you can expect warm and fluffy rice each time!

6. Multi-Functional Rice Cooker

We love multi-functional rice cookers. It makes perfectly cooked rice, and you can enjoy a wide range of functions from it.

One of the beauties of this rice cooker is exploring different cooking types, like steamed fish and vegetables. Sometimes, you can even use the rice cooker as a slow cooker.

However, multi-functional rice cookers tend to be pricier than others. But considering all the bonus features, functionalities, and other dishes you get, it's pretty worth it.

7. Smart Rice Cooker

You can find almost any "smart" appliance, including your rice cooker. We've tested different rice cookers during our time, and smart rice cookers were a lot of fun to use.

This type of rice cooker has built-in features that can adjust how your rice is cooked for the best results. You hardly have to do anything else.

Some are programmed to release excess moisture or set to an automatic keep warm setting. There are also others where you can link the rice cooker to your phone!

How Does a Rice Cooker Work?

Rice cookers are so easy to use, although there might be a learning curve for those who want to try their luck with gas cookers.

But regardless of what type of rice cooker you use, it can provide a wide range of functions, such as cooking rice and preparing food.

Through the years, we've found multi-functional rice cookers handy in the kitchen. We can cook rice, steam vegetables, or use the appliance as a slow cooker.

And the best part is that it won't compromise the quality of your rice and other foods!

Cooks Rice

At its core, a rice cooker cooks rice. You'll have the same results whether you want to end up with sushi rice or just your regular cup of rice.

But through the years, rice cookers have evolved. It has changed how people cook their rice at home.

Take the case of rice cookers which can allegedly remove starch from the rice, perfect for those on a keto diet. Some would even prefer using an aroma rice cooker over your standard one.

Prepare Other Foods

Rice cookers have evolved so much that other rice cookers let you enjoy different cooking styles. It's similar to having the best small crock pot where you can do many things.

Gone are the days when you'd be limited to making sushi rice or steamed vegetables.

Today, you can even leave your favorite foods to cook in a rice cooker with relative ease. You can also set your rice cooker to a long cook time to double it as a slow cooker.

You might even be surprised that you can sauté some vegetables in the pan. All you need is olive oil and some herbs for your base.

A rice cooker may even come with various accessories like a measuring cup and steamer basket, which can affect how you use this kitchen appliance.

How to Choose the Best Rice Cooker?

In our many years of testing and reviewing the best rice cookers, we know how challenging the job is. There are different types of rice cookers, and knowing where to begin is no easy task.

This being the case, we've devised a plan to help you find the perfect rice cooker that can get your money's worth.

Power

Rice cookers are generally powerful, especially electric ones. At the end of the day, it depends on how much power you need and how much rice you'll cook.

An electric rice cooker is generally more powerful than a standard rice cooker. It can evenly heat your rice cooker even if you cook in large quantities.

You'd also want to ensure that the inner pan of your rice cooker is capable of high heat without ending up with burnt rice.

Unfortunately, not all rice cookers have this feature, which could be troublesome.

Amount of Rice

A good rice cooker may vary in size, depending on how much rice you need to cook. For us, the bigger the rice cooker, the better!

If you're only cooking rice for yourself and a friend, smaller rice cookers are enough, regardless of the rice grains you're cooking. You might be surprised that even smaller rice cookers have a steam basket.

But if you're cooking up a feast and want to feed a hungry crowd, cooking in a large rice cooker would be the best. You can cook enough rice without spending too much time.

Cooking and Warming Capabilities

Most rice cookers have a cooking and warming mode. These two are the usual features of rice cookers, so you don't have to worry about doing a separate search for them.

Never underestimate the power of this simple feature. If you always want a hot steaming bowl of rice, this feature will be a lifesaver.

You can leave your rice to cook and return with a fresh rice bowl.

Ability to Cook Other Grain Types

Keep in mind that certain rice cookers work better with certain types of grains.

Take, for example, the case of white rice, which works well in just about any rice cooker. The same goes when you plan to cook brown rice, although it requires a different cooking time and procedure.

Luckily, some advanced rice cookers already have presets for different types of grains. You can ensure you get the best flavor and aroma from your rice.

What Features to Look For in the Best Rice Cooker?

If you're after value for money, we recommend looking for a rice cooker that comes with an impressive set of features. You'll get a bang for your buck and end up with delicious cooked rice all the time!

Let's go through the different features you need to look for.

Automatic Shut-Off Feature

An automatic shut-off feature is one of the simplest features you can look for in a good rice cooker.

No matter how simple this feature is, it plays an important role in keeping things convenient in the kitchen.

As its name suggests, the rice cooker automatically shuts off once the rice cooks. It automatically sets the rice cooker to warming mode, giving you a hot and fresh cup of rice.

This is perfect for people who are always on the go without worrying about unnecessary procedures when making rice.

Dishwasher Safe

A dishwasher-safe rice cooker saves you much time after a tiring cooking day. Just remove the contents of your rice cooker with a rice paddle, and pop it inside your dishwasher!

That's one less thing you have to worry about. Just be sure to keep in mind which parts are dishwasher-safe or not.

Usually, it's the removable interior that's always dishwasher-safe. To be sure, always check the product information.

Programmable Settings

A rice cooker with pre-programmable settings? Now that sounds like a dream. You can set your rice cooker to your desired temperature and cooking time.

You can cook your rice and leave it when you're in a rush. You hardly have to do anything but set your cooker to your desired settings, regardless of using a six-cup rice cooker.

Perfecting the settings may be challenging initially, and you might not have the best-cooked rice.

But explore the different settings, and you'll find your favorite presets to cook in, in no time. You'll be able to make the most out of your six-cup rice cooker!

Removable Interior

Some rice cookers typically have an inner pan. We will discuss each type to know what works best for you.

Ceramic Pan

Ceramic pots are great heat conductors. You can expect an even distribution of heat, making sure you don't find spots of burnt or uncooked rice in your pot.

However, keep in mind that ceramic pans are heavier than your usual inner pots. They also break easily, so you won't be able to use them like you can't use a cracked crock pot.

Also, ceramic pans tend to be pricier than other pots. This being the case, others would prefer a non-stick coating pan over this one.

Non-Stick Pan

If you don't want difficulty scooping your rice out of a rice cooker, we highly recommend non-stick inner pots. This is the least of your problems, and you'll surely get every grain!

The non-stick coating on the pans generally lasts for a long time. However, they do tend to wear down. Through time, you'll notice some of the coating peeling off.

In worse cases, you might find some coats stuck to the cooked rice. Watch out for this because ingesting the coating may be hazardous.

Once you notice the coating peeling off, consider getting a new rice cooker. If not, you might find the inner pot to be replaceable.

Stainless Steel Pan

Most rice cookers come with a stainless steel insert. They're highly durable and withstand high heat well.

Unfortunately, we did notice that cooking with stainless steel pots tends to have uneven cooking. You must ensure you temper the heat properly and set the right settings.

Thankfully, stainless steel inserts are highly affordable and accessible. You can easily replace your old inserts with new ones!

Rice Cookers Types FAQs

After many years of reviewing different types of cookers and studying them, we always receive a lot of questions about this handy kitchen appliance.

We finally decided to answer some of them here, information which we’re sure will help you in your quest to find a great rice cooker.

Yes, induction rice cookers are very safe to use. You don’t have to worry about it exploding on you and breaking down anytime soon!

However, just like most appliances, you have to be careful of the wiring of your rice cooker.

Ensure to observe the proper safety procedures, like touching any exposed wires or placing the wires in water.

Regardless of how much you’re willing to spend, you’ll be able to find the perfect rice cooker for you. Generally, the average price of rice cookers can range between $10 to $300.

Basic rice cookers come with an affordable price tag since they have no fancy or complicated features. This is a good pick if you’re looking for a budget option.

Nevertheless, there are still affordable rice cooker options that already come with advanced features. At the end of the day, the price difference boils down to its build and quality.

You might also chance upon an expensive rice cooker with an awesome set of features you wouldn’t want to miss out on.

Whatever you end up with, just be sure you find the most awesome rice cooker for the price, given the different features it comes with, if any.

We can’t give you a specific number regarding the lifespan of rice cookers. But generally, you can expect this kitchen appliance to last up to 5 to 10 years.

Keep in mind, however, that this range varies depending on several factors, such as the following:

Maintenance – keep your rice cookers clean and follow the specified cleaning instructions. This simple solution can help you keep your rice cooker longer.
Quality – most rice cookers come in exceptional quality. However, find a rice cooker with durable, long-lasting materials like stainless steel.
Storage – believe it or not, where you store your rice cooker affects its lifespan. We always recommend storing your rice cooker in a clean and spacious cabinet.
Usage – the more you use your rice cooker, the closer you are to needing to replace it. This shouldn’t cause you any alarm as it’s part of the daily wear-and-tear of any appliance.

The type of rice cooker you use can affect your overall cooking experience. Take the case of a basic rice cooker versus a digital one.

Basic rice cookers are pretty straightforward to use. The challenge, however, is knowing how to balance the rice and water ratio.

Unlike digital rice cookers, for example, you can automatically set the settings how you want. You don’t have to guess anymore how to get perfectly cooked rice each time.

That said, make sure you find the right rice cooker that will suit your kitchen demands. This can make your job much easier, giving you a hassle-free cooking experience.

Contrary to what others think, rice cookers don’t affect the taste of your food. Your rice will taste the same regardless of the cooker you choose.

The only reason why taste may be affected is when you don’t cook your rice properly, such as undercooking or overcooking it.

Take the case of brown rice, for example, which requires a different cooking process and longer cook time to get its grain soft.

Conclusion

Now that you know of the different types of rice cookers, what are you waiting for? It's time to cook yourself a warm bowl of rice.

Remember, smaller rice cookers are perfect for only cooking one or two cups of rice. But to satisfy a hungry crowd, you'll need larger rice cookers.

We hope you enjoyed this article! Let us know in the comments which type of rice cooker is your favorite and why!

You can also check out the best broiler pan you might need in your kitchen.

Have you recently purchased a Nutribullet?

From frozen fruit smoothies to nuts to vegetables, Nutribullet is an all-around appliance for your blending needs!

In this article, we walk you through using a Nutribullet Blender in 11 easy steps to make the most out of your machine.

How to Use a NutriBullet Blender [11 Easy Steps + Tips and Tricks]

A Nutribullet is a powerful blender that can crush ice or packs of frozen food for any nutritious drink of your choice!

Let's look at 11 easy steps on how to use your Nutribullet:

Step 1. Choose Between Extractor and Milling Blades

A Nutribullet can be equipped with two blades: an extractor blade and a milling blade.

An extractor blade is the standard for Nutribullet blenders. It is intended for chopping, mixing, and grating food.

It can be used for ingredients like oats, seeds, and frozen fruit packs.

Meanwhile, milling blades turn dry ingredients into fine-grained foods for all kinds of recipes.

Step 2. Place the Blender on a Level Surface Near the Plug

Before using a Nutribullet, you must remember to place it on an even surface like a counter or table.

Plug in the power base and choose the size of your cup.

A Nutribullet includes two cups: a short cup and a tall cup. The short cup has an 18 oz. capacity, while the tall cup has a 24 oz. capacity.

These cups can also double as drinking glasses. Many customers note that this gives Nutribullet an edge over Vitamix, its closest competitor.

Step 3. Fill the Cup with Your Chosen Goodies

Nutribullet is designed to extract the most nutrients when blending.

Take all the necessary ingredients and chop them into quarters to fit them better in the cup.

You can use vegetables, fruits, and other food to make a smoothie or any blended recipe.

Try seeds or nuts if you want to add powdery toppings you can eat with yogurt.

Step 4. Don't Forget the Liquid

Make sure to put enough liquid in the blender. The less liquid you put in, the thicker your drink will be.

You can add water, milk, or any liquid you like. For soups, you can also use stock.

Do NOT go over the fill line to prevent overspills.

Step 5. Screw the Blade Tightly on the Cup and Press the Cup onto the Power Base

When the cup is filled, flip and press it onto the power base.

The base has two notches, while the cup has two bumps. Align them, then twist the cup clockwise.

Firmly secure the cup to start the blender's motor. The blender will automatically mix the food.

Blitz for a few seconds or until thoroughly blended.

Stop the blending process by twisting the cup counterclockwise and lifting it.

Step 6. Loosen Up Stubborn Ingredients as You Blend

Sometimes, you might encounter stubborn food stuck in the blade, especially chunky fruits or vegetables.

You can tap or shake the cup to loosen the food to ensure an even mixing.

Alternatively, you can shake the entire Nutribullet without removing the cup to dislodge any ingredients.

Step 7. Use the Resealable Lids to Save Unfinished Drinks

When it's done, you can take out your cup.

A Nutribullet is compatible with resealable lids if you want to drink your smoothie later.

Place the lid, and you can refrigerate your blended recipe for up to 2 days.

Step 8. Place the Cup on the Dishwasher's Top Rack

Cleaning your Nutribullet properly is vital to keeping your blender in tip-top shape.

First, disassemble all parts and accessories of yourNutribullet.

Then, to clean the lid and cups, simply put them in any dishwasher and wash them on a normal cycle.

Note

Nutribullet blades and base should NOT be placed in the dishwasher.

Step 9. Wash it Up with Warm, Soapy Water

Rinse the cup and the blade with warm water and dish soap.

Do not take out the gasket when cleaning the blade. The gasket is the rubber seal that keeps your blade in place when you use the Nutribullet.

Step 10. Clean the Base with a Damp Rug

Unplug the Nutribullet base before washing it.

Unlike the cups, the base should only be hand-washed. Take a damp rag or sponge and use it to wipe away any residue to prevent any accidents.

Step 11. Blend Soap on Stubborn Residue

If you're having trouble removing stubborn residue in your Nutribullet, you'll need to use the milling blade.

Fill the cup with two-thirds soapy water and let it soak for 5 minutes. Afterward, affix it to the base, then blend for a few seconds.

NutriBullet vs. Magic Bullet: Which is Better?

Even if you're new to blenders, you've probably heard of Nutribullet and Magic Bullet.

Although the same company makes both blenders, there are distinct differences between the two.

A Magic Bullet is a compact blender designed for buyers on a budget. It's a great starter option for those who want to incorporate blended recipes in the kitchen.

That said, a Magic Bullet is not strong enough to completely crush harsh ingredients like celery or ice.

We thus recommend Nutribullet as the best blender. It can handle most blending processes to make anything from dips to sauces to smoothies.

A Nutribullet is the perfect size for making different recipes while remaining compact enough for your cupboard.

It also has an impressive 600-watt motor that Magic Bullet's 250-watt power just can't compete with. If you don't mind shelling out a bit more, a Nutribullet might be for you!

3 Smoothie-Making Tips

Here are some tips to make the most out of your Nutribullet:

1. Use the Right Ingredients

The first tip is to make sure you ALWAYS add a liquid like water or milk with any food you mix.

If you're going to use ice cubes, add them to the blender first. They should never be more than 25% of the number of ingredients.

2. Don’t Mix for More Than 1 Minute

Don't use your blender for more than 1 minute to prevent overheating. If you're going to make multiple drinks, wait for 1 minute before using it again.

3. Replace Your Accessories

Over time, the accessories of your blender will wear down.

A worn blade can't cut food as quickly and can overheat. If you have a worn rubber ring, it can lead to leaks.

Replace your blender's accessories every six months to make sure it's functioning well. Additionally, don't use Nutribullet cups in the microwave or freezer.

NutriBullet Blender FAQs

Below are commonly asked questions about Nutribullet blenders:

Unplug your blender and let it rest. Plug it back in after 3 to 5 minutes and try again.

Nutribullet is primarily used to liquefy food.

You can use it as a food processor by blending ingredients for a shorter period, but the end result may not be the same.

To prevent accidents and damage to your Nutribullet, take note of the following ingredients you cannot put in your blender:

Hot liquids
Apple cores
Fruit pits
Other hard substances

Although a Nutribullet packs a punch, it isn’t a food processor.

Yes, you can. A Nutribullet can crush frozen fruits well enough, but it’s still recommended to thaw them first.

If you’re looking for professional-grade blenders, Vitamix is a great option.

Models like the Vitamix 5200 and 6500 come with various speed controls, while the Vitamix 7500 is their most powerful one yet.

But if you want more horsepower, Blendtec has a 3.0 peak HP that can pulverize anything!

Conclusion

Make smoothies, sauces, soups, and dips with a Nutribullet!

This compact blender is the perfect combination of performance and price. It can tackle any blending task you need.

Follow this guide to ensure you can enjoy your blender for years to come.

Vitamix blenders are unparalleled in efficiency, power, and durability for blender tasks. It competes very well with other brands, like NutriBullet.

So, it's no surprise that both the Vitamix 7500 vs 5300 are high-performance blenders with powerful motors and large-capacity containers.

They are a popular choice for anyone looking for a high-quality blender that can handle a wide range of tasks and ingredients.

However, some key features and benefits between the two models may influence your purchasing decision.

Vitamix 7500: A Brief Description

One of the key features of the Vitamix 7500 that I like best is its powerful motor.

With a peak horsepower of 2.2, it can easily break down ice, frozen fruits, and tough vegetables.

The blender also has a 64-ounce container, perfect for blending large batches of ingredients simultaneously. The container is also made from a durable, BPA-free material that is easy to clean and dishwasher-friendly.

The 7500 blender also comes with various speed settings, including a pulse function, which allows customization of the blending process to suit your needs.

The blender also features a low-profile design, so it can fit easily under most kitchen cabinets when not in use.

Pros

Strong and simple
Easy to clean and maintain
Large capacity container
7-year warranty
Efficient control panels

Cons

Not dishwasher safe
Accessories not included
Bulky
No pre-set programs

Vitamix 5300: A Brief Description

The Vitamix 5300 is also a powerful blender that offers many benefits for home cooks (like me) and professional chefs alike.

The blender's motor is one of the most important things to look for because it powers the stainless steel blades that mix ingredients. In this case, the 5300 model has an impressive 2.2 horsepower motor, making it simple to combine even the most difficult ingredients.

This blender also comes with a 64-ounce container large enough to blend large batches of ingredients, making it perfect for meal prep or entertainment.

It has an excellent blending quality powered by its stainless steel blades that cater to various ingredients—from smoothies and shakes to soups, baby food, nut butter, and dips.

A versatile addition to any kitchen, indeed.

Pros

Efficient cutting power
7-year warranty
Great for large or small batches
Thermal protection

Cons

Can be loud
Not dishwasher safe
No pre-set program
No auto switch

What Are the Similarities Between Vitamix 7500 and Vitamix 5300?

Both are high-performance blender models.

When you compare the Vitamix 5300 vs 7500, there are more similarities in blending quality or capability as the two share identical blades and the same container capacity.

Yet, aside from this, here are some of the main similarities between the two blenders:

Capacity: The Vitamix 5300 and 7500 have the same 64 ounces capacity.
Design and Control Panel: Both 7500 and 5300 have an on/off toggle and pulse control options.
Dimensions and Aesthetics: Both Vitamix 5300 and 7500 have the same pitcher size.
Power Dynamics: The Vitamix 5300 and 5700 have the same power motor base.
Blade Size: Both these blenders have the same hardened stainless steel blades.
Cleaning and Maintenance: The Vitamix 5300 and 7500 pitchers are safe for self-cleaning using cold to warm water and dish soap.
Warranty: Both Vitamix blenders have the same 7-year warranty service.

What Are the Differences Between Vitamix 7500 and Vitamix 5300?

Before buying a blender, you have to consider many important factors. These include the motor base, container capacity, warranty, and model cost.

To make it easier for you to decide on the best Vitamix blender model, let me thoroughly elaborate on the differences between the Vitamix 5300 vs. 7500:

Motor Generation and Heating

Although both models have the same motor power, the Vitamix 7500 has a more efficient motor since it is built using the Next Generation motor of 1440.

This motor is slightly stronger, more powerful, and quieter than the Vitamix 5300 regular motors of 1380 wattage. In fact, the 7500 blender is 0.1 more powerful than the 5300.

The 7500 is fitted with a new-generation motor housing, while Vitamix 5300 sports an older variant (which is the standard motor housing).

While both these motors operate similarly on paper, there's a major difference in electricity bill and motor sound.

The Vitamix 7500 consumes less energy compared to its counterpart. It is a smooth operator in the most literal sense.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Noise

The Vitamix 7500 outshines other models because it is a lot quieter.

It has a noise-dampening capacity and only has 88 decibels at maximum speed, while the 5300 reaches up to 98 decibels in higher settings.

The Vitamix 7500 has a next-generation motor with a more refined and advanced engine that minimizes sound. Hence, the latter is best for people who like a less noisy environment.

In comparison between Vitamix 5300 vs. 7500, the Vitamix 5300 utilizes a regular motor. However, with their strong and sturdy base, both Vitamix blenders are stable even at maximum speed.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Safety

Safety is a crucial factor that should be considered when reviewing home-use electrical blenders (or any appliance). With this, it is essential to review the safety features of both Vitamix 5300 vs. 7500.

The difference between the Vitamix 5300 vs. 7500 is that the 7500, a next-generation model, has this motor cooler and thermal protection that functions as a pulse switch.

With this pulse feature, the blender shuts off, and the machine runs cooler.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Durability and Versatility

Determining which is more durable between the Vitamix 5300 and 7500 is challenging because these blenders have similar basic features. Both of these models have versatile purposes.

The only difference is that the Vitamix 7500 has the Next Generation Motor. It is more advanced and has better performance and durability than the other blender.

The Vitamix 7500 blender is better than the 5300 based on the efficiency of the motor.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Weight

Upon checking, I have discovered a slight difference between the two models of Vitamix blender.

Though having a large container size, the 5300 model is lighter because it weighs 11.95 lbs, while the 7500 weighs 13.0 lbs.

If you want to bring appliances anywhere or transfer them to a different location more often, the best blender for you is a light one.

Verdict

Vitamix 5300 wins

Appliance Vibration

Most electrical blenders vibrate when used, especially when running at maximum speed.

Vitamix 5300, in comparison to Vitamix 7500, has a lower vibration. This is due to its new and advanced motor housing, which is also responsible for producing less noise.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Extra Features and Product Accompaniments

Who doesn't love free stuff?

The difference between Vitamix 5300 vs. 7500 is that the 7500 comes with a free recipe book full of 70 recipes (Simply Fresh Cookbook) you can make using the machine.

With its cookbook, this blending machine allows you to make anything from hot soups to velvety smoothies in no time.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

Price Point

More often than not, blenders are costly because of the materials used in building them.

One of the biggest differences between the Vitamix 5300 and 7500 is that they have the same price, but buying the 7500 is more reasonable as it offers more features and blending options than the 5300.

If you are looking for a device worth the price, the 7500 blender is likely a better choice.

Verdict

Vitamix 7500 wins

FAQs Related To Vitamix 7500 vs 5300

Let us address some of the frequently asked questions about the Vitamix 5300 and 7500 blenders to assist you in deciding which blender is the best fit for you and your whole family.

Yes, that’s because the Vitamix 5300 is well-built and has a big container capacity. It is perfect for those looking for a versatile blender at a low price.

Its large, low-profile container can easily blend hot ingredients and crush ice into your desired texture.

Yes, this is perfect for anyone looking for a reliable, high-quality blender appropriate for professional usability, the Vitamix 7500 is for you! It is also better for those who always prepare for multiple people because it has a large container.

It also offers many features that make blending tasks easier and more convenient. One can prepare soups, sauces, and other hot dishes because the 7500 can blend ingredients very well

Bonus feature: it comes with a free recipe book!

Below are easy ways to prevent your blenders from overheating:

Follow the suggested measures and necessary precautions to prevent potential damage.
Refrain from the prolonged blending of excessively thick ingredients.
Follow the program instructions provided in the manual or instructional DVD.
Maintain a minimum of 12 inches of free, open space around the blender.
Store the appliance in the kitchen cabinets when not in use.

According to Vitamix, using a bleach sanitizer at 100 ppm is highly recommended, specifically on a polycarbonate container.

Vitamix 7500 vs 5300 Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Should You Buy?

Vitamix produces different models of blenders with distinct specifications and technological advancements.

However, in comparison with competing brands like Blendtec, Vitamix models certainly share the ability to outperform others.

But based on firsthand experience with both products, the Vitamix 7500 wins.

It has a lot of advantages compared to 5300. It's more durable, quieter, safer, convenient for self-cleaning, has a larger capacity, and consumes less energy. Plus, it also comes with a free Simply Fresh cookbook!

For other Vitamix product reviews, you may check these: Vitamix 7500 vs 5200 and Vitamix 6500 vs 7500.

Conclusion

Blenders like Vitamix and Nutribullet are easy to use. But to make the most of them, you should be choosing the right one for your needs.

Consider your budget and its intended use. Will it be used for personal or commercial purposes?

You should also carefully check its features, both advantages and disadvantages. If you plan to use it for personal purposes, you may not need to buy a high-end blender.

Ultimately, investing in the best blender that works best for you, or is suitable to your needs and situation, can save you time, money, and effort.

Vitamix and Blendtec are two of the most reputable brands for providing us with high-powered blenders.

Both are great choices and can be a good investment regardless of your brand.

If you happen to hop in your favorite smoothie shop, chances are, they're using either Vitamix or Blendtec blenders.

While other reputable brands offer different kinds of blenders, Vitamix and Blendtec always come to mind as they are known for their durable designs, high-quality blenders, and many more.

Despite their similarities in terms of performance and looks, they also do have their set of differences regarding Vitamix vs Blendtec blenders. I'll go into detail regarding this great brand.

Vitamix Overview

Vitamix blenders are renowned worldwide for providing some of the best smoothies.

This brand has become a gold standard for quality, durability, design, performance, and blending power.

While they might be known for their high-end blenders, Vitamix blenders are also known as some of the priciest blenders on the market today.

Why? One of the few reasons is how capable their blenders blend prowess and power; their blenders are built to last.

Vitamix provides aircraft-glade stainless steel blades that can do everything, make smoothies, offer thicker blends, and has various automated programs that make your life easier when blending.

Another key feature that makes Vitamix blenders popular is the tamper apparatus. This tool is used to push ingredients further to avoid air pockets.

As a result, the blender blends smoothly without overheating or exhausting the blender's blades or motor. This feature allows the machine to blend the ingredients smoothly.

Some of these brands' most powerful machines make hot soups, frozen desserts, slice-through bread dough, smoothies, and many more.

If you are looking for a high-powered blender, Vitamix has much to offer. They have every product for different price segments.

Pros

Lots of pre-programmed settings
Blending in variable speed
High-quality blenders
Purees thick mixtures half the time
Their blenders are known for their raw power
Sharp blends for blending effectiveness

Cons

Tampers are purchased separately
Higher price tag

Blendtec Overview

Blendtec offers both commercial and household blenders. This brand and Vitamix are renowned worldwide for making fantastic blending machines.

Founded by Tom Dickson, Blendtec has been associated with the world of blending. They have every product in store for different price points.

This brand has equipped its products with different innovations and technologies to make blending easier, smoother, and more affordable to everyone.

One of their most notable attributes is how powerful their machines are.

It is powerful enough to remove the rubber gasket at the bottom, and the extra sharp blades are great for churning ice or pureeing the hot soup.

Despite its powerful motor, the only drawback I can give to this amazing brand is the loud operation. In most of my tests, using their machines can become borderline deafening.

Well, that's not the case if you're blending, right? However, it got so loud that I had to do intervals when making a smoothie so I won't disturb any of my family members.

Still, one of the few things that made me choose Blendtec is their blender jars.

They have the traditional blender jar, a Wildside jar, and a twister jar. Each jar is intended for different uses.

The twister jar is used for fruit shakes, a smoothie, and thick blends, while the Wildside jar is intended for larger blends, bread dough, smoothies, dips, and batters.

Pros

Great price to performance for Blendtec models
Their products can blend at variable speeds
Lots of pre-programmed settings
Extra sharp blades churn ice with ease
Different blender jar options are available

Cons

It starts at a high speed
Somewhat loud operation

Vitamix Vs Blendtec: Head-to-Head Comparison

For this comparison, I have used two different machines from both brands.

I used the Vitamix Ascent A3500 blender and Blendtec Professional 750 blender for Vitamix. Both of these products work similarly and are competitively priced.

Vitamix vs Blendtec: Power

Both Vitamix and Blendtec offer amazing machines. However, Blendtec blenders have pre-programmed settings and variable speeds to make the blending process faster, simpler, and smoother.

For example, I used the Blendtec Professional 750 blender, which has six pre-programmed options wherein all you have to do is push the buttons, and you're free to go.

You'll come back with an amazing smoothie.

On the other hand, I used the Vitamix Ascent A3500 blender. While their machines don't struggle by any means, I noticed, based on my tests, that the Vitamix Ascent blender took more time to blend the ingredients, although not significantly.

Still, the hands-free option that Blendtec brings isn't often found in this price segment for Vitamix. You can feel the power even in one of their cheap blenders. Blendtec takes the win.

WINNER

Blendtec

Vitamix vs Blendtec: Design

Vitamix and Blendtec are known for the quality of their designs, which is why they are two of the most popular brands.

As I mentioned a while ago, this Vitamix's tamper tool is a key factor when pushing down ingredients to make the blending process faster.

However, team Blendtec claimed their blenders are already efficient, and it doesn't need any tool to push the ingredients further as their blend cycle is efficient enough to go through all the ingredients.

For comparison, I have reviewed Both Blendtec and Vitamix machines, and I was able to pinpoint some differences.

I tried using the Vitamix Ascent A3500 blender, and to my surprise, it breezed past through hot soups and smoothies. To my astonishment, it could also crush through hard vegetables and ice.

On the other hand, I used the Blendtec Professional 750 blender and was making smoothies; however, I paused for many moments to ensure every ingredient was pushed through.

Regarding design, I can say this tamper thing helped me push ingredients further to make smoothies better, and for that, Vitamix wins.

WINNER

Vitamix

Vitamix vs Blendtec: Versatility

Based on my experience, using both Vitamix and Blendtec machines can make a great smoothie. It crushes through ice and fruit without many hiccups, a dream most cheap machines can only dream of.

However, the tampers used in Vitamix machines can offer a good balance, especially when making textured foods, like nut butter, smoothie, or salad dressings.

For accessories, Vitamix wins out again in this department. Vitamix offers a lot of attachments and containers; you can turn this blender into a food processor instantly.

On the other hand, a blender from Blendtec doesn't have the versatility to compete with Vitamix. I'd go for Vitamix machines if you want a multi-faceted blender.

WINNER

Vitamix

Vitamix vs Blendtec: Price

And because Vitamix is offering something that Blendtec can't, it doesn't surprise that they are also the pricier of the two.

Vitamix machines can go up to $600. While the prices are significantly high, you get plenty of features already.

Blendtec is a good blender brand. They are more catered towards the people who want a decent blender without spending too much money.

One of their cheapest Blendtec machines starts at $229.95, and you have a good one for making smoothies.

The bottom line is that you get what you paid for when you buy a Vitamix Blender rather than a Blendtec one. However, it boils down to personal preference and budget on which one to choose.

WINNER

Tie

What Are Some of the Best Vitamix Blenders You Can Buy?

As we all know, Vitamix has given us plenty of professional-level products. Their unrivaled quality, performance, and functionality are hard to beat.

Vitamix A3500 Ascent Series Blender: I consider the A3500 blender the gold standard for blending machines as it hits the sweet spot of value and performance. During my tests, some of my creations resulted in perfect smoothies, nut butters, and hot soup. Its single-serve blender jar is perfect for any spontaneous on-the-go blending. The Vitamix 6500 is another great option if you have the means and ways to get it. If you want to know more about the 6500, you can check this guide out on what the differences are between the Vitamix 6500 vs 7500!
Vitamix E310 Explorian Blender: If you like having a Vitamix Blender right away, one of the cheapest ones you can get is the Vitamix 310. It has an amazing price-to-performance ratio and is a great blender to start. It is one of the cheapest ones you can get from Vitamix, and the quality and functionality aren't compromised despite being tagged as a budget-friendly option.
Vitamix 7500 Blender: The Vitamix 7500 blender is one of their nicer offerings if you want to make the perfect smoothie after a tiring day. It packs enough power to make different kinds of soup and comes with a tamper. The product features a stainless steel hammermill and sharp cutting blades to ensure every ingredient. You might want to check my review of the Vitamix 7500 against the Vitamix 5300 for more detailed information.

What Are Some of the Best Blendtec Blenders You Can Buy?

Blendtec Blenders are popular not because they are affordable but because they offer unparalleled performance at a much more competitive price.

Blendtec Total Classic Original Blender: The Blendtec Total Classic Original Blender is one of their most affordable options. Although affordable, it still packs power and is designed for family-sized drinks. Its backlit touchscreen will allow you to choose which power settings you choose. The blades are sharp enough to churn ice and puree hot soup. Making a smoothie with this one is a no-brainer.
Blendtec Designer 675: The Blendtec Designer 675 offers various convenient features and advanced blending technology for maximum performance and functionality. This mid-range offering from Blendtec ticks all the boxes on what a blender should have. It has 5 pre-programmed cycles for making hot soup, a smoothie, frozen treats, whole juice, and nut butter, many more.
Blendtec Professional 800 Blender: While Vitamix might be known for their expensive products, the Blendtec Professional 800 Blender is what this brand can offer for professional use. If you want to enjoy that delicious smoothie shop experience in the comfort of your home, this Blendtec blender can blend anything you want.

FAQs Related To Vitamix vs Blendtec

If you have additional questions between both brands and their products, you might find some answers down below.

For many years, the coffee giant has been using Blendtec machines but has shifted its focus to Vitamix as it provided the right blender for Starbucks’ needs.

If you drop by your local Starbucks store while ordering your favorite frappe, you will immediately find they use a Vitamix blender.

The machine was nicknamed “The Quiet One” for its ability to work in some of the quietest operations in the world of blending.

For context, the Quiet one was 18 decibels quieter than most brands can offer. Their Vitamix machines can also be seen through their ads and videos.

As I’ve mentioned, Blendtec is notable for having some of the most powerful motors the industry has seen. But it doesn’t come with any drawbacks.

According to some of my tests, like making lemon juice, Blendtec was significantly louder than Vitamix.

While you can’t expect these blending machines to be quiet during operations, I suggest taking the Vitamix route for the safer bet.

Their machines are known for being able to operate at a quieter pace.

NutriBullet is another reputable brand that is making a run for its money. If you want to know how to fully utilize these products, check out this guide on how to use a Nutribullet!

This question can be difficult to answer as several factors can limit or reduce a blender’s lifespan.

The frequency of use and durability of the blender are two main factors.

For example, a blender at home should last you longer than an expensive one but is used commercially, like Starbucks.

But in general, machines with less wattage and capacity can last you up to 5 years, while expensive models can last as long as 10 years, depending on use.

There are a lot of things you can do with these machines. I loved how you can easily make hot soup when using them. Well, a smoothie isn’t also exempted.

In short, regardless of price, both machines can make complex recipes look like simplified ones when using one of their products.

Cheaper machines tend to cap out at chopping fruit and ice. It’s not a common feature wherein a blender can make a hot soup for you, right?

Plus, you enjoy different features that make your life easier and more enjoyable.

From pre-programmed settings, variable speed settings, and consistency of results, you can easily measure the brand’s willingness to go the extra mile for its customers.

Vitamix Vs Blendtec Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Is Best for You?

To help trim down your options, I've added scenarios to make your life easier when choosing between both the Vitamix and Blendtec machines.

Use a Vitamix Blender If...

You will make smoothies, nut butters, a hot soup, blend frozen fruit, or knead bread dough more effectively.
You want a quieter operation.
You want longer warranties on products you've purchased.
You want professional-level results.
You prefer build quality over high-powered performance.

Use a Blendtec Blender If...

You want a powerful motor and high-wattage machines.
You enjoy different blender attachments and accessories.
You are on a budget but are looking for a decent one.
You are making milkshakes, churning ice, fruit shakes, and more.

If none of these can make your life easier, you can check out this guide on Nutribullet vs Vitamix to know the differences between each brand!

Final Words

Undoubtedly, both Blendtec and Vitamix products are great in their own right. If you have the means and ways to get Vitamix Machines, I suggest you continue.

Based on my experience, you get what you pay for if you buy a Vitamix machine than what a Blendtec can offer. You could say you get a vita mix when using a Vitamix product!

However, Blendtec products are catered to the budget market, in my opinion. Still, it boils down to personal preference and intended use.

I feel one isn't superior to the other as they have competitively priced products and perform similarly. This article should squash the debate on which one is better than the other.

If you're looking for a blender that can do it all, Vitamix has got you covered. The 6500 and 7500 models have plenty of features to satisfy the most demanding cooks.

Both two models are equipped with multiple settings that make them suitable for any kitchen situation, but the 7500 takes things up a notch with variable speed control and an automated cleaning cycle, so you don't need to worry about scrubbing dishes afterward.

With their respective advantages, like delivering wonderful frozen desserts, these Vitamix 6500 vs 7500 comparisons will help make sure you get the ideal blender for your needs!

Whether it's smoothies or frozen treats, these powerful two blenders deliver excellent performance and results every time.

Vitamix 6500 Overview

The Vitamix 6500 is a high-performance blender belonging to the Vitamix C-series.

One of the standout features of the Vitamix 6500 is the blender's motor. The powerful 2.2 horsepower motor easily blends tough ingredients like ice, nuts, and seeds.

The blender also comes with a 64-ounce container of durable, BPA-free plastic. The container has a wide, easy-pour spout that makes pouring blended ingredients easily.

Vitamix blades are made of high-quality stainless steel and are designed to blend all dry and wet ingredients.

The Vitamix 6500 also comes with three preset blending options. With the simple push of these preset settings, you can use the frozen dessert, smoothie, or hot soup setting.

Behind the Vitamix logo, below the control panel, on the front of the Vitamix 6500, is where you'll find the power switch.

Motor power: 2.2 peak horsepower | Dimensions: 17.25 x 8.75 x 7.25 inches | Weight: 12 lbs | Container capacity: 64 ounces | Blades: Aircraft-grade stainless steel blades, 4-inch diameter | Speeds: Variable speed settings, pulse controls, 3 pre-programmed settings | Included accessories: Tamper plunger, cookbook

Pros

Easy-to-use controls: The pre-programmed blender has a simple dial for adjusting the speed and a pulse switch for more precise control over the blending process.
Preset blending options: There are three options for blending on the 6500 vs 7500.
More affordable: It is cheaper to purchase the Vitamix 6500 vs 7500
Compact size: For sizing, you will save more shelf space with the 6500 vs 7500

Cons

Less powerful motor: The Vitamix 6500 has a less powerful motor than the 7500, which may make it less effective for blending tough ingredients like nuts and seeds.
Smaller container: The Vitamix 6500 has a 64-ounce container but is taller and narrower in shape than the 7500, making it more difficult to blend larger quantities.

Vitamix 7500 Overview

The Vitamix 7500 is a high-performance blender that promises to simplify blending tasks.

The Vitamix 7500 is a powerhouse among Vitamix models, with 2.2 peak horsepower, making it capable of handling even the toughest ingredients.

The blender has a simple dial that allows you to adjust the variable speeds and a pulse control that gives you more control over the blending process with ten-speed settings.

This feature makes it easy to create smoothies, sauces, and soups with the desired texture. The blender also comes with a tamper plunger, just like other blenders.

One of the standout features of the Vitamix 7500 is its low-profile design. With dimensions of 17.5 x 9.4 x 7.7 inches, it can easily fit under most kitchen cabinets, saving countertop space.

The Vitamix 7500's main power switch is situated on the right-hand side of the device's rear.

Motor power: 2.2 peak horsepower | Dimensions: 17.5 x 9.4 x 7.7 inches | Weight: 12.5 lbs | Container capacity: 64 ounces | Blades: Aircraft-grade stainless steel blades, 4-inch diameter | Speeds: Variable speed control dial, 10-speed dial, pulse option | Included accessories: Tamper plunger, cookbook

Pros

Powerful motor: With a 2.2 peak horsepower motor, the 7500 is a great blender for your kitchen.
Quiet operation: The 7500 is quieter than most high-powered blenders, including the Vitamix 5200 and other older models.
Variable speed dial: The Vitamix 7500 has the same toggles as the 6500 but also has a 10-speed dial for precise control over the texture and consistency of blends.
Easy to clean: The Vitamix 7500 is relatively easy to clean, with a dishwasher-safe container, lid, and tamper.

Cons

Higher price point: The Vitamix 7500 is higher than other high-performance blenders.
No preset blending programs: The Vitamix 7500 lacks preset blending programs like the Vitamix 6500.

Vitamix 6500 vs Vitamix 7500: Comparison of Features

When comparing Vitamix 6500 vs 7500, there are five key categories: Variable Speed Settings, Motor Housing, Blending Performance, Noise Level, and Price.

Criteria 1: Variable Speed Settings

One key difference between the 6500 vs. 7500 is the speed dial.

The Vitamix 6500 has three preset speeds for smoothies, frozen desserts, and hot soups.

These preset features automatically adjust the blending time and speed, making it easier to achieve consistent results.

The Vitamix 7500, on the other hand, does not have any pre-programmed settings. Users need to adjust the speed and blending time for this blender manually.

WINNER

Vitamix 6500

Criteria 2: Blender Motor Housing

Another difference between the Vitamix 6500 vs 7500 is the motor base housing.

Both the Vitamix 6500 and 7500 have powerful motors. The Vitamix 6500 has a 2.2 horsepower motor, while the Vitamix 7500 has a 2.2 horsepower motor.

The difference lies in the base station surrounding the motor base. The 6500 still uses the C-Series base, which has zero noise-dampening insulation.

On the other hand, the Vitamix 7500 has a low-profile generation G series base. The low-profile design of the Vitamix 7500 makes it more compact and easier to store.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500

Criteria 3: Blending Performance

The performance of the Vitamix 6500 vs 7500 also differs.

The Vitamix 6500 and 7500 are highly capable in terms of blending performance. Both blenders have strong motors and can blend even tough ingredients with ease.

However, the only difference between the two blenders is the pitchers. The 7500 has a stout pitcher for easy blending of thicker mixtures

WINNER

Vitamix 7500

Criteria 4: Noise Level

Noise is another important factor when comparing the Vitamix 6500 vs 7500.

Regarding motor noise level, the Vitamix 6500 and 7500 are relatively loud due to their powerful motors.

However, the Vitamix 7500 has a slightly quieter motor due to its G series motor base. This base has a noise-dampening feature, which allows significant noise reduction.

The motor housing helps to muffle some of the sounds from the Vitamix blender, making it a better option for those who value a quieter blending experience.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500

Criteria 5: Price

The price is an important consideration when comparing Vitamix 6500 vs 7500.

The Vitamix 6500 typically retails for slightly less than the Vitamix 7500. However, the price difference is not significant enough to significantly impact the product's overall value.

WINNER

Vitamix 6500

What Are the Similarities Between the Vitamix Blenders?

The Vitamix 6500 and 7500 are two powerful high-performance blenders, perfect for anyone looking to make smoothies, sauces, and more.

With a strong motor, a large container, and stainless steel blades that cut through the ice while effortlessly blending tough ingredients, they have adjustable speeds and pulse function that can help you achieve your desired consistency.

Whether it's crushing ice or making sure your soup is just the right thickness, these blenders provide you with the same features and lasting results every time.

And as an added bonus, their sleek designs will look great in any kitchen!

So if you're after a high-quality blender with all the features you need to get creative in the kitchen - either one of these would be an excellent choice.

What Are Alternative Vitamix Models You Can Get?

If you're looking for powerful Vitamix blenders, the Vitamix 5200 and 5300 are both great options.

The Vitamix 5200 is part of the C-Series and has a powerful motor, variable speed, and pulse feature.

It also comes with a large container and hardened stainless steel blades that make short work of even tough ingredients.

The Vitamix 5300 is part of the G-Series and has an even more powerful motor than its predecessor as well as a low-profile container.

It also features variable speed, a pulse feature, and a user-friendly interface - ensuring your cleaning process is quick and easy.

Ultimately, no matter which one you choose between the two Vitamix models, you'll be equipped with one of the most reliable blenders on the market today!

Check out the comparison guides on the other Vitamix blenders, like Vitamix 7500 vs 5200 and Vitamix 7500 vs 5300.

What Are the Alternative Brands of Blenders to Consider?

Are you searching for a reliable blender that can help you whip up smoothies, shakes, and other delicious drinks? Consider Nutribullet and Blendtec.

Nutribullet offers a compact design with powerful motors that make it easy to blend fruits, veggies, and nuts into your favorite beverages.

Alternatively, if you're looking for professional-grade power and versatility, Blendtec blenders come equipped with powerful motors plus pre-programmed settings to make your blending experience seamless.

No matter which option you choose, both brands offer quality products that will help make preparing nutritious meals easier than ever!

To know more, check out the comparisons and guides on NutriBullet vs Vitamix, Vitamix Vs Blendtec, and How to use a NutriBullet.

FAQs Related To Vitamix 6500 vs 7500

Got more questions about Vitamix 6500 vs. Vitamix 7500? Here are our frequently asked questions.

The Vitamix 6500 has a 2.2 horsepower motor.

The Vitamix 6500 does not have a food processor attachment but can be used to make purees and other blended foods.

Using the Vitamix 7500’s self-cleaning mode is an easy and efficient way to keep your blender in top shape.

Simply fill the pitcher halfway with some dish soap and warm water, then set it to high for 30-60 seconds to get rid of any stuck-on food.

You can also opt for a more hands-off approach by placing the wet pitchers in the dishwasher safe – just remember to let them air dry before use.

This convenient feature makes sure that you’ll never have to worry about an unclean machine or a wet pitcher again; it’s like having a fresh start every time!

Once your soup has cooled slightly, it’s time to get blending!

Carefully remove the center cap from the blender lid and cover the hole with a clean towel. This will prevent any hot liquid from spraying you while you blend.

Then, start the blender at a low speed and lighter blends, gradually increasing its velocity until you’ve achieved your desired consistency and serving temperature.

Blend for a few minutes until everything is smooth, creamy, and delicious – but avoid over-blending if you’re aiming for something lighter!

Before long, you’ll have an inviting bowl of hot soup and steaming goodness ready to enjoy.

Vitamix 6500 vs 7500: Which One Is Best for You?

Now that we have compared 6500 vs. 7500. Let's see which one you should get

Use Vitamix 6500 If...

...you want to blend things and not think about it, as it comes with three pre-programmed settings, making it more convenient for those who want to complete a simple blending task.

It also has a slightly lower price point, making it a more affordable option for those on a budget.

Use Vitamix 7500 If...

...you prefer a more powerful motor and slightly quieter operation. The 7500 is more modern and sleek, making it a better fit for contemporary kitchens.

The wider container of the 7500 also allows for easier blending of larger batches.

Final Words

In conclusion, the Vitamix 6500 and 7500 are great blenders with powerful performance and versatility in the kitchen.

Whether making a frozen dessert or a smoothie, each model has unique features and benefits, making them suitable for different needs and preferences.

Ultimately, the choice comes from priorities such as preset options, motor housing design, blending performance, noise level, and price.

Regardless of your chosen model, investing in a Vitamix blender is wise for anyone looking to take their blending game to the next level.

At first glance, you may think the Vitamix 7500 and 5200 have similar performance and features. You're not wrong, but also not entirely right here.

When it comes to the battle of Vitamix 7500 vs 5200, the winning factors lie in power and functionality. Personal preference also comes in handy when deciding between the two.

Allow me to get into the specifics to know which one is the best blender between the two models.

Vitamix 7500 Overview

Let's start with the more recently released Vitamix 7500 NextGen G-Series blender.

When you unbox the blender package, you'll see the low-profile container, motor base, low-profile tamper, cookbook, and Getting Started Guide.

The low-profile container has a 64-ounce total capacity that can function as a 20-ounce Copolyester container and a 32-ounce dry grains container. Personally, I like its stout build because it's easy for me to fit it into any of my kitchen cabinets.

In the middle of the front portion of its motor base, you'll see the blender's 10-variable speeds control button.

If you're looking into this for your first blender, this means that you have 10 different speeds to choose from. More speed options can give you more precision to achieve your desired texture.

On top of this, it has 4-inch laser-cut stainless steel blades for high-quality results. They are of aircraft-grade quality, so there's nothing you can't blend here. From fruits to coffee beans and nuts, you can use this blender for both personal and commercial use.

Obviously, you're not limited to just smoothie-making with this blender. This blender's Pulse feature expands your options to soups, sauces, purees, and dips.

All these are powered by the blender's powerful 2.2-peak horsepower motor backed by a radial cooling fan and thermal protection system to ensure your blender does not overheat.

By now, you may be imagining a powerful machine that emits loud noise already. But that's nothing to worry about when it comes to this blender. It has noise-dampening technology, which makes it 40% quieter than earlier units.

It even has a self-cleaning mechanism that only takes 30 to 60 seconds to tidy up the machine, no matter what you decide to put in it.

Pros

It has a large capacity but can still fit most kitchen cabinets.
It has 10 variable speeds that are perfect for many recipes.
It features a pulse option that makes chopping faster and easier.
It has a high-power motor with fan-assisted cooling.
It emits less noise despite its high power.

Cons

The large container can take up more space than other blenders.
It costs more than blenders that can do the same job.

Vitamix 5200 Overview

One of the best blender-producing companies released the Vitamix 5200 in 2007 as one of their C-series blenders.

Its box comes with its classic container, motor base, classic tamper, and Getting Started Guide.

Vitamix 5200's classic container has a 64-ounce capacity to blend medium to large batches, perfect for any household size.

It offers a 10-variable speed control using a handy dial to easily adjust speed. This blending power allows you to create friction heat to make soup without any other heating mechanism.

But if you want, you can reheat your soups using the best 24-inch gas range.

My husband is a big fan of hummus, and I can confidently say that the Vitamix 5200 is one of the best blenders for hummus on the market.

If you ask me, its control knob allows you to switch between different speeds seamlessly. It gives you easier control than touchscreen models. This makes the Vitamix 5200 a user-friendly model that's perfect for beginners.

This blender features 3-inch laser-cutting hardened stainless steel blades backed by a powerful motor with 2.0 horsepower to handle even tough ingredients.

At the end of each use, you won't have to worry about any mess with its self-cleaning feature. Fill the blender with warm water, add a few drops of dish soap, set the motor to its highest speed, and the self-cleaning mechanism takes care of the rest!

Pros

It doesn't take up much storage space.
Its dial control knob is easy to use.
It only takes seconds to a few minutes to mix anything.
It has a powerful motor that can handle tough ingredients.
It is easy to clean regardless of its load.

Cons

It has a tall height that may not fit in some kitchen cabinets.
It doesn't have a pulse feature to give you more control.

Similarities Between the Two Blenders

Coming from the same manufacturing company, both the Vitamix 7500 and 5200 have similar attributes as well.

If you open the boxes of these two blenders side by side, you'll see that both come with a container, motor base, tamper, 6-feet power cord, and a Getting Started Guide.

Their pitchers' capacity is at 64 ounces regardless of their build and shape. Both containers are also made of BPA-free and shatterproof plastic.

All their removable parts are dishwasher-safe and can withstand hot temperatures.

You can enjoy ten-speed settings with laser-cut stainless steel on both models.

Both have a self-cleaning mechanism to give you more freedom to recreate as many recipes as possible without worrying about the cleanup after.

In terms of aftersales, these blenders come with the standard Vitamix 7-year manufacturer warranty that's longer than those offered by other brands.

Vitamix 5200 vs 7500: Comparison of Features

These blenders may be similar, but the Vitamix 5200 vs. 7500 battle continues.

The following features differentiate them, and I've taken the liberty to pick the winner for each feature as well.

Pitcher Design

As I put the two blender containers beside each other, it's clear that the build of their pitchers is different.

The Vitamix 5200 has a tall and slender pitcher. Once you mount it on the motor base and attach the lid on, the blender measures 20.5 inches tall.

Vitamix introduced a new pitcher for the 7500 model using the same BPA-free and shatterproof plastic material. It is a shorter yet wider container, which gives the pitcher a stout appearance. When fully assembled, the blender measures 17.25 inches tall.

In terms of storage, keeping the 5200 model on the counter is easier since it doesn't seem to fit in many kitchen cabinets. The shorter 7500 model can easily be stored away in cabinets to keep your kitchen space free from mess.

How the pitcher shape affects the blending performance is another thing.

The slender pitcher can blend smaller batches better because even the smallest ingredients can easily reach the blades. In contrast, the wider pitcher gives more even results when blending bigger batches.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500 - It is easier to store, and it maximizes the container capacity better.

Motor Power

Side by side, the motor bases of the two blenders look alike. You'll find the speed dial and the on/off button here.

The difference lies in the power of the two motors.

The Vitamix 5200 has a peak 2.0 horsepower motor that the company has reliably used for decades to deliver quality chopping and to blend.

However, it came to the point that many customers raised the issue of the blender heating with either high capacity or long operation. This would cause the blender to bind for a few seconds.

At this point, Vitamix decided to use new-generation motors for their NextGen Series blenders, including their 7500 model.

This newer model has slightly more power using a 2.2-horsepower motor. Vitamix added fan cooling to support this 10% improvement as well.

The added cooling fans now allow the blender to chop and blend as much volume of any ingredient and for longer without any issue.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500 has more power with a cooling fan to back it up.

Blender Blades

Again, the blender blades of the two models appear identical. They are dull to the touch, laser cut, and made of hardened stainless steel.

But if you look closer, you'll see their main difference. The only difference that they have is their form.

The Vitamix 5200 has blades that are 3 inches wide and sit at a very slightly higher angle. On the other hand, the Vitamix 7500 has 4 inches in diameter blades that sit slightly lower.

You may be asking why. It's all because of the shape of the pitchers. The blades are designed to match the shape of the blender container.

WINNER

Tie - The blades chop and blend any ingredient. There is no difference in operation and performance.

Controls

The controls of both blenders can look the same. They both have a toggle on the left, a ten-position turn dial in the middle, and another toggle on the right.

The turn dial allows you to adjust the blender's power, while the right toggle is your switch to supply power to the motor.

You'll notice that the difference is on the left toggle.

The left control on the Vitamix 5200 is a high-speed toggle that overrides the speed dial. It puts the motor at high speed in an instant.

The high-speed variable toggle is replaced with the pulse feature on the Vitamix 7500. This allows you to make a good puree with a few chunks, like salsa.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500 - The pulse function is more useful than the high-speed function.

Noise

Here's something you won't notice at first glance. The noise each blender makes.

This might not be a deal-breaker for some users since it's normal for any high-powered machine to emit noise. But for those living with the elderly or those who, like me, prepare their meals while everyone is still asleep, this is something to be discussed.

The Vitamix 5200, as an older version, can be quite noisy, just like your typical blender.

Vitamix takes it to a higher level with the Vitamix 7500. This newer model has a noise-dampening mechanism not found in the Vitamix 5200.

This feature makes the blender less noisy compared not only to the older Vitamix blenders but also to many other models on the market as well.

WINNER

Vitamix 7500 - Less noise for a more powerful machine is highly impressive.

Price

Both blenders are on the more expensive side of blenders available on the market.

The Vitamix 5200 costs around $450 with all the features it offers. On the other hand, the Vitamix 7500 will cost you around $530.

This price point comes with the standard Vitamix warranty package of 7 years. If you add $75, you can enjoy an extended warranty package of 3 more years, making it a total of 10 years for whichever model you choose.

The extra 80-dollar cost of the Vitamix 7500 gives you the advantage of its 10% higher motor power, Pulse feature, fan-assisted cooling, and noise-dampening mechanism.

WINNER

Vitamix 5200 - It has a lower price for almost the same performance.

What Are Other Vitamix Models You Should Consider?

The company introduced great blenders to the market in 1921. Aside from these two blender models, the brand has 32 other models available.

For the price of the Vitamix 7500, you can also get the Vitamix 5300. You can compare Vitamix 7500 vs 5300 here.

If you want pre-programmed settings for more precise blending, you can look into the higher-priced Vitamix 6500. You can compare Vitamix 6500 vs 7500 here.

Vitamix has more options for you to choose from; it is a matter of which model suits your needs the best! Only then can you consider what you believe is the best option for you!

Why Should You Get Vitamix Blenders?

Because all Vitamix blenders are considered high-performance blenders or super blenders.

If you're wondering what their superpower is, it's this: they have more power and versatility than other blenders. They're great for so much more than just making smoothies.

A high-performance blender can do some jobs a food processor can do. They're all possible with a Vitamix blender for chopping, grinding, and emulsifying.

You can use it to turn your raw or frozen ingredients into something better, such as chopping wet or dry ingredients, making dough, making nut butter, and even crushing ice.

Another amazing feature is its ability to make hot soups without any other heating mechanism.

So where does the heat come from? The answer is this: the blender's blades create friction and heat as they can spin hundreds of times per second.

Put all your soup ingredients in your blender container, blend on high speed for 4 to 5 minutes, and you'll easily get soup. Hot soup, mind you!

To know how Vitamix fairs with other brands, you can compare NutriBullet vs Vitamix and Vitamix vs Blendtec here.

FAQs Related To Vitamix 7500 vs 5200

Do you still have questions regarding the topic? Here are your top-of-mind questions answered to help you choose better:

A Vitamix blender is worth the money.

Any blender from Vitamix can offer outstanding functionality and longer-lasting use compared to many other brands. Vitamix blenders may cost you more, but they also allow you to do more.

All the Vitamix models have a standard warranty of 7 years.

The brand is confident in the quality of the products that they offer. They offer a warranty that’s longer than many other manufacturers.

If you think you need it, you can add 3 more years of warranty by paying $75 more to the base price of your blender.

All the Vitamix models are free from Bisphenol A or BPA.

They are made of food-grade material, which you can easily use for food preparation. This includes purees you’d want to make for your babies at home.

vitamix 7500 vs 5200 Final Verdict — © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

Final Verdict: Which One Is Best for You?

The Vitamix 5200 C-Series may be the best-selling Vitamix blender, but the winner for the best blender of the Vitamix 5200 vs. 7500 blender game can change with the introduction of the new G-series version.

Here's a summary and a better reason to choose one over the other.

Use Vitamix 7500 If...

You have many people to prepare meals for. The capacity of both blenders is 64 ounces, but you'll need the higher-powered motor of the Vitamix 7500 for batch cooking, having friends over, and putting together a good meal for the entire family.
You have a small professional kitchen. The Vitamix 7500 is found in many professional kitchens. Its variable speeds, stainless steel blades, and pulse option expand your choices regarding what you can develop.

Vitamix 7500's wider and shorter pitcher may take up more space in cabinets, but storage space wouldn't be a concern if you have a large household or a small professional kitchen.

Use Vitamix 5200 If...

You only need small batches in your recipes. The design and shape of the Vitamix 5200 can give better consistency when it comes to smaller batches. Its slender shape allows its blades to reach ingredients better, even when you add in a small amount only.
You have a big kitchen space. The Vitamix 5200 is a taller blender by about 3 inches. If you have a big kitchen space, you can leave it on the counter instead.

Getting the Vitamix 5200 allows you to save a bit more money, especially if you don't need as much blending power in your recipes.

Final Words

The Vitamix 7500 and 5200 blenders have similar features and differentiating details with a slight price difference. Each one has the edge over the other.

This boils down to personal preference and what you believe is most important in a blender!

Ultimately, YOU judge who wins the Vitamix 7500 vs 5200 battle in YOUR kitchen for YOUR household.

Kitchen ranges are two-in-one appliances — a set of burners and an oven. As such, you'll want to get one that works hard regardless of what you're using it as.

Deciding you want a gas range already slashes down your options greatly.

However, to help you narrow your choices down more, we'll talk about factors to consider and features to watch out for when shopping for a gas range.

Things To Consider When Buying A Gas Range

Gas ranges come in different types and dimensions.

Below, we've listed a few things you should keep in mind while you're looking for one:

1. Freestanding vs Slide-In Ranges

A freestanding gas range is the most popular kind since it's the easiest to install. This is thanks to the finished sides that allow it to be placed anywhere in the kitchen.

It's also characterized by a backguard that holds the oven and burner controls.

Meanwhile, a slide-in range slips between appliances and cabinets to give your kitchen a seamless, built-in look.

The burner and oven controls are found up front. It doesn't have a backguard, so it doesn't block your backsplash.

Slide-in ranges also have bottom or warming drawers.

In terms of output and features, it's normally similar to freestanding gas ranges. However, slide-ins can be self-cleaning and have more advanced features.

But, of course, this depends on whether your freestanding gas range is entry-level or not.

2. Range Width

Appliances should follow cabinet styles. For instance, if you have a standard 30-inch cabinet, then you should look for a range of the same dimensions.

Most gas ranges are 30 inches wide. However, dual-fuel and pro-style ranges can reach 36 or even 60 inches wide. Meanwhile, 20-inch gas ranges are the smallest.

20- and 24-inch gas ranges are the most basic since they're designed to fit into small apartments.

36-inch ranges are normally for high-end regular or pro-style ranges. 48- and 60-inch ranges are the more expensive pro-style ranges.

However, you'll likely only reach 48 or 60 inches if you custom-configure your pro-style range with things like extra burners, an extra oven, or an integrated grill or wok burner.

There are also rare 27-inch drop-in ranges suited for 1950s homes.

3. Oven Capacity

To make sure that your oven's cavity size is big enough for your household, here are some important pointers to remember:

2 to 3 cubic feet for one or two people
3 to 4 cubic feet for three or four people
at least four cubic feet for four or more people

It's ideal for measuring only the usable oven space — and it would be a good idea to assess it yourself.

That's because some manufacturers include the lowest rack position in their advertisement of dimensions.

4. Single-Oven vs. Double-Oven Ranges

Double-oven ranges typically have a smaller oven on top and a larger oven below.

They're very convenient if you need to bake or roast two different dishes at two different temperatures.

You can even use the smaller upper oven to preheat small items, like leftover pizza. However, the lower oven is closer to the floor compared to conventional ovens.

However, double ovens don't have a storage drawer.

5. Gas vs. Dual-Fuel Ranges

Dual-fuel ranges have a gas cooktop and electric oven.

You get the precise burner control from an open flame that a gas cooktop gives. At the same time, electric convection ovens are typically drier and have a more even heat distribution.

Dual-fuel ranges have one or two convection ovens. They're also more expensive, with a price tag of $2,000 to $7,500.

Because a dual-fuel range uses both gas and electric power, you'll need gas and a 240-volt power hookup.

If you don't want the hassle of using two systems, then go for a gas range.

6. Finish

This depends highly on your preferences.

Stainless steel is a popular finish since it looks classy and makes for a seamless kitchen.

However, stay away from black stainless steel. That's because the oxide coating is easily scratched, which will reveal the shiny undercoating.

More than that, manufacturers do not guarantee scratches, so you'll have to live with it.

Aside from stainless steel, you can get white, black, and other colors that will fit any kitchen.

What Are the Common Kitchen Range Features?

The more features and oven settings a kitchen range has, the more expensive it normally is. After all, they help boost convenience during meal preparation.

Below are some features that we believe are worth paying for in a kitchen range:

1. Air Fryer

The air fry setting is the newest feature in ranges. In fact, most major range brands have at least one model that has it.

This feature uses high heat convection. Admittedly, it may not work as well as an actual air fryer, but it's certainly convenient for those who don't own an air fryer.

2. Convection

Convection ovens are typically found in mid and higher-priced ranges. They let you choose between conventional baking and roasting or convection baking and roasting.

They're also great for dehydrating.

These types of ovens can reduce cooking time since they have fewer hot and cold spots — letting you cook foods evenly on all racks. They use less heat too.

This is possible since a convection fan circulates the hot air inside the oven.

Some convection ovens (typically electric ovens) have an extra convection heating element to ensure the fan circulates the hottest air possible. The fan can be turned on or off.

3. Convertible Oven Space

Some double ovens let you remove the divider between the upper and lower oven.

This flexibility lets you move between a baking space large enough for a huge holiday roast and a smaller space for baking a pan of cookies.

4. Expandable Elements, Bridge, and Oval Burner

Gas cooktops have an oval burner that can accommodate griddles and elongated pans.

Aside from that, they have a fifth burner in the middle for a griddle too.

5. Variable Broil

All gas and electric ovens (except entry-level models) have a variable broil feature.

This lets you adjust high and low settings for foods that need slower or faster cooking.

6. Wi-Fi Connectivity

Most ranges already have Wi-Fi connectivity, letting you be in control via an app on your smartphone or tablet.

The app lets you set a timer, check the oven temperature and even check the internal temperature of what you're cooking (if you have a temperature probe).

Some might even have a tie-in to other apps, such as Yummly and SideChef.

7. Self-Cleaning

The self-cleaning feature makes it easier to clean your oven.

Basically, the oven walls release dirt once activated by steam and low heat. It also incinerates drippings, grease, and spillovers in the oven. Then, you'll just need to wipe them away.

This method cleans your oven in an hour, doesn't produce fumes, and is less invasive than the old method.

That's because the previous method of self-cleaning used very high temperatures for hours to turn food particles into ash.

8. Power Burner

A power burner has a higher heat output — specifically at least 15,000 British Thermal Units (BTU).

These can quickly sear and heat up large quantities of food.

Regular ranges typically have at least two power burners in front, each with an output of 15,000 to 21,000 BTU. They also have a simmer burner with 5,000 BTU.

9. Warming Drawers

A warming drawer is a low-temperature drawer that keeps your food warm and moist for up to three hours. But you can use it to slow cook some foods too.

You can also use this as a storage drawer for pans, heat towels, serving bowls, and plates.

10. Grates

Yes, the grates you get depend on the price of the range.

Entry-level ranges will have only thin, lightweight grates that will normally cover only the burners. Then, the more the range, the heavier the grates.

Most grates are made of heavy cast iron or cast iron coated with porcelain. Pro ranges have even heavier cast iron grates.

Better-quality grates tend to cover the whole cooktop, making it easier to slide pots on and off the burners.

11. Air Sous Vide

This is essentially precision boiling in a bag. The process lasts two hours, and you'll still need to fix the food for a good texture.

But what's great about this process is that it lets you cook food to an even doneness all the way through. That means you won't have to worry about dry edges and rare centers.

What Are Some Kitchen Range Brands

There are a lot of kitchen range brands on the market. But below are some of the more well-known brands:

1. LG

LG is a mid-level brand that sells gas, electric, and induction ranges.

Perhaps its best freestanding gas range, the LRGL5823S, has five burners with a griddle. The max burner output is 20,000 BTU.

It has smart functionality too.

2. Frigidaire

Frigidaire is a mid-level-mass-market appliance that offers some of the least induction ranges.

The gas and electric ranges have classic designs. But they have time-saving and high-performance features.

3. Samsung

Samsung's not only known for its flagship smartphones and Galaxy Tabs. The Korea-based brand also sells gas, electric, and induction ranges.

Its selling point is that its newer models are equipped with built-in Wi-Fi.

4. Café

Café has the only 6-burner range — the CGS750P2MS1. The two burners under the griddle allow for a more consistent temperature.

The two power burners are found up front and have an output of 21,000 BTU AND 17,000 BTU.

5. Thermador

Thermador is a high-end brand that offers premium ranges. In fact, they can simmer at up to 100° by turning them on and off intermittently.

The brand also has a new range with better designs and Wi-Fi so that you can connect with it through the HomeConnect app.

6. Wolf

Wolf offers dual-stacked burners. Despite having only a single convection oven, it has a powerful infrared broiler at 1800°.

Their dual-fuel range is impressive — with higher output, VertiCross blower convection, and Wolf Gourmet.

The Wolf Gourmet feature lets you cook the food exactly how you want it.

All you have to do is input the food and how you want it cooked. Then, the system will automatically set up the time, temperature, and even recommended rack position.

7. BlueStar